JP6707304B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning drum type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachi-slot machine”).

Conventionally, gaming machines have realized various display effects depending on the gaming state and the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, a variation display and a stop display of a decorative design are realized, and an effect of notifying a lottery result by a combination of the decorative designs that are stopped and displayed is performed. In addition, before the decorative design is definitely stopped, a so-called reach state is displayed, followed by a post-reach effect (for example, an effect in which a special character or the like appears) that leads to notification of whether or not the prize is won. It is being appreciated. By realizing such various effects in accordance with a predetermined probability, it is possible to provide the player who is advancing the game with enjoyment and improve the player's interest in the effects.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-13703

However, due to various causes, the player may not be able to enjoy the performance .

The main advantage of the present invention is that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following modes or application examples.

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine,
A game board having a game area and an opening,
An inlet provided in the game area and capable of receiving a game medium,
A game medium detecting means capable of detecting the reception of the game medium by the receiving port;
Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information according to the detection of the game medium by the game medium detection means,
A lottery means capable of performing a lottery as to whether or not a bonus is awarded to the player, based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means,
Display means having a display area arranged in the opening,
When viewed from the front , a movable decorative body having a lens portion provided with a light emitting portion arranged at a position around the display area in the rear ,
Decorative body moving means for operating the movable decorative body,
Sound output means for outputting sound,
Performance control means capable of controlling the display means, the ornament moving means, and the sound output means, respectively.
Equipped with
The display means can display a display effect including a variation effect in the display area according to a result of the lottery based on the lottery information,
The effect control means,
While allowing the display means to output a specific sound while advancing the display effect in the display area, the movable decorative body can be operated by the decorative body moving means when the display area is viewed from the front. As a visible area of the display area is smaller than that in a state in which it is not performed, it is configured to be able to execute a movable decorative body effect that operates the movable decorative body,
The movable decorative body that is operated by the decorative body moving unit is such that the visible movable area of the display area becomes small when the display area is viewed from the front when the movable decorative body is executed. The display area of the display means so that the line of sight is blocked by the movable decorative body when the display area is viewed obliquely from the direction in which the movable decorative body is arranged in the standby state in which the operation by the means is not performed. The lens portion , which is provided so as to project from the side to the player side and is visible through the opening in the standby state before being operated by the ornament moving means, is operated by the ornament moving means. It is the movable decorative element is arranged so it becomes visible through the opening Oite the operation state after being,
When the display area is viewed obliquely from the direction in which the movable decoration is arranged, the movable decoration is such that the visible area of the display area is smaller than when the display area is viewed from the front. When the movable decoration is operated by the movable decoration, the movable decoration controlled by the effect control means when performing the movable decorative effect when viewed from a direction opposite to the direction in which the movable decorative element is arranged. gaming machine, characterized in that emission of the light emitting portion provided in the body may be visually recognized.

According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the effect and suppress a decrease in the game motivation .

It is a perspective view showing the state where the main body frame was opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment, and the door frame was opened with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the back of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame which constitute a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is the BB sectional view (A) of FIG. 10, the CC sectional view (B) of FIG. 12(A), the DD sectional view (C), and the EE sectional view (D). FIG. 6 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure of an upper shaft support fitting of a main body frame and an upper support fitting of an outer frame. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view (A) showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame and a perspective view (B) seen from below. It is a rear view of an upper support metal fitting part for explaining a relation between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a rear view of an upper support metal fitting part for explaining an operation of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as disassembled and seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the left unit of the side speaker illumination unit in the door frame base unit, which is disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26 seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the right unit of the side speaker illumination unit in the door frame base unit, which is disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 28 seen from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the ball feeding unit in a door frame base unit. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a joint unit portion of the door frame base unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the joint unit in an exploded manner. (A) is a front perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, (B) is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit. It is a perspective view which shows the top lamp illumination unit from diagonally lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp electric decoration unit by disassembling it for each main configuration and showing it from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing (A) from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles the top lamp reflector unit in a top lamp illumination unit, and is shown from the front with a top lamp base. FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 35 afterward. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the left rotation lamp in a top lamp illumination unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the right rotation lamp in a top lamp illumination unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the central rotating lamp in a top lamp illumination unit. It is a front perspective view of a plate unit. It is a rear perspective view of a plate unit. It is a top view of a dish unit. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 42. It is a rear view shown in the state where the plate back plate of the plate unit was removed. It is a perspective view shown afterwards in the state where the plate back plate of the plate unit and the ball rental unit were removed. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the plate unit for every main component. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 46 from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows the plate unit main body in a plate unit from the front. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 48 from the rear. It is a rear view which shows the 1st ball removal mechanism in a dish unit. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd ball removal mechanism in a dish unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the operation button unit in a dish unit. FIG. 6 is a bottom view of the dish unit with the manipulation button unit substrate of the manipulation button unit removed. It is a bottom perspective view which shows the main button of the operation button unit in a dish unit from the bottom. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view showing an exploded main button of an operation button unit in the dish unit. It is a sectional view of a handle device attached to a door frame. It is a perspective view showing a relation between an operation handle part and a joint unit which constitute a handle device. It is an exploded perspective view of the operation handle part in a handle device. It is an operation|movement figure for demonstrating operation|movement of an operation handle part and a joint unit. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle apparatus and the hitting ball launching device provided in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle apparatus and a hitting ball launching apparatus. (A) is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game balls in the dish unit, (B) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the second ball outlet and the flow of the game balls in the dish unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the horizontally long ball inflow port and the storage tray in a dish unit. It is a front perspective view of a glass unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the glass unit from the front. FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 afterward. It is a front view of the main part frame main body before attaching a part. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching a component. It is a side view of the main part frame main body before attaching a component. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main part frame main part before attaching a part. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the body frame which attached parts. It is the perspective view which looked at the state where the main part frame which attached the component was pivotally supported by the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached the components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the body frame which attached parts. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko machine taken along a horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko machine (main control board box portion). It is the perspective view seen from the front of the game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of the game board. It is a plan view of a game board. It is an enlarged perspective view of a removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board. It is a partial perspective view of the main body frame showing the structure of the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board. It is sectional drawing which cut|disconnects and shows in the longitudinal direction in the state which assembled the front component member in the game board, the game panel, and the panel holder. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the front component member which mainly comprises a game board, a game panel, a panel holder, etc., and was seen from diagonally front. FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 83 seen obliquely from behind. It is a perspective view which shows from the back diagonally in the state which fixed the main control board box to the board|substrate board holder. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 85 disassembled into a board substrate holder, a drawer holder, and a main control board box and is obliquely shown from behind. It is a schematic diagram of an exploded perspective view of a function display unit in the game board. It is a schematic diagram of a function display sticker. It is the partial view which saw the function display sticker of the game board through the game window. It is the perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball launching device, and the perspective view (B) in the state which removed the launching motor part. It is an exploded perspective view of a hitting ball launching device. It is a front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hitting ball launch device and a launch rail, and a perspective view (B) of a launch motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a hitting ball launch device and a launch rail in the state which has not operated the operation handle part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a hitting ball launch device and a launch rail in the state which is operating the operation handle part. It is the top view (A), front view (B), the perspective view (C) seen from the front, and the AA sectional view (D) of a front view (B) of the slide member provided in a hitting ball launching device. It is a perspective view (A), a top view (B), and a side view (C) of a prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 showing the relationship between the prize ball tank, the tank rail member, the ball passage unit, the prize ball unit, and the full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 showing the relationship among the prize ball tank, the tank rail member, the ball passage unit, the prize ball unit, and the full tank unit. It is sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball passage unit. It is an exploded perspective view showing a relation between a main frame, a ball passage unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit and the prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for explaining a connection structure of a ball passage unit and a prize ball unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for explaining a relation between a payout motor and a sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for explaining a passage and a drive relation of a prize ball unit. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 108. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of a full tank unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of a full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit and the foul mouth. It is a cross-sectional view cut at a bottom swing plate portion provided in the full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a rear perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. FIG. 6 is an enlarged side sectional view showing a structure for locking the lock device to the main body frame. It is a partial cross-sectional view cut horizontally in a position slightly below the vertical center of the pachinko machine. It is an expanded sectional view showing a detailed relation between a lock device and a side wall of a body frame. It is a side view (A) and a perspective view (B) seen from the front side of a lock device. A perspective view of the lock device seen from the back side (A), a perspective view of a slide rod for a glass door and a slide rod for a body frame slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the lock device (B), (C). It is an exploded perspective view of a lock device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect|action of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for body frames. It is a front view for explaining an operation of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back side of a substrate unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of a substrate unit. It is the front view seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder which forms the main body of the substrate unit. It is a rear view of a frame substrate holder. It is a rear view of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of a board unit in a state where a payout control board box and a terminal board box are removed. FIG. 6 is a plan view showing a connection relationship of each board provided in the board unit. It is the schematic which shows the electric connection of a board unit and a game board. It is a part of the rear view of the pachinko machine showing the wiring between the payout control board and the board unit. It is a front view of the game board for explaining the cross-sectional location of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 138. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. 137. It is the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, and is a perspective view seen from the back in the state where the cover body was opened. It is a side view of a pachinko machine to which a cover body according to a second embodiment is attached. It is the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, and is a perspective view seen from the open side of a cover body. It is the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, and is a perspective view seen from the shaft support side of a cover body. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the state which removed the cover concerning a second embodiment. FIG. 9 is a perspective view of a payout control board box that overlaps and abuts a lower side portion of a cover body according to a second embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is a rear view for explaining an operation of a cylinder lock provided in a cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is an AA sectional view of FIG. It is a BB sectional view of FIG. 143. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. 143. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left rear. It is the perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main component, and was seen from the diagonal front. It is the perspective view which looked at what disassembled from the back diagonally. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled each component mounted|worn with the game panel for every component material, and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit from the slanting front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the starting opening unit for every member and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at an electric winning hole unit diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the electric winning opening unit for every member, and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at the side winning a prize mouth unit from the slanting front. It is the perspective view which looked at the gate unit from the slanting front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the diagonal front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the center accessory and saw it diagonally from front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the slanting front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled for every main component of a back unit and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at the character decoration unit from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the character decoration unit for every member and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at the revolving light unit diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the rotation light unit for every member and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left movable decoration unit from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the upper left movable decoration unit for every member and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the upper handgun unit and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower left movable decoration unit from the slanting front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the lower left movable decoration unit for every member and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower movable decoration unit from the slanting front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the lower movable decoration unit for every member and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at a part of back unit from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled a part of main unit for every main component, and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back box from the slanting front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper space formation unit from the slanting front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the upper space formation unit for every member and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at a lower space formation unit and a support box from the slanting front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the lower space formation unit and the support box for every member, and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which looked at the display unit from the slanting front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the display unit for every member and was seen from diagonally front. It is a front view of the game board which shows the operation state of each movable decoration unit. It is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the player side on the right side of the adjacent seat. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the player side on the left side of the adjacent seat. It is a block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main processing in a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power failure. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special control processing. It is a flow chart which shows a starting mouth winning process. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during change. It is the flowchart which shows one example of big hit game start processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the small hit game start processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the big hit game processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a small hit game process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number storage means for special symbols. It is a flow chart which shows an example of sub main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of 16ms regular processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command analysis processing (Step S1100). It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control processing (step S1200). It is a flow chart which shows an example of decoration design variation start processing (Step S1210). It is a table showing a list of effect patterns. It is a table showing a list of effect patterns. 6 is a table showing commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a). It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect on the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is an explanatory view showing a pattern of a display effect including a reach effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a pattern of an effect including a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of the number of reservations on the display screen 1400a.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, 3 is a side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame configuring the pachinko machine.

As shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown) of a game hall, and an openable and closably pivotally supported outer frame 2 and a game board. 4, a main body frame 3 to which the player can mount 4, a game window 101 in which the player can visually recognize a game area 605 which is rotatably supported by the main body frame 3 and is formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is driven, and the game window 101. And a door frame 5 provided with a plate unit 300 as a storage plate for storing balls to be paid out depending on the result of the game.

A cover reinforcing metal member 14 for reinforcing the decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front thereof. In addition to the game board 4 which can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3 as described above, a hitting ball launching device 650 (see FIG. 5) is provided on the lower rear surface thereof, and the door frame 5 and the main body other than the game board 4 are attached. A board unit 1100, on which various control boards and power boards for controlling electrical parts provided in the frame 3 are collectively provided, is attached to cover a rear surface opening 580 (see FIG. 6) of the body frame 3. The cover body 1250 is detachably provided. Further, in addition to the dish unit 300 described above, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 450 and a handle device 400 so as to close the game window 101. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same rectangular size when viewed from the front, and the main body frame 3 cannot be visually recognized from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame 2 seen from the front, FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 12 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 12 is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 10 (A), a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 12A, and a sectional view taken along the line DD. , EE sectional drawing (D). FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a structure for attaching and detaching the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 shows a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame. It is the exploded perspective view (A) which shows a mounting state, and the perspective view (B) seen from the lower part. Further, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support fitting part for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member, and FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support fitting part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right side frame plates 12 extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. , 13 are connected to each other by a connecting member 19 for connecting the respective end portions, so that they are assembled in a rectangular shape. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape having a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding central portion is an engagement notch formed at the center of both end portions of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The rear surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the flat surfaces of the left and right portions which are fitted to the portion 20, and the side frame plates 12, 13 are attached to one side surface of the left and right portions which are lowered one step. The inner surface of the abuts against.

Then, in this state, the insertion holes 21 formed on both sides of the engaging cutout portion 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and both sides of the engaging cutout portion 20 of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right of which the connecting member 19 is lowered by one step. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 22 formed in the plane of the portion (indicated on the connecting member 19 connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 in FIG. 9), but other connecting members 19 (There are also present in the above), and are fixed by a plurality (two in the case shown) of connecting screws 23 from above or below, and a plurality of ( A plurality of (from the side in the figure) mounting holes 24 and a plurality of (three in the figure) connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 which are lowered by one step are aligned from the outer side. The upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 are firmly connected and fixed by fastening with the connecting screws 26 and 27 (three in the figure). However, one of the three connecting screws 26 and 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 to the connecting member 19, but connects the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The member 19 is directly connected from the side.

Among the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 that form the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as the conventional one, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are the same. Is made of a light-weight metal, for example, an extruded plate of aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as the conventional one is that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game arcade, a predetermined angle is formed with respect to the vertical plane of the island. It is necessary to perform a fixing work, but such a work is performed by striking nails on the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that it is easy to strike the nails. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of extruded aluminum alloy plates is that the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be reduced while maintaining strength compared to conventional wood. The lateral widths of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 69) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to each other when viewed from the front can be widened. Therefore, the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

If the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of aluminum alloy flat plates, sufficient rigidity cannot be ensured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. .) is formed inside by a rib to open the rear side (the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 11) and is drawn and molded so that the thickness h1 of the rear portion becomes thicker. There is. Of course, this wall thickness h1 is the same as or slightly thinner than the wall thickness of the conventional wood.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12B and 12D, in front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, one portion of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 with one step lowered is fitted into the groove portion 29 (side). The groove portion 29 of the frame plate 13 is formed with a mark (shown in FIG. 8). As shown in FIGS. 12(B) to 12(D), the groove portion 29 of the side frame plate 12 has a flat plate shape whose inner side surface is in contact with the other portion of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 lowered by one step. However, a shallow concave portion for reducing material is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, as shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 12B, a concave portion 30 (side frame) into which the hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support fitting 45 is inserted is formed on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove portion 29 is formed. The recess 30 of the plate 13 is formed with a mark (shown in FIG. 9).

In addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support metal fitting 45 is provided on the upper side of the side frame plate 12 on the shaft support side formed as described above outside the side frame plate 12. A mounting hole 31 for fastening with a fastening screw 32 is formed in the lower portion of the lower support fitting 66, and a mounting hole 69 formed in the vertical abutment piece 72 of the lower support metal fitting 66 is formed in the lower portion of the mounting hole 31. A mounting hole 33 for fastening is provided. Further, a mounting hole 35 for fixing the side frame plate 12 and the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 with a fixing screw 36 is formed in the lower part of the mounting hole 33 and in the front part of the side frame plate 12.

On the other hand, in addition to the structure for mounting the connecting member 19, the side frame portion 13 on the open side is provided with a mounting hole 37 for mounting a closing projection 38 with a mounting screw 39 on the upper portion thereof, and for closing the lower portion thereof. A mounting hole 40 for mounting the projection 41 for mounting with a mounting screw 42 is formed, and a mounting hole 43 for mounting the side frame plate 13 and the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 with a mounting screw 44 is further provided at the lowermost position. Has been formed.

The closing projections 38 and 41 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 121) of the locking device 1000 attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when closing the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. As described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are engaged with each other. The engagement is released and the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, the cover reinforcing metal fittings 14 fixed to the lower front surfaces of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12, 13 are such that the main body frame 3 is placed on the upper surface thereof when the cover reinforcing metal fittings 14 are closed. The surface and the side surface of the are covered with the decorative cover plate 15. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer frame 2 on the open side of the decorative cover plate 15.

By the way, as a structure in which the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable, it is attached along one side upper surface of the upper support metal fitting 45 and the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 which also have a function of connecting the upper frame board 10 and the side frame board 12. A lower support fitting 66 is provided. In the upper support fitting 45, a support hook hole 47 formed by bending from a side of the support projection piece 46 toward a central portion of the tip is formed in a support projection piece 46 projecting forward, and this support hook is formed. A shaft support pin 504 (see FIG. 71) of an upper shaft support fitting 503 of the body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the hole 47.

Further, the lower support metal fitting 66 is also formed in a shape projecting forward, and a projecting projection 68 is projected upward on this projecting portion, and a frame supporting plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is formed on the projecting projection 68. The support hole formed in FIG. 72) is inserted. Therefore, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after the support holes formed on the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 are engaged with the support protrusions 68 of the lower support fitting 66, By suspending the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 503 to the support hook hole 47, the shaft support can be easily opened and closed.

Further, the upper support metal fitting 45 is mounted on the mounting step portion 49 formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the shaft support side. A plurality of (two in the case shown) mounting holes 48 and a plurality (two in the case shown) mounting holes 50 formed in the mounting step portion 49 are aligned, and the mounting screws 51 are inserted from above to form an upper frame. The upper support fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by being fixed to the holding plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

Further, on the outer side of the upper support metal fitting 45, there is a hanging piece portion 53 that comes into contact with the outside of the side frame plate 12, and a mounting hole is also formed in the hanging piece portion 53. The upper support fitting 45 and the side frame plate 12 are fixed by fastening the and the fixing screws 32 together, and the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 are connected via the upper support fitting 45. ..

On the other hand, the lower support fitting 66 is fixed with the fixing screw 34 in a state where the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical abutment piece 72 are aligned with each other, as described above. By inserting a mounting screw 71 into a mounting hole 70 formed in the middle of a horizontal surface of the metal fitting 66, the metal fitting 66 is fixed to the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13, which are the components thereof, are connected by the connecting member 19, so that the connecting member 19 is a side frame. Since it is firmly attached to the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and the connection member 19 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the mounting strength is high and the shape of the square is strong. It can be a framework. In addition to the above-described engagement state of the connecting member 19 with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, when attaching the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13, the left and right of the connecting member 19 lowered one step in the groove portion 29. Since one part of the parts is fitted, the connection member 19 is firmly attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13, which also improves the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately positions it. Can be done.

When the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 19 and then the upper support fitting 45 is attached to a predetermined position, as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member that projects outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each frame plate 10, 11, 12, 13, when installing the pachinko machine 1 on a pachinko island stand (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached closely to the adjacent ball lender. Further, even when the lower support fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the cover reinforcing fitting 14 and the upper surface of the lower support fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 14, a lock member 80 is rotatably supported on the back surface of the upper support fitting 45 for rotatably supporting the body frame 3. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(A), the support protrusion piece 46 of the upper support metal fitting 45 is formed as a flat plate having an arcuate tip and is perpendicular to the outer edge of the support protrusion piece 46. A drooping wall 46a that is bent to form is formed. The hanging wall 46a can improve the strength of the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support fitting 45, and make the lock member 80, which will be described below, invisible when viewed from the front, to improve the appearance, and The elastic member 80c of the lock member 80, which will be described next, is used as a portion where the distal end contact portion of the elastic member 80c abuts, and as a stop portion so that the lock member 80 does not jump out from the supporting protrusion 46. Further, the support hook hole 47 formed in the support projecting piece 46 is formed by bending so as to be inclined inward from the side on the opposite side where the hanging wall 46a is not formed, toward the inside, and further toward the center of the tip. Has been done. The groove size of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 504.

Further, the hanging wall 46a is formed by bending the support hook piece 47 from the front inlet end portion of the support hook hole 47 along the outer edges of the support projecting piece 46 and the upper support metal fitting 45 at a right angle. Is bent inward at the inlet end portion in front of to form a stop hanging portion 47a. Further, a mounting hole 46b is bored substantially in the center of the support projecting piece 46, and a lock member 80 is rotatably supported by a rivet 81 in the mounting hole 46b. The lock member 80 is molded of synthetic resin, and the stopper portion 80a and the operating portion 80b are formed in an L shape, and the arc-shaped elastic piece 80c is integrally extended on the side opposite to the operating portion 80b. It is set up. Further, a mounting hole 80d into which the rivet 81 is inserted is formed in an L-shaped base portion formed by the stopper portion 80a and the operating portion 80b. Then, in the state in which the lock member 80 is attached to the attachment hole 46b by the rivet 81 and is rotatably fixed to the back surface of the support protrusion piece 46, as shown in FIG. The portion is in contact with the inner side surface of the hanging wall 46a, and the stopper portion 80a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47. At this time, the tip portion of the stopper portion 80a is not in a state of closing the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47. That is, in a normal state, a space into which the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 503 of the main body frame 3 is inserted is formed in the leading space portion of the support hook hole 47.

By the way, a state in which the shaft support pin 504 is inserted into the distal end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47 and the lateral side of the distal end of the stopper portion 80a faces the stop hanging portion 47a at the inlet end portion (in this state, In a normal shaft support state in which there is a slight gap between the side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a and the stop hanging portion 47a, and the state is not in contact, the supporting hook hole 47 formed by bending. The centers of the shaft support pin 504 located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion and the tip end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a are diagonally displaced and face each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 504, which supports the heavy body frame 3, is in contact with the tip portion of the support hook hole 47, so that the shaft support pin 504 is provided. Since almost no load is applied to the tip end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a from the above, the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 is not loaded. Further, as shown in FIG. 15(A), the tip end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is formed in an arc shape so that the lock member 80 can be smoothly rotated when it is rotated by operating the operation portion 80b. .. In the illustrated case, the arc center of the arcuate tip surface 80e is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80).

Therefore, when the axial support pin 504 acts on the arcuate tip surface 80e in the direction in which the axial support pin 504 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47, the acting force F is Component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the support pin 504 and the arcuate tip surface 80e (the normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip surface 80e), and the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 504 and the support hook hole 47. When the force is divided into the component force F2 acting on the abutting portion with the inner surface of one side, the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 81 (rotation center of the lock member 80), so that the stopper of the lock member 80 is A moment for rotating the tip end of the portion 80a in a direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) that separates from the support protrusion 46 does not work, and the pivot pin 504 causes the tip of the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80 and the inclined shape of the support hook hole 47. The state of being sandwiched between the inner surface on one side of the hole is maintained. Therefore, the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 is not always loaded even in the normal shaft support state or the state in which the acting force of the shaft support pin 504 is applied to the lock member 80, and the elastic member integrally formed of synthetic resin is used. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation of the piece 80c due to creep, and to prevent the shaft support pin 504 from falling out of the support hook hole 47 for a long period of time. Even if unreasonable force is applied to rotate the tip of the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80 in a direction (clockwise in the drawing) away from the support protruding piece 46, one side of the tip portion of the stopper portion 80a is rotated. Contacts the stop hanging portion 47a and does not rotate in the direction of further disengagement, so that the lock member 80 does not protrude to the outside of the supporting projection piece 46.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 15A, since the arc center of the arcuate tip surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is the center of the rivet 81 (rotation center of the lock member 80), Although it has been described that the lock member 80 does not generate the rotation moment even when the acting force F in the direction of exiting along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47 is applied, as shown in FIG. When the radius of curvature of the arcuate distal end surface 80f of the portion 80a is further reduced and the pivotal support position of the lock member 80 by the rivet 81 is inside the support protrusion piece 46, the pivot pin 504 tilts the support hook hole 47. When the acting force F is applied to the arcuate tip surface 80f in the direction of slipping out along the inclination of the circular hole portion, the acting force F is applied to the pivot pin 504 and the arcuate tip surface 80f. A component force F1 acting on a part (direction of a normal line of an arc of the arcuate tip surface 80f) and a component force acting on a contact part between the shaft support pin 504 and one inner surface of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47. In the case of dividing into F2 and F2, the rotational moment acts by the component force F1 to rotate the lock member 80 in the direction of the arrow (clockwise rotation direction) shown in the figure, but even if the lock member 80 rotates, one end of the stopper portion 80a Since the side portion only abuts on the stop hanging portion 47a, the lock member 80 does not protrude to the outside of the support protrusion piece 46, and the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 is not loaded.

That is, what can be understood from the embodiment shown in FIGS. 15(A) and 15(B) is that the action force is exerted in the direction in which the pivot pin 504 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47. When F is applied and abuts against the tip surfaces 80e, 80f, a rotational moment that rotates the lock member 80 by the component force F1 of the acting force F acting on the abutting portion between the shaft support pin 504 and the tip surfaces 80e, 80f. By arranging the rotation center (the shaft fixed by the rivet 81) of the lock member 80 at a position where the locking member 80 does not occur or a position where a rotation moment that causes the tip of the lock member 80 to rotate toward the outside of the support protrusion 46 is generated. The load is not applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times, and even if the lock member 80 rotates, one end of the stopper portion 80a only abuts against the stop hanging portion 47a. The member 80 does not protrude outside the supporting protrusion 46. Even if the shape of the front end surface of the stopper portion 80a is not arcuate, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 80 is directed toward the outside of the support projecting piece 46. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 81) at a position where a rotation moment for rotation is generated, the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 is not always loaded, and the lock member is not always loaded. The applicant confirmed that the lock member 80 does not protrude to the outside of the support protrusion piece 46 because only one side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a abuts the stop hanging portion 47a even if the stopper 80a rotates. is doing.

The operation of the lock member 80 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIG. As a premise for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, the support protrusions 68 of the lower support fitting 66 are provided in support holes (not shown) formed in the frame support plate 506 (see FIG. 71) of the main body frame 3. Must be inserted. On such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16(A), the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 503 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80 and pushed in, thereby As shown in FIG. 16(B), the lock member 80 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 80c, so that the shaft support pin 504 can be inserted into the support hook hole 47. When the pivot pin 504 reaches the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47, the pivot pin 504 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 80a do not come into contact with each other, as shown in FIG. 16(C). Therefore, the lock member 80 is biased by the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 47, and at the same time, The tip portion of the stopper portion 80 a faces the shaft support pin 504 so that the shaft support pin 504 does not fall out from the support hook hole 47. Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening/closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 504 from the support hook hole 47, as shown in FIG. 16(E), a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projection piece 46 and the operation portion 80b of the lock member 80 is moved counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 80 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 80a is retracted from the support hook hole 47, so that the shaft support pin 504 is supported. It can be taken out through the hole 47. After that, the main body frame 3 can be removed from the outer frame 2 by lifting the main body frame 3 and releasing the engagement between the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 and the support protrusions 68 of the lower support fitting 66. .

As described above, in the lock member 80 provided on the upper support fitting 45 of the outer frame 2 according to the second embodiment, the stopper portion 80a, the operation portion 80b, and the elastic piece 80c are integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it can be attached to the back surface of the upper support metal fitting 45 very easily, and since it has an extremely simple structure, it is possible to reduce failures and reduce the manufacturing cost. When the axial support pin 504 acts on the tip surfaces 80e and 80f by acting force F in the direction of slipping out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47, the axial support pin 504 of the acting force F is applied. And a position where no rotational moment for rotating the lock member 80 is generated by the component force F1 that acts on the contact portion between the tip surfaces 80e and 80f, or the tip of the lock member 80 is rotated toward the outside of the support protrusion piece 46. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 81) at the position where the rotation moment is generated, the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 is not always loaded, and is integrally made of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation of the formed elastic piece 80c due to creep, prevent the shaft support pin 504 from falling out of the support hook hole 47 for a long period of time, and prevent the stopper portion from rotating even when the lock member 80 rotates. Since only one side of the front end of 80a contacts the stop hanging portion 47a, the locking member 80 does not protrude to the outside of the support protrusion piece 46.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. 17 is a front view of the door frame, and FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the right front side, and FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front side. 21 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

As shown in FIGS. 17, 18, 21, and 22, the door frame 5 has a door frame base unit having a game window 101 in which the outer shape is formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and the inner peripheral shape is a vertically long polygonal shape. 100, a horizontally long top lamp illumination unit 200 mounted on the front of the door frame base unit 100 above the game window 101, and a dish unit 300 mounted on the front of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, A glass unit 450 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the game window 101, and a security cover 470 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear side of the glass unit 450. It has and. The door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 is provided with side speaker illumination units 120 on the left and right sides of the game window 101, which will be described in detail later. The outer periphery of the game window 101 is surrounded by the decoration unit 200 and the dish unit 300. Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle device 400 for driving a game ball on the left side (open side) of the dish unit 300 as viewed from the front.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 31. 23A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 23B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the rear. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the left unit of the side speaker illumination unit in the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26 as seen from the rear. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the right unit of the side speaker illumination unit in the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 28 as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball feeding unit in the door frame base unit in an exploded manner. 31A is an enlarged perspective view showing a joint unit portion of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 31B is an exploded perspective view showing the joint unit in an exploded manner.

As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular outer shape and a door frame base main body having a game window 101 penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a vertically elongated inner periphery. 110, side speaker illumination units 120 fixed to the left and right sides of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame base body 110, and a metal frame-shaped reinforcing sheet metal 140 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110. A horizontally long mounting base 160 fixed to the rear side of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and a ball feeding unit 170 fixed to the mounting base 160 and sending the game balls supplied from the dish unit 300 to the ball striking device 650 one by one. The ball launching device 650 is provided on the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and substantially below the ball feeding unit 170 fixed via the reinforcing sheet metal 140 and the mounting base 160, and rotates the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400. And a joint unit 180 for transmitting the

Further, the door frame base unit 100 corresponds to the lower left decorative substrate 190 fixed to the lower left side of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame base body 110, and the ball removal path 393 of the dish unit 300 in the door frame base body 110. The ball removal path cover 191 that closes the ball removal path opening 112 formed at the position, the door decoration drive board 192 fixed below the game window 101 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and the door decoration drive A door decoration drive substrate cover 193 that covers the substrate 192 from the rear, a handle relay terminal plate 194 that is fixed directly above the joint unit 180 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base body on the lower side of the game window 101. A wiring cover 195 that is formed on the rear side of the 110 and closes the wiring receiving groove 110b that can store the wiring from the lower left decorative substrate 190 and the handle relay terminal plate 194 from the rear side, and is disposed on the left and right upper portions of the game window 101, respectively. A lock lever 196 pivotally supported on the rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided.

In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the rigidity of the whole is improved by fixing the reinforcing sheet metal 140, which is a metal sheet metal assembled with rivets, to the rear side of the rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has the strength to sufficiently support the top lamp lighting unit 200, the dish unit 300, and the like.

Further, a plurality of LEDs 190a are mounted on the front surface of the lower left decoration substrate 190 of the door frame base unit 100, so that the left end portion of the plate unit 300, which will be described later, can be illuminated and decorated. On the other hand, the door decoration drive board 192 is provided in the electric decoration parts and electric parts (LEDs and lamps mounted on each board, speakers 121 and 391, and the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400) provided in the door frame 5. Wiring from the switch, ball rental unit 301, operation button unit 370, etc.) is integrated and connected, and wiring from the door decoration drive board 192 is incorporated in the board unit 1100 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 Door relay board The prize ball payout control board 1186 and the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 166) of the main control board box 624 attached to the game board 4 are connected via 1102 and the like.

[1-2A-1. Door frame base body]
First, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically long frame shape, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and has a vertically elongated inner shape. The game window 101 having a shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. In this door frame base body 110, the upper side formed by the game window 101 and the widths of the left and right side sides are such that the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 141, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area can be easily formed as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. It has become.

Further, below the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a prize ball passage port 111 through which the prize ball communication gutter 343 of the plate unit 300 penetrates in the upper part of the shaft support side (left side in front view), and the prize ball. A ball-removing path opening 112 formed at a position corresponding to the ball-removing path 393 in the dish unit 300 below the passage opening 111, and a ball for mounting the ball-feeding unit 170 on the upper side of the opening side (right side in front view). The feed opening 113, a lock hole 114 into which a cylinder lock 1010 described below is inserted further toward the open side of the ball feed opening 113, and a cam insertion opening 115 into which a cam 416 of the handle device 400 can be inserted below the ball feed opening 113. Are formed so as to penetrate the door frame base body 110, respectively.

Further, in the door frame base main body 110, a mounting opening 116 for mounting the mounting elastic pieces 473 of the security cover 470, which will be described later in detail on the left and right sides of the lower end of the game window 101, and the mounting opening 116, respectively left and right. A speaker opening 117 for escaping the rear ends of the left and right lower side speakers 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120, which is arranged outside and will be described later, is formed so as to penetrate therethrough.

Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, a glass unit support step 110a with which the front outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 450 is indented to the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the game window 101, and the game window 101. On the lower side, a wiring accommodating groove 110b is formed which is recessed to the front side at a position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 and capable of accommodating wiring, and a cam insertion opening 115 is opened to mount a recessed joint unit 180 toward the front side. And a joint unit mounting recess 110c for

Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, door frame projecting pieces 110d and 110e are formed which project rearward by a predetermined amount from the lower side thereof. The door frame 5 is positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3 by being inserted into the engaging grooves 584 and 585. The amount of rearward protrusion of the door frame protrusion 110d is larger than the amount of protrusion of the door frame protrusion 110e.

Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110h projecting forward for fixing the top lamp lighting unit 200 on the upper front surface thereof, and on the rear surface thereof. A stop lever mounting portion 110i for rotatably supporting the stop lever 196 is provided. In addition, in addition to the door frame base body 110, a large number of mounting bosses and mounting holes for fixing the side speaker lighting unit 120, the reinforcing sheet metal 140, the mounting base 160, the dish unit 300 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. ing.

[1-2A-2. Side speaker illumination unit]
Then, the side speaker illumination unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 illuminates (luminesce) the left and right sides of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame 5 and also arranges the four speakers arranged at the four corners of the game window 101. The side speaker 121 can emit predetermined music, sound effects and the like to the player, and the left side speaker illumination unit 120L arranged on the pivotal support side (left side in front view) of the game window 101. And a right side speaker illumination unit 120R arranged on the open side (right side in front view) of the game window 101. The side speaker lighting unit 120 includes a vertically long lighting unit 122 and a sound unit 130 having side speakers 121 arranged above and below the lighting unit 122 in each of the left and right units, and the left and right units are substantially symmetrical. It is composed.

More specifically, the illumination portion 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 includes a vertically elongated semicylindrical transparent side illumination lens 123 and a side illumination lens 123, as shown in exploded views in FIGS. 26 to 29. Of the transparent side-illumination reflector 124, which is disposed on the rear side of the side-illumination lens 123 and constitutes a cylinder, and the side-illumination base 125, which is disposed on the rear side of the side-illumination reflector 124, and the side-illumination base 125. The side decoration substrate 126 fixed to the rear side, and the side decoration lens formed by enclosing the upper end and the lower end of the side decoration lens 123 and the side decoration reflector 124 from the front side, respectively, are attached to the side decoration base 125. 123 and a side-illumination reflector 124 for supporting the side-illumination reflector 124, a flash lens 128 having a light-transmitting property for closing the flash opening 127a of the side-illumination flash cover 127 from the rear side, and the rear of the flash lens 128. And a flash substrate 129 disposed on the side and supported on the front surface of the side illumination base 125.

The illumination portion 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 includes a plurality of color LEDs 126a capable of emitting various colors at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction on the front surface of the side illumination substrate 126, and high brightness above and below the LEDs 126a. The white LEDs 126b are mounted respectively. Further, openings 124a and 125a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the side-illumination reflector 124 and the side-illumination base 125 at positions corresponding to the LEDs 126a and 126b of the side-illumination substrate 126, respectively. Light from the LEDs 126a and 126b mounted on the 126 can be emitted forward through the opening 125a of the side illuminated base 125 and the opening 124a of the side illuminated reflector 124.

In the illuminated portion 122, inside the transparent cylinders of the side illuminated lens 123 and the side illuminated reflector 124, inside the entire inner circumference of the side illuminated lens 123 and a part of the inner circumference of the side illuminated reflector 124. Thus, the side lens sheet 123a having a substantially U-shaped cross section is arranged. The side lens sheet 123a is formed by a known optical sheet that makes transmitted light and reflected light look like a pearl or a chromatic shape. From the side of the player, the side lens sheet 123a allows the side illuminated lens 123 Also, it is possible to give an appearance as if a fluorescent tube (fluorescent tube) is arranged in a transparent column (pipe) formed by the side-illumination reflector 124.

Further, in the lighting portion 122, the side lighting reflector 124 has a plurality of openings 124a formed corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 126a of the side decoration substrate 126, and a dividing wall 124b for vertically dividing the opening 124a into three groups. The dividing wall 124b suppresses the light from the predetermined LED 126a from entering another group. In other words, the dividing wall 124b can clearly divide the fluorescent tube formed by the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 into upper, middle, and lower three tubes. Therefore, by appropriately emitting the plurality of LEDs 126a mounted on the side decoration substrate 126, the fluorescent tube is made to emit light in whole or in part, or in each of the upper, middle, and lower parts to emit various colors. You can do it.

In addition, the side-illumination reflector 124 is formed with a lens recess 124c recessed from the front side at a position corresponding to the upper and lower LEDs 126b on the side decoration substrate 126, and the lens recess 124c has a semi-circular sub-lens from the front side. 122a (see FIGS. 28 and 29) is inserted. With the sub-lens 122a and the LED 126b, the electric decoration section 122 of the present example makes only the LED 126b emit strong light before the LED 126a emits light, and thus the fluorescent tube formed by the side electric decoration lens 123 and the side electric reflector 124. As with a real fluorescent lamp, it is possible to produce a light emission effect in which only both ends illuminate before lighting.

Further, in the illumination section 122, a flash light 129a (for example, an ultra-high brightness white LED or the like) capable of emitting strong light is attached to the front surface of a flash substrate 129 supported on the rear side of the side illumination flash cover 127. By causing the flash light 129a to emit light, a flash light can be emitted to the player side.

The acoustic portion 130 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 is a substantially disk made of a speaker ornament 131 arranged at the forefront and having a substantially circular speaker opening 131a, and a punching metal that closes the speaker opening 131a of the speaker ornament 131 from the rear side. -Shaped speaker cover 132, a decorative spacer 133 arranged behind the speaker cover 132 in cooperation with the speaker decoration 131, sandwiching the speaker cover and having a circular speaker front support opening 133a, and a speaker of the decorative spacer 133. Mainly includes a side speaker 121 arranged to close the front support port 133a from the rear side, and a back pressing member 134 having a speaker fitting port 134a fitted to the outer periphery of the side speaker 121 from the rear side. ..

As shown in the figure, the acoustic portion 130 has speaker ornaments 131, ornament spacers 133, and back pressing members 134 having different shapes depending on the mounting positions. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the acoustic portion 130 at the upper left in a front view has a decorative portion 131b that is formed in a cylindrical shape on the speaker ornament 131 and extends outward from the left side. The decoration spacer 133 has a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the speaker decoration 131, and the back-pressing member 134 is provided with a back-pressing decoration portion 134b that is paired with the decoration portion 131b of the speaker decoration 131. The upper left acoustic part 130 is further provided with a hinge cover 135 arranged above the back-pressing decorative part 134b of the back-pressing member 134 and covering the lower side of the shaft pin 145 of the upper shaft support 146 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140. There is. In the lower left acoustic part 130 when viewed from the front, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a plate shape having the decoration part 131b, and the decoration spacer 133 is provided with a spacer decoration part 133b that forms a pair with the decoration part 131b of the speaker decoration 131. The back holding member 134 is formed in a ring shape.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, in the acoustic portion 130 on the upper right in a front view, the speaker ornament 131 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the ornament spacer 133 and the back pressing member 134 are inserted into the speaker ornament 131. It is formed in a possible cylindrical shape. In the lower right acoustic part 130 in front view, the speaker ornament 131 is formed in an annular shape, and the ornament spacer 133 is formed in a flat plate shape having a spacer ornament part 133b that abuts on the rear surface of the speaker ornament 131. In addition, the back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape. The lower right acoustic part 130 further includes a decorative base 136 further behind the back pressing member 134 and having a back pressing member fixing port 136a penetrating the back pressing member 134 from the front side. ..

As shown in the figure, the four side speakers 121 in the side speaker lighting unit 120 of the present example are arranged at the four corners of the game window 101, up and down, and to the head of the player who is playing the game. Are also arranged at the top, bottom, left, and right positions, so that an independent acoustic signal (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, and a lower speaker 391 described later in 2.1ch surround for each side speaker 121 is added. By sending a signal or a 4.1 ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before. The side speaker 121 of this example is mainly in charge of the middle to high range, and the lower speaker 391 is in charge of the low range.

[1-2A-3. Reinforcing sheet metal]
Next, as shown mainly in FIGS. 24 and 25, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base body. The shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 142 attached along the rear surface of the shaft supporting side of 110, the open side reinforcing metal plate 143 mounted along the rear surface of the opening side peripheral part of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. A lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 attached along the back surface of the lower side of the game window 101 is fastened to each other with screws or the like to form a rectangular shape.

As shown in FIG. 24, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 146 having a shaft pin 145 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower end portions of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 148 having a shaft pin 147 (see FIG. 18) are integrally formed. Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 145, 147 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal piece 503 and the lower shaft support metal member 509 formed on the upper and lower sides of the main body frame 3 on the shaft support side. It can be opened and closed freely.

Further, the lower reinforcing metal plate 144 of the reinforcing metal plate 140 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base body 110. The lower bent protrusion 149 is bent rearward (see FIG. 25), and both sides of the upper long side edge are the upper bent protrusion 150 bent rearward. However, the portions sandwiched by the upper bending protrusions 150 on both sides thereof are vertical bending protrusions 151 extending in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 149 is not so large that the lower bent protrusion 149 engages with the groove or the recess to form the concave-convex engagement, and is formed to enhance the strength. On the other hand, the protruding amount of the upper bending protrusion 150 on both sides is slightly larger than the protruding amount of the lower bending protrusion 149 to prevent intrusion of illegal tools from below to some extent, but rather, the lower reinforcement in the present embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 144 is the vertical bending protrusion 151.

The vertical bending protrusion 151 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper edge shape matches the lower edge shape of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450, which will be described later, and when the glass unit 450 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5. In addition, the upper end piece of the vertical bending projection piece 151 is adapted to engage with the engagement groove 451c formed along the outer periphery of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 substantially at the center in the width direction (front-back direction). . The lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is provided with a prize ball passing port covering portion 152 that protects the outer periphery of the prize ball passing port 111 formed in the door frame base body 110 except the bottom surface.

In addition, the open side reinforcing metal plate 143 of the reinforcing metal plate 140 includes the open side outer bending protrusions 153, which are bent rearward, on both sides of a long side between the upper reinforcing metal plate 141 and the lower reinforcing metal plate 144. Each of the open-side inner bent protrusions 154 is formed, and the open-side inner bent protrusion 154 is formed to extend rearward longer than the open-side outer bent protrusion 153. Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 is provided with bending protrusions 155 and 156, which are bent rearward, on both sides of their long sides. Further, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 142 is provided with a shaft-supporting side L-shaped bending protrusion 157 extending rearward at the outer end of the long side thereof. Further, a hook cover 158 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 described later is attached to the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143.

[1-2A-4. Mounting table/ball feeding unit]
Next, the mounting base 160 and the ball feeding unit 170 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 18, 24, and 25, the mounting base 160 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the back surface of the plate portion of the door frame base unit 100, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin similar to the security cover 470. It has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape with its front open. This mounting base 160 is designed to smoothly guide the ball fired from the firing rail 515 to the game board 4 by the rear surface of the mounting base 160 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed. It is formed so as to sandwich 515, and a ball flying guide surface 161 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting base 160. By the way, in the mounting base 160 according to the present embodiment, an award ball passage opening 162 for penetrating the rearward projecting portion of the award ball passage port covering portion 152 formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is provided in the upper portion on the shaft support side. A ball feed unit mounting recess 163 for mounting the ball feed unit 170 is formed in the lower part of the open side thereof. An area oblique to the ball feeding unit mounting recess 163 is a ball flying guiding surface 161.

In addition, a notch 164 for a lid is formed in the lower middle part of the mounting base 160 so that a finger can be inserted when removing a ball removal path cover 191, a door decoration drive board 192, and a door decoration drive board cover 193 described later. At the same time, a vertical wall 165 is formed vertically on a part of the upper side of the mounting table 160. As shown in FIG. 18, the standing wall 165 is provided so as to prevent the lower portion of the security cover 470 from moving forward by coming into contact with the front surface of the security cover 470 when the security cover 470 is attached.

Further, the mounting base 160 is provided with a crime prevention protrusion 166 that is obliquely provided rearward from the above-described ball flight guide surface 161 to the prize ball passage opening 162. As described above, the crime prevention protrusion 166 is provided between the crime prevention space 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 and the inner protrusions at the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. It constitutes an engaging portion.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, the ball feeding unit 170 includes a box-shaped main body 171 fixed in the ball feeding unit mounting recess 163, and a ball rotatably supported by a support shaft 171a of the main body 171. The feeding member 172 and a weight 173 pivotally supported by the ball feeding member 172 while rotating the ball receiving portion of the ball feeding member 172 upward are provided. The ball feeding unit 170 is located at the lower end of the third inclined surface 311c of the dish unit 300 as the ball feeding member 172 swings in response to the difference in reciprocal movement of the ball striking mallet 687 of the hitting ball launching device 650 described later. The balls are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 515 through the hit ball supply port 171b formed in the main body 171.

Reference numeral 174 in the figure denotes an E-ring, which prevents the ball feeding member 172 from coming off from the support shaft 171a of the main body 171 and prevents the weight 173 from coming off from the ball feeding member 172. Is.

[1-2A-5. Joint unit]
Next, the joint unit 180 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, the joint unit 180 is a slide body 182 that is housed inside the joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base body 110 and is slidable in the lateral direction, and a joint in the state where the slide body 182 is housed. It is composed of a cover body 184 that covers the front surface of the unit mounting recess 110c.

The joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base body 110 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with an open front surface, and a cam insertion opening 115 is formed in the rear surface thereof. In addition, a pair of mounting holes 110f for fixing the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed at one corner of the joint unit mounting recess 110c that is located in a substantially diagonal shape. Further, arc-shaped contact projections for contacting the outer surfaces of the upper and lower sides of the slide body 182 to allow the slide body 182 to move smoothly on the upper and bottom sides of the inner surface of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. 110g (only the contact protrusion 110g on the lower side is shown in FIG. 31(B), and the contact protrusion 110g on the upper side is not shown).

On the other hand, the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 has a rear surface smaller than the joint unit mounting recess 110c so as to be stored in the space formed by the joint unit mounting recess 110c and the cover body 184 so as to be movable in the left-right direction. Two guide protrusions 182a, which are formed in the shape of an open rectangular parallelepiped box and which project rearward by a predetermined amount and are arranged side by side in a substantially horizontal direction, are arranged below the right side guide protrusion 182a in rear view. Between the plate-shaped slide protrusion 183 protruding rearward and the two guide protrusions 182a, a wiring through cylinder portion 428 of the handle device 400, which will be described later, is bored on the left side of the slide protrusion 183 in rear view. And a rectangular tubular member penetrating opening 182b. The slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 has an inclined side 183a that is cut obliquely in the traveling direction when sliding (rightward in rear view). Further, on the front wall of the slide body 182, a cam engaging recess 182c for accommodating a cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotary shaft 415 of the handle device 400 is formed in a U-shape by a rib. Then, a vertical portion of a part of the rib forming the cam engagement recess 182c is formed as an arc-shaped rib so as to project into the cam engagement recess 182c, and that portion abuts the cam 416. Has become.

In addition, the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with an open front surface. The two guide lateral holes 194a in the shape of a laterally long hole, the lateral lateral holes 184b into which the slide protrusions 183 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 182 are inserted, and the rear grip member 413 of the operation handle portion 410. The wiring opening 184c, which is attached to the end and is inserted from the cam insertion opening 115, facing the rear end of the wiring through-cylindrical portion 428 and the position corresponding to the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c, protrudes outward. The mounting hole 184d formed is provided. By fixing a predetermined screw (not shown) to the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c through the mounting hole 184d, the cover body 184 can be mounted in the joint unit mounting recess 110c. ..

To assemble the slide body 182 and the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 into the joint unit mounting recess 110c, the slide body 182 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110c, and in this state, the cover body 184 is covered from the front. When covering, the guide protrusion 182a is inserted into the guide lateral hole 194a, and the slide projection 183 is inserted into the insertion lateral hole 184b. After the covering, the screw 182 is screwed into the mounting hole 110f through the mounting hole 184d, so that the slide body 182 is housed inside and the assembly of the joint unit 180 is completed.

[1-2B. Top lamp illumination unit]
Next, the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39. 32A is a front perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, and FIG. Is. FIG. 34(A) is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp electric decoration unit by disassembling it for each main configuration and showing it from the front, and FIG. 34(B) is an exploded perspective view showing the same as (A) from the rear. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the top lamp reflector unit in the top lamp lighting unit disassembled and is shown from the front together with the top lamp base, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 35 from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing the left rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in a disassembled state, and FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view showing the right rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in a disassembled state. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view showing the central rotating lamp in the top lamp illumination unit in an exploded manner.

As shown in FIG. 33, the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes three rotating lights 244, 264, 284 (so-called Patlight (registered trademark)) arranged in the left-right direction. The rotating lights 244, 264, and 284 are arranged such that the sizes thereof are larger from the left side in a front view. The top lamp lighting unit 200 is fixed to a horizontally long box-shaped top lamp base 210 and a front surface of the top lamp base 210, and is fixed to an upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 with the top lamp base 210 sandwiched therebetween. A top lamp reflector unit 220, a left rotating light unit 240, a right rotating light unit 260, and a central rotating light unit 280 mounted on the front surface of the top lamp reflector unit 220, a left rotating light unit 240, a right rotating light unit 260, and Mainly provided are rotary lamp covers 201, 202, 203 which cover front surfaces of the central rotary lamp units 280 and are attached to the top lamp reflector unit 220, and a reflector inner 204 which covers a substantially central lower surface of the top lamp reflector unit ( See FIG. 34).

In addition, the top lamp lighting unit 200 includes a top lamp power supply board 205 fixed to the front right of the top lamp base 210 and two top lamp decoration drive boards 206 fixed to the rear side of the top lamp base 210. Further equipped. The top lamp power supply board 205 includes the boards 224, 226, 231 and the LEDs 244a, 266a, 231a in the top lamp lighting unit 200, the motors 245, 265, 285 of the rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280 and the boards 248. , 268, 288, 296, the LED 453a of the glass unit 450, which will be described later, and the like, for relaying the power from the power supply board 1136 (described later). In addition, the top lamp decoration drive board 206 emits light from the LEDs in the top lamp reflector unit 220, the LEDs in the central rotary lamp unit 280, and the motors 245, 265, 285 of the rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280. The drive is based on a control signal from a peripheral board 4010 (peripheral control board 4140) described later.

[1-2B-1. Top lamp base]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp base 210 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 has a top surface and left and right side surfaces that are substantially along the upper side and the left and right side edges of the door frame base unit 100. At the same time, the lower surface has a shape that is substantially along with the game window 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a box shape that is horizontally long and is partitioned in the middle in the front-rear direction. The top lamp base 210 has a mounting boss 110h of the door frame base body 110 inserted from the rear side at a position along the outer periphery thereof, and a rear end of a mounting boss 221i protruding rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the front side. Are fitted to each other to position each of them, and a plurality of substantially cylindrical mounting boss portions 211 having insertion holes through which predetermined screws can be inserted are provided. To the mounting boss portion 211, the tip of the mounting boss 110h of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted from the rear, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221i of the top lamp reflector unit 220 is inserted from the front to insert the door frame base unit 100. By fixing a predetermined screw to the mounting boss 221i of the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the rear side, the top lamp base 210 (top lamp lighting unit 200) is mounted and fixed to the door frame base unit 100. ing.

Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a plurality of fixing boss portions 212 having insertion holes through which rear ends of fixing bosses 221j protruding rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 are fitted and through which predetermined screws can pass. ing. By fixing a predetermined screw to the fixing boss 221j of the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the rear side via the fixing boss 212, the top lamp base 210 and the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be assembled together. It has become.

Furthermore, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a connector opening 213 near the right end when viewed from the front, through which the connection connector 205a of the top lamp power supply substrate 205 can be inserted, and the connector 205a is inserted through this connector opening 213. Is exposed from the rear side of the top lamp base 210. Further, board mounting portions 214 are provided on the left and right of the rear side of the top lamp base 210, and the top lamp decoration drive board 206 is mounted on the board mounting portions 214.

[1-2B-2. Top lamp reflector unit]
Next, the top lamp reflector unit 220 in the top lamp lighting unit 200 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp reflector unit 220 of the present embodiment includes a box-shaped reflector base 221 capable of covering the top lamp base 210 from the front and having an open rear side. This reflector base 221 is a cylindrical cylinder in which three rotating lamps 244, 264, 284 are mounted side by side on the front surface, and a large distance between the central rotating lamp 284 and the left and right rotating lamps 244, 264 projects forward. It is partitioned by a portion 221a and an inclined portion 221b that hangs downward from the cylindrical portion 221a and that is inclined rearward as it goes downward. In this reflector base 221, a substantially circular opening is formed in the cylindrical portion 221a, and three rectangular openings arranged in the vertical direction are formed in the inclined portion 221b (see FIG. 33). ). Further, the reflector base 210 is provided with vertically long bulging portions 221e projecting forward at both left and right ends, and a rectangular slit 221f that is vertically long is formed on the front surface of the bulging portion 221e. As shown in the figure, the reflector base 211 has a shape in which the mounting positions of the three rotary lights 244, 264, 284 are recessed rearward by the two cylindrical portions 221a and the inclined portions 221b and the two bulging portions 221e. Has become.

In addition, the reflector base 221 has a gentle curved surface shape that is recessed rearward between the two cylindrical portions 221a and the inclined portion 221b (the position where the central rotating lamp 284 is arranged). Between the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b, a lens opening 221g penetrating in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a front view is formed on the left and right with a substantial center in the left-right direction sandwiched therebetween. Further, the reflector base 221 is mounted with a rotating lamp that allows the front ends of the rotating lamp unit bases 241, 261, 281 of the rotating lamp units 240, 260, 280 including the rotating lamps 244, 264, 284 to pass from the rear side. A mouth 221h is formed. Further, the reflector base 221 has a plurality of mounting bosses 221i protruding rearward that are fitted to the mounting boss portions 211 of the top lamp base 210 and a plurality of mounting bosses 221i that are fitted to the fixing boss portions 212 of the top lamp base 210 and projecting rearward. Fixed boss 221j. Although not shown in detail, the reflector base 221 is also provided with a mounting boss 221k that is directly mounted to the door frame base unit 100 without the top lamp base 210.

By the way, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes, in addition to the reflector base 221, a pair of top inner lenses 222 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 at substantially the center in the left-right direction, and a reflector base 221 behind the top inner lens 222. A pair of lens sheets 223 arranged at positions corresponding to the lens openings 221g, a pair of reflector decoration substrates 224 arranged on the rear side of the lens sheet 223 and having a plurality of color LEDs 224a mounted thereon, and a reflector base 210. The transparent round lens 225 inserted from the rear side into the cylindrical portion 221a to close the opening 221c, and the rear side of the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 210 with the round lens 225 and the top inner lens 222 interposed therebetween. It is provided with a pair of partition decoration boards 226 that are arranged and have LEDs 226a mounted on the front surface.

The top inner lens 222 is formed of a transparent resin, and has a substantially trapezoidal curved surface-shaped curved lens portion 222a that closes the lens opening portion 221g of the reflector base 221, and an inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 221. A partition lens portion 222b that closes the opening 221d and a round lens support portion 222c that contacts the rear end of the round lens 225 are provided. A saw-shaped diffusion lens portion 222d is formed on the upper and lower sides of the curved lens portion 222a, so that the curved lens portion 222a can emit light in a manner different from that of the curved lens portion 222a, and the light from the front side can be emitted even when the light is not emitted. Can be diffusely reflected.

Further, the top inner lens 222 supports the lens sheet 223 on the rear side of the curved lens portion 222a, which is sandwiched between the projecting piece 222e projecting rearward from the rear side of the diffusion lens section 222d in a plate shape and the upper and lower projecting pieces. The support recess 222f is formed. As shown in the figure, in the reflector decoration substrate 224, a plurality of LEDs 224a are arranged in a row corresponding to the protruding pieces 222e of the top inner lens 222, and also correspond to the curved surface lens portion 222a of the top inner lens 222. The locations are distributed. As a result, the curved lens portion 222a and the diffusion lens portion 222d of the top inner lens 222 can emit light in different modes.

The lens sheet 223 is a known optical sheet that makes transmitted light from the LED 224a mounted on the reflector decoration substrate 224 and reflected light from other light sources and the like look like a pearl or a chromatic shape. The LED 226a mounted on the partition decoration substrate 226 is an ultra-high brightness LED and is capable of emitting a strong flash of light.

Further, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes a top side lens 227 that closes vertically elongated slits 221f formed in the left and right bulging portions 221e of the reflector base 221, and a top side that fixes the upper end of the top side lens 227 from the front side. A lens retainer 228, a lens sheet 229 arranged on the rear side of the top side lens 227 and the reflector base 221, and a top side substrate base 230 that holds the lens sheet 229 by being fixed on the rear side of the reflector base 221. Further, a top side substrate 231 fixed to the top side substrate base 230 and capable of emitting light to the front top side lens 227 via the lens sheet 229 is mounted on the front surface of the color LED 231a.

The top side lens 221 is formed of a transparent resin in a V shape in a plan view, and upper and lower end portions thereof have locking pieces 227a and 227b, respectively, and the lower end locking piece 227b is formed on the reflector base. It is attached to the reflector base 221 by engaging with the lower end of the slit 221f in 221 and pressing the engaging piece 227a at the upper end with the top side lens retainer 228. Further, the lens sheet 229 arranged on the rear side of the top side lens 221 is formed of an optical sheet similar to the lens sheet 223, and is formed in a curved shape as shown in the drawing. By being attached to 221, it is possible to give an appearance as if a cylindrical fluorescent tube is arranged on the rear side of the top side lens 227.

Further, as shown in the figure, the top side substrate base 230 is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and light from the LEDs 231a of the top side substrate 231 fixed to the rear side through the frame allows the lens sheet 229 and the top side. Light can be emitted to the front surface through the lens 227.

[1-2B-3. Revolving light unit]
Next, the three rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280 in the top lamp lighting unit 200 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 37, the left revolving light unit 240 has a circular opening 241a penetrating in the up-down direction, and the opening 241a is projected to the front side from the revolving light mounting opening 221h of the reflector base 221. So that the rotary lamp unit base 241 is fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221, and the substantially circular rotation fixed to the upper surface of the rotary lamp unit base 241 is arranged coaxially with the opening 241a of the rotary lamp unit base 241. The unit base 242, the rotary light base gear 243 disposed coaxially with the rotary unit base 242 and slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotary unit base 242, and the lower surface thereof so as to hang from the rotary light base gear 243. The rotary lamp 244 fixed to the rotary lamp base 243 is arranged substantially parallel to the rotary lamp base gear 243 on the rear side of the rotary lamp mounting opening 221h of the reflector base 221, and the rotary shaft 245a is the upper surface of the rotary lamp unit base 241. A left rotating light motor 245 fixed to the lower surface of the rotating light unit base 241 so as to project upward from the rotating light unit base 241; A rotating part holder that covers the entire rotating light base gear 243 and a part of the transmission gear 246 from above, pivotally supports the rotating light base gear 243 in cooperation with the rotating part base 242, and is fixed to the rotating light unit base 241. 247 and a left rotating light substrate 248 which is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating portion holder 247 coaxially with the rotating light base gear 243 and has high-intensity color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting light toward the lower rotating light 244. And are equipped with.

Further, the left rotary light unit 240 is mounted with a rotary light unit cover 249 that covers the rotary portion holder 247 from above, a left rotary position detection sensor 250 that detects the rotational position of the rotary light 244, and a left rotary position detection sensor 250. The left rotation position detection board 251 is further provided.

The rotary light unit base 241 of the left rotary light unit 240 has a mounting step 241b formed substantially along the inner circumference of the opening 241a on the upper surface thereof, and hangs downward at a position rearward of the opening 241a. It is provided with a mounting portion 241c mounted on the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 241d arranged on the rear side of the opening 241a for fixing the left rotary lamp motor 245. The mounting step portion 241b rotates from above. The part base 242 is adapted to be fitted. Further, the rotating portion base 242 has a shaft support opening 242a having a small diameter coaxially with the opening 241a of the rotating light unit base 241, and a left rotation position detection at a predetermined position on the upper surface outside the outer circumference of the rotating light base gear 243. A substrate supporting portion 242b that supports the lower end of the substrate 251, and a wiring locking portion 242c that is disposed behind the substrate supporting portion 242b and that locks the wiring connected to the left rotation light substrate 248 and the left rotation position detection substrate 251. Is equipped with.

Further, the rotating lamp base gear 243 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft supporting port 242a of the rotating unit base 242, and extends downward from the lower surface to support the shaft supporting port 242a of the rotating unit base 242. Cylindrical gear shaft cylinder (not shown) that can be inserted inside, shaft support hole 243a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft cylinder and penetrates in the vertical direction, and rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 243b. The outer diameter of the shaft cylinder of the rotating light base gear 243 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft supporting port 242a of the rotating portion base 242. By inserting the shaft supporting port 242a into the rotating lamp base gear 243, 243 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support opening 242a. In the left revolving light unit 240, the left revolving position detecting sensor 250 detects the revolving position detecting piece 243b of the revolving light base gear 243, so that the revolving position of the revolving light 244 can be detected. There is.

Further, although not shown, the rotary part holder 247 has a cylindrical shape that projects downward to a position coaxial with the shaft support opening 242a of the rotary part base 242 and can be inserted into the shaft support hole 243a of the rotary light base gear 243. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 243a of the rotary light base gear 243. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 243a of the rotary light base gear 243, The base gear 243 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder barrel. That is, in the left-handed rotary light unit 240 of this example, the rotary lamp base 242a of the rotary portion base 242, the gear shaft tube and the shaft support hole 243a of the rotary light base gear 243, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotary portion holder 247 are used to rotate the rotary light base. The gear 243 is rotatably supported. The left rotating lamp board 248 is fixed to the lower end of the holder barrel of the rotating portion holder 247. Further, although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 247 is provided with a substrate support unit for supporting the upper end of the left rotation position detection substrate 251 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 242b of the rotation unit base 242 on the lower surface thereof. The left rotation position detection board 251 is sandwiched and fixed by the rotation unit base 242 and the rotation unit holder 247.

Further, as shown in the drawing, the rotary light 244 of the left rotary light unit 240 is arranged below the rotary light base gear 243 and a transparent disc-shaped rotary light lens 252 and below the rotary light lens 252. The reflector 253 is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating light base gear 243, and a reflector cover 254 that covers the reflector 253. The reflector 253 of the rotating lamp 244 has a surface plated with a metallic luster, and has a disk-shaped base portion 253a, an opening 253b formed in the center of the base portion 253a, and a base portion 253a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 253d which extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 253a and whose upper end can come into contact with the rotating lamp base gear 243.

In the rotating lamp 244, the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 252 is exposed from the opening 253b of the reflector 253, and the rotating lamp lens 252 is formed with an insertion hole 252a into which the mounting boss 253d of the reflector 253 can be inserted. The mounting boss 253d is inserted into the insertion hole 252a, and then the mounting boss 253d is fixed to the rotating light base gear 243, so that the rotating light lens 252 is narrowed between the rotating light base gear 243 and the reflector 253. It is designed to be held and fixed. The reflector cover 254 of the rotating lamp 244 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with an open upper side, and has an opening on a side surface facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 253c of the reflector 253. 254a is formed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 38, the right rotation light unit 260 has a circular opening 261a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 261a projects forward from the left rotation light mounting opening 221h of the reflector base 221. The rotary lamp unit base 261 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to be located at a fixed position, and a substantially circular shape arranged coaxially with the opening 261a of the rotary lamp unit base 261 and fixed to the upper surface of the rotary lamp unit base 261. An annular rotating portion base 262, a rotating light base gear 263 coaxially arranged with the rotating portion base 262 and slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating portion base 262, so as to hang down from the rotating light base gear 263. The rotary lamp 264 fixed to the lower surface of the rotary lamp base 263 is arranged substantially parallel to the axis of the rotary lamp base gear 263 on the axis rearward of the rotary lamp attachment opening 221h of the reflector base 221 and the rotary shaft 265a is provided. The right rotation light motor 265 fixed to the lower surface of the rotation light unit base 261 so as to project upward from the upper surface of the rotation light unit 261 and the transmission gear fixed to the rotation shaft 265a of the right rotation light motor 265 and meshing with the rotation light base gear 263. 266, the entire rotating light base gear 263 and a part of the transmission gear 266 are covered from above, and the rotating light base gear 263 is axially supported in cooperation with the rotating portion base 262 and is fixed to the rotating light unit base 261. The rotation part holder 267 and the right rotation having the high brightness color LED (not shown) fixed to the lower surface of the rotation part holder 267 coaxially with the rotation light base gear 263 and capable of emitting light toward the rotation light 264 below. And a light board 268.

Further, the right rotation light unit 260 is mounted with a rotation light unit cover 269 that covers the rotation portion holder 267 from above, a right rotation position detection sensor 270 that detects the rotation position of the rotation light 264, and a right rotation position detection sensor 270. The right rotation position detection board 271 is further provided.

The rotary light unit base 261 of the right rotary light unit 260 has a mounting step portion 261b formed on the upper surface thereof substantially along the inner circumference of the opening 261a, and a downward hanging portion at a position rearward of the opening 261a. It is provided with a mounting portion 261c mounted on the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 261d arranged on the rear side of the opening 261a for fixing the right rotation light motor 265. The mounting step portion 261b rotates from above. The part base 262 is adapted to be fitted. Further, the rotating portion base 262 has a shaft support opening 262a having a small diameter coaxial with the opening 261a of the rotating light unit base 261 and a right rotation position detection at a predetermined position on the upper surface outside the outer circumference of the rotating light base gear 263. A substrate support portion 262b that supports the lower end of the substrate 271, and a wiring locking portion 262c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 262b and that locks the wiring connected to the right rotation light substrate 268 and the right rotation position detection substrate 271. Is equipped with.

Further, the rotating light base gear 263 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft supporting port 262a of the rotating unit base 262, and extends downward from the lower surface to support the rotating unit base 262. Cylindrical gear shaft cylinder (not shown) that can be inserted inside, shaft support hole 263a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft cylinder and penetrates in the vertical direction, and rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 263b. The outer diameter of the shaft cylinder of the rotating light base gear 263 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft supporting port 262a of the rotating portion base 262, and the rotating light base gear 263a is inserted into the shaft supporting port 262a. 263 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support opening 262a. In the right rotation light unit 260, the rotation position detection piece 263b of the rotation light base gear 263 is detected by the right rotation position detection sensor 270, so that the rotation position of the rotation light 264 can be detected. There is.

Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 267 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position coaxial with the shaft supporting opening 262a of the rotating portion base 262 and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 263a of the rotating light base gear 263. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 263a of the rotary light base gear 263. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 263a of the rotary light base gear 263, The base gear 263 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder barrel. That is, in the right rotation light unit 260 of this example, the rotation light base is formed by the shaft support port 262a of the rotation part base 262, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft support hole 263a of the rotation light base gear 263, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotation part holder 267. A gear 263 is rotatably supported. The right rotation lamp board 268 is fixed to the lower end of the holder barrel of the rotating portion holder 267. Further, although not shown in the drawing, the rotating portion holder 267 is provided with a substrate supporting portion for supporting the upper end of the right rotation position detecting substrate 271 at a position corresponding to the substrate supporting portion 262b of the rotating portion base 262 on the lower surface thereof. Therefore, the right rotation position detection board 271 is sandwiched and fixed by the rotating portion base 262 and the rotating portion holder 267.

Further, as shown in the drawing, the rotating light 264 of the right rotating light unit 260 is larger than the rotating light 244 of the left rotating light unit 240 as a whole, and is a transparent disc-shaped member arranged below the rotating light base gear 263. The rotating lamp lens 272, a reflector 273 arranged below the rotating lamp lens 272 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 263, and a reflector cover 274 covering the reflector 273. The reflector 273 of the rotating lamp 264 has a surface plated with a metallic luster, and has a disk-shaped base portion 273a, an opening 273b formed at the center of the base portion 273a, and a base portion 273a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 273d which extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 273a and whose upper end can contact the rotating light base gear 263.

In the rotating lamp 264, the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 272 is exposed from the opening 273b of the reflector 273, and the rotating lamp lens 272 is formed with an insertion hole 272a through which the mounting boss 273d of the reflector 273 can be inserted. By fixing the mounting boss 273d to the rotating light base gear 263 after inserting the mounting boss 273d into the insertion hole 272a, the rotating light lens 272 is narrowed between the rotating light base gear 263 and the reflector 273. It is designed to be held and fixed. Further, the reflector cover 274 of the rotating lamp 264 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with an open upper side, and has an opening at a side surface of the reflector 273 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 273c. 274a is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the central revolving light unit 280 has a circular opening 281a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 281a extends from the revolving light mounting opening 221h at the center in the left-right direction of the reflector base 221 to the front side. The rotary light unit base 281 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to be in a protruding position, and the rotary light unit base 281 arranged coaxially with the opening 281a of the rotary light unit base 281 and fixed to the upper surface of the rotary light unit base 281. A substantially annular rotating part base 282, a rotating light base gear 283 arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 282 and slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 282, and hanging from the rotating light base gear 283. The rotary lamp 284 fixed to the lower surface of the rotary lamp 285a is arranged substantially parallel to the axis of the rotary lamp base gear 283 on the rear axis of the rotary lamp mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221, and the rotary shaft 285a has a rotary lamp 285a. A central rotating light motor 285 fixed to the lower surface of the rotating light unit base 281 so as to project upward from the upper surface of the unit base 281 and a rotating light base gear 283 fixed to a rotation shaft 285a of the central rotating light motor 285. The transmission gear 286, the entire rotating light base gear 283 and a part of the transmitting gear 286 are covered from above, and the rotating light base gear 283 is axially supported in cooperation with the rotating portion base 282 and fixed to the rotating light unit base 281. And a high brightness color LED (not shown) which is fixed to the lower surface of the rotary holder 287 coaxially with the rotary lamp base gear 283 and which can emit light toward the rotary lamp 284 below. And a central rotating lamp board 288.

Further, the central rotating light unit 280 is mounted with a rotating lamp unit cover 289 that covers the rotating portion holder 287 from above, a central rotating position detecting sensor 290 that detects the rotating position of the rotating lamp 284, and a central rotating position detecting sensor 290. And a central rotational position detection board 291.

The rotating light unit base 281 of the central rotating light unit 280 has a mounting step portion 281b formed on the upper surface thereof substantially along the inner circumference of the opening 281a, and hangs downward at a position rearward of the opening 281a. It is provided with a mounting portion 281c mounted on the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 281d arranged on the rear side of the opening 281a for fixing the central rotating lamp motor 285. The mounting step portion 281b rotates from above. The part base 282 is fitted. Further, the rotating portion base 282 has a small-diameter shaft support port 282a coaxial with the opening 281a of the rotating light unit base 281, and a central rotational position detection at a predetermined position on the upper surface outside the outer circumference of the rotating light base gear 283. A substrate supporting portion 282b that supports the lower end of the substrate 291, and a wiring locking portion 282c that is arranged behind the substrate supporting portion 282b and that locks the wiring connected to the central rotary light substrate 288 and the central rotational position detection substrate 291. Is equipped with.

Further, the rotating lamp base gear 283 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 282a of the rotation unit base 282, and extends downward from the lower surface to extend downward from the rotation unit base 282. Cylindrical gear shaft cylinder (not shown) that can be inserted inside, shaft support hole 283a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft cylinder and penetrates in the vertical direction, and rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 283b. The outer diameter of the shaft cylinder of the rotating light base gear 283 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft supporting port 282a of the rotating unit base 282. By inserting the rotating light base gear 283 into the shaft supporting port 282a, the rotating light base gear 283 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 282a. Further, in the central revolving light unit 280, the rotational position of the revolving light 284 can be detected by detecting the rotational position detecting piece 283b of the revolving light base gear 283 by the central rotational position detecting sensor 290. There is.

Further, although not shown, the rotary part holder 287 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position coaxial with the shaft support port 282a of the rotary part base 282 and can be inserted into the shaft support hole 283a of the rotary light base gear 283. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 283a of the rotary light base gear 283. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 283a of the rotary light base gear 283, The base gear 283 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder barrel. That is, in the central revolving light unit 280 of this example, the revolving light base is formed by the shaft support port 282a of the revolving unit base 282, the gear shaft tube and the shaft supporting hole 283a of the revolving light base gear 283, and the holder shaft tube of the revolving unit holder 287. The gear 283 is rotatably supported. A central rotating lamp board 288 is fixed to the lower end of the holder barrel of the rotating portion holder 287. Further, although not shown in the drawing, the rotation unit holder 287 is provided with a substrate support unit for supporting the upper end of the central rotation position detection substrate 291 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 282b of the rotation unit base 282 on the lower surface thereof. Thus, the central rotational position detection board 291 is sandwiched and fixed by the rotary unit base 282 and the rotary unit holder 287.

Further, the rotating lamp 294 of the central rotating body unit 280 has an intermediate size between the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 and the rotating lamp 264 of the right rotating lamp unit 260, as shown in the figure. A transparent disc-shaped rotating light lens 292 arranged below the rotating light base gear 283, a reflector 293 arranged below the rotating light lens 292 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating light base gear 283, and a reflector 293. And a reflector cover 294 for covering. The reflector 293 of the rotary lamp 284 has a surface plated with a metallic luster, and has a disk-shaped base portion 293a, an opening 293b formed at the center of the base portion 293a, and a base portion 293a. , And a plurality of mounting bosses 293d which extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 293a and whose upper end can come into contact with the rotary lamp base gear 283.

In this rotating lamp 284, the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 292 is exposed from the opening 293b of the reflector 293, and the rotating lamp lens 292 is formed with an insertion hole 292a through which the mounting boss 293d of the reflector 293 can be inserted. By fixing the mounting boss 293d to the rotating light base gear 283 after inserting the mounting boss 293d into the insertion hole 292a, the rotating light lens 292 is narrowed between the rotating light base gear 283 and the reflector 293. It is designed to be held and fixed. Further, the reflector cover 294 of the rotating lamp 284 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with an open upper side, and has an opening on a side surface of the reflector 293 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 293c. 294a is formed.

By the way, as shown in the figure, the central rotating light unit 280 according to the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of pluralities formed on three front side surfaces of the rotating light unit cover 289 between the rotating portion holder 287 and the rotating light unit cover 289. A cover lens 295 having a plurality of protrusions 295a inserted into the notch 289a from the rear side, and a cover decoration substrate 296 arranged on the rear side of the cover lens 295 and having a plurality of color LEDs 296a mounted on the surface thereof. Further equipped. The cover lens 295 and the cover decoration substrate 296 are formed on the rotary lamp unit cover 289 while their lower ends are supported by the groove-shaped lens support portion 287a and the substrate support portion 287b formed on the front end of the rotation portion holder 287, respectively. Further, the upper end is supported by a groove-shaped lens support portion and a substrate support portion (not shown), so that they can be attached. In the present example, the front end of the rotating lamp unit cover 289 of the central rotating lamp unit 280 can be illuminated by lighting the LED of the cover decoration substrate 296.

[1-2C. Plate unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 40 to 63. 40 is a front perspective view of the dish unit, FIG. 41 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit, and FIG. 42 is a plan view of the dish unit. 43 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. FIG. 44 is a rear view of the plate unit with the plate back plate removed, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view of the plate unit with the plate back plate and the ball rental unit removed. Further, FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view showing the dish unit for each main component by disassembling it from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 46 from the back. 48 is an exploded perspective view showing the dish unit main body of the dish unit from the front by disassembling it, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view showing the FIG. 48 from the back. Further, FIG. 50 is a rear view showing the first ball removing mechanism in the plate unit, and FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the second ball removing mechanism in the plate unit from the rear. 52 is an exploded perspective view showing the operation button unit of the dish unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 53 is a bottom view of the operation button unit of the dish unit with the operation button unit substrate removed, and FIG. 54 is the dish. FIG. 55 is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the unit from below, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the dish unit in an exploded manner.

56 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device attached to the door frame, FIG. 57 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the operation handle portion and the joint unit that form the handle device, and FIG. 58 is an operation of the handle device. It is an exploded perspective view of a handle part. Further, FIG. 59 is an operation diagram for explaining the operation of the operation handle portion and the joint unit, FIG. 60 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device and the hitting ball launching device provided in the body frame, and FIG. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle apparatus and a hitting ball launching apparatus. Further, FIG. 62(A) is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the dish unit, and (B) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the second ball outlet in the plate unit and the flow of game balls. Is. Further, FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the horizontally long ball inlet port and the storage tray in the dish unit.

The dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment can be paid out from the prize ball unit 800 described later to store the game balls, and the stored game balls can be hit via the ball feeding unit 170 to be described later in a hitting ball launching device 650. Can be supplied to. As shown in FIG. 46 and FIG. 47, the dish unit 300 covers the dish body 310 having a storage dish 311 that is open at the top and the back and can store a predetermined amount of game balls, and the front surface of the dish body 310. The plate unit main body 320, a plate-shaped plate back plate 340 that covers the rear surfaces of the plate unit main body 320 and the plate body 310, and a first ball removing mechanism capable of discharging all the game balls stored in the storage plate 311 of the plate body 310. 350, a second ball removal mechanism 360 capable of discharging a part of the game balls stored in the storage tray of the dish 310, and a ball lending machine (not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 A ball rental unit 301 for activating an operation button, an operation button unit 370 fixed to the upper surface of the plate body 310 and operable by the player depending on the game state (game state), and a plate unit body 320 below the plate body 310. A lower speaker unit 390 having a lower speaker 391 larger than the side speaker 121 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100, which is disposed between the plate and the plate inner plate 340, and the plate unit main body 320 in front view right. It mainly includes a handle base 303 arranged at a lower corner and a handle device 400 supported by the handle base 303 for performing a game ball driving operation. Note that reference numeral 302 is a wiring cover that covers the electrical wiring connected to the dish lighting board 336 in the dish unit main body 320 described later. Further, as shown in the drawing, a lower left decorative substrate 190 for illuminating and decorating the left end of the plate unit main body 320 is arranged on the left side of the plate inner plate 340 when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the ball rental unit 301 in this dish unit 300 is fixed to the upper side of the plate back plate 340 at the approximate center in the left-right direction, and is arranged next to the ball rental button 301a and the ball rental button 301a. It is provided with a return button 301b, and a lending balance indicator (not shown) arranged between the ball lending button 301a and the return button 301b to display the balance of cash or prepaid card on the ball lending machine. In this ball rental unit 301, when a ball or a prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and then a ball lending button 301a is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the dish unit 300. It is possible to lend (pay out) into the storage tray 311 of No. 3, and when the return button 301b is pressed, the balance of the cash inserted and the prepaid card can be returned after subtracting the remaining amount of the loan. There is.

Further, the main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372 of the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 are used when the player participates in the game content (game production) performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like provided on the game board 4. It is something to operate. In the liquid crystal display device 1400, a specific symbol (also referred to as a decorative symbol) is variably displayed along with the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 641 and 642 described later.

[1-2C-1. Plate]
First, as shown in the drawing, the dish 310 in the dish unit 300 occupies approximately 2/3 of the whole from the left end in plan view, and a storage dish 311 having a predetermined depth opened upward and backward, and inside the storage dish 311. A second ball outlet 312 that is arranged at a predetermined position on the bottom and penetrates in the vertical direction, and is arranged on the downstream side of the third inclined surface 311c that is continuous with the storage tray 311 from the right end of the storage tray 312, and the game balls can be distributed. And the first ball removal path 313 (see FIG. 44 and FIG. 47) that can guide the game ball to just below the second ball removal port 312, and open it upward in a substantially diamond shape on the right side of the storage tray 311. The operation button unit mounting recess 314 in which the button unit 370 can be mounted, and the first ball removal button 351 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 that is opened in a substantially circular shape on the rear side of the operation button unit mounting recess 314 are mounted It mainly includes a ball removal button mounting opening 315 and a first ball removal mechanism support portion 316 that is arranged immediately below the first ball removal button installation opening 315 and supports the first ball removal mechanism 350.

The storage tray 311 in the dish body 310 is disposed on the front surface of the ball inlet 341 of the tray back plate 340, and has a first inclined surface 311a that decreases toward the right side and the front side in a plan view, and the right end of the first inclined surface 311a. Second inclined surface 311b which is continuous with the rear part of the portion and decreases toward the right and rear sides, and a third inclined surface which is continuous with the right end of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases toward the ball supply port 342 of the inner tray plate 340 A sloping surface 311c, a fourth sloping surface 311d that is continuous with the front portion of the right end of the first sloping surface 311a and the front end of the second sloping surface 311b, and decreases toward the right and second sloping surfaces 311b. A fifth inclined surface 311e, which is continuous with the right end of the fourth inclined surface 311d and decreases toward the fourth inclined surface 311d, is provided (see FIGS. 42 and 43, etc.).

Further, the storage plate 311 is arranged between the partition wall 311f and the partition wall 311f and the third inclined surface 311c, in which the game ball rises upward from the rear end portion of the fifth inclined surface 311e and cannot cross the boundary. It further includes a sixth inclined surface 311g that decreases toward the third inclined surface 311c. The second ball outlet 312 is disposed between the first inclined surface 311a and the second inclined surface 311b. In addition, the second ball removal port 312 is normally closed by the second ball removal shutter 364 of the second ball removal mechanism 360.

In the storage dish 311 of the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, the first inclined surface 311a has a quadrangular shape (trapezoidal shape) having a size that occupies approximately half the size of the storage dish 311. The second inclined surface 311b has a pentagonal shape whose length in the left-right direction is about ¼ of the length of the storage tray 311 and whose depth in the front-rear direction narrows toward the third inclined surface 311c. The third inclined surface 311c has a horizontally long section shape having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. The fourth inclined surface 311d has a quadrangular shape (trapezoidal shape) whose length in the left-right direction is substantially the same as that of the second inclined surface 311b and which becomes shorter toward the second inclined surface 311b. Further, the fifth inclined surface 311e has a rear end portion extending rightward from the left end portion by a predetermined distance substantially parallel to the third inclined surface 311c, and then obliquely extending toward the rear third inclined surface 311c. While extending along the third inclined surface 311c across the partition wall 311f, the front end (right end) extends toward the right toward the right end of the rear end, and extends rearward as a whole. The partition wall 311f is formed in an inverted V shape, and the partition wall 311f is formed along the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

Further, as shown in the drawing, the storage tray 311 includes a left end portion and a front end portion of the first inclined surface 311a, a front end portion of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and a front end portion (right end portion) of the fifth inclined surface. ), the outer peripheral wall 311h rises upward, and the outer peripheral wall 311h causes the storage tray 311 to be recessed downward from the upper surface of the dish body 310 by a predetermined amount. Further, the outer peripheral wall 311h of the storage tray 311 is formed in a gentle arc shape such that the front end portions of the first inclined surface 311a, the fourth inclined surface 311d, and the fifth inclined surface 311e move forward toward the right. Therefore, when the game ball that has flowed from the ball inlet 341 onto the first inclined surface 311a comes into contact with the position facing the ball inlet 341 on the outer peripheral wall 311h, it is reflected in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e. It circulates on the five-slope surface 311d. In addition, the fifth slope 311e is a gentle slope where the game balls that have flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 can climb, and after climbing to the right end of the fifth slope 311e, the direction Is changed to flow down in the direction of the fourth inclined surface 311d (to the left). That is, the storage tray 311 of this example causes the game sphere that has flowed in from the ball inlet 341 to bypass the fifth inclined surface 311e and then flow into the third inclined surface 311c that serves as a supply path to the ball supply opening 342. It is like this.

In addition, the sixth inclined surface 311g in the storage tray 311 has a steeper inclination angle than the other inclined surfaces 311a to 311e, and a plurality of game balls are played on the third inclined surface 311c on the downstream side thereof. It is possible to easily align them in a line in the left-right direction toward the ball supply port 342. A rail body 304 made of stainless steel is attached to the third inclined surface 311c so as to improve the wear resistance of the circulating game balls and also to prevent static electricity charged on the game balls. It can be removed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 47, the third inclined surface 311c of the storage tray 311 is formed in a groove shape in which the right end portion slops downward to the right and then hangs downward to open the rear side. It is formed so as to be continuous with the first ball-removing path 313, and by being continuous with the first ball-removing path 313, a flow path that is folded back in the left-right direction is formed. A flow path is closed at a boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removing path 313 by the first ball removing slide 356 of the first ball removing mechanism 350. As desired by the slide 356, the ball supply port 342 of the plate back plate 340 is opened. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down the third inclined surface 311c is blocked by the first ball removal slide 356, and flows to the ball supply port 342 side.

The first ball removing mechanism support portion 316 of the dish 310 is provided with a first ball on the side of the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removing path 313 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 44). A slide groove 316a into which the slide slide 356 is slidably inserted in the left-right direction, and a first ball described later on the opposite side of the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball passage 313 with the slide groove 316a interposed therebetween. A hook portion 316b that locks the lower end portion of the extraction spring 357 is formed.

[1-2C-2. Dish unit body]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the dish unit main body 320 in the dish unit 300 constitutes the front surface of the dish unit 300 and covers the front surfaces of the dish body 310 and the lower speaker unit 390, and the upper and rear sides are opened. A box-shaped main body 321 is provided. The main body portion 321 has a configuration in which approximately 3/4 of the left side in front view bulges forward, and the lower speaker unit 390 is housed inside (rear side) of the bulged portion. It has become. Further, in the main body 321, a speaker opening 321a formed so as to penetrate to a position corresponding to the lower speaker 391 of the lower speaker unit 390 on the front right side of the center of the bulging portion, and a speaker opening 321a. A dummy opening 321b formed on the left side and a second ball removal button opening 321c formed on the left side of the dummy opening 321b are formed so as to penetrate therethrough. Further, the main body 321 has an elliptical handle base mounting opening 321d for mounting the handle base 303 in the lower right corner, and a lock opening 321e arranged above the handle base mounting opening 321d and facing a cylinder lock 1010 described later. And a section-shaped duct opening 321f that opens on the right side of the portion that bulges to the front on the left side of the handle base mounting opening d, and a section-shaped ball discharge port 321g that opens to the lower center in the left-right direction. I have it.

Further, in the dish unit main body 320 of the dish unit 300, a front back plate 322 that covers the speaker opening 321a and the dummy opening 321b of the main body 321 from the front side, and a speaker opening 322a of the front back plate 322 through the main body 321. A plate-shaped right cover 323, which is arranged on the front surface corresponding to the speaker opening 321a and is made of punching metal and has four corners cut off, and a front cover of the right cover 323, which is arranged substantially in the center and is smaller than the right cover 323 and has a metallic luster on the surface. A plate-shaped right decoration base 324, a plate-shaped right decoration 325 which is arranged substantially in the center of the front surface of the right decoration base 324 and is smaller than the right decoration base 324, and a main body in the front back plate 322. The plate-shaped left cover 326, which is arranged on the front surface corresponding to the dummy opening 321b of the portion 321 and is made of punching metal and has four corners cut off, and the front cover of the left cover 326, which is arranged substantially at the center and is smaller than the left cover 326 and has a surface. A plate-shaped left decoration base 327 that is plated with metallic luster, a left decoration 328 that is smaller than the left decoration base 327 and that is arranged substantially in the center of the front surface of the left decoration base 327, and a main body 321. And a frame-shaped front main body 329 that decorates the periphery of the speaker opening 321a, the dummy opening 321b, and the second ball removal button opening 321c. A plurality of through holes 322a penetrating the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 as desired are formed on the front back plate 322 of the dish unit main body 320. The through holes 322a and the punching holes of the right decoration base 323 are formed. Sound from the lower speaker 391 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the outside via (not shown).

Further, the dish unit main body 320 of this example includes a main body left decoration base 330 fixed to the left end of the main body portion 321 on the front side of the lower left decoration substrate 190, and a metal luster plated surface fixed to the front surface of the main body left decoration base 330. And a processed main body left decoration 331. The main body left decoration base 330 has a light-transmitting property, and can be illuminated and decorated by the LED 190a of the lower left decoration substrate 190 arranged on the rear side of the main body left decoration base 330.

Further, the plate unit main body 320 is formed with a plate-shaped duct cover made of punching metal that covers the duct opening 321f of the main body 321, and a duct cutout 333a such that the duct cover faces the surface. The main body right ornament 333 is further provided, which covers the entire right side surface of the portion of the portion 321 which bulges to the front side, and which has the surface thereof plated with metallic luster.

Further, the dish unit main body 320 has a plurality of horizontally long slits 334a arranged along the upper edge of the main body 321 and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a main body decoration 334 whose surface is plated with metallic luster, An upper decoration lens 335 which is arranged in the main body portion 321 below the main body decoration 334 and has a light guide portion 335a which is inserted into a slit 334a of the main body decoration 334, and arranged below the upper decoration lens 335. And a dish lighting board 336 having a plurality of color LEDs 336a mounted on its upper surface. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 336a of the plate illumination board 336, the main body top decoration 334, that is, the upper edge of the plate unit main body 320 can be made to emit light through the top decoration lens 335.

[1-2C-3. Plate back plate]
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 46, FIG. 47, etc., the plate back plate 340 of the plate unit 300 is formed in a horizontally long plate shape as a whole, and is arranged in the upper left corner when viewed from the front and has a horizontally long partition shape in the front-rear direction. A ball inlet 341 that penetrates the ball inlet 341, a ball supply opening 342 that is arranged at a predetermined distance in the lower right direction than the ball inlet 341 and penetrates in a sphere shape through which a game ball can pass, and communicates with the ball inlet 341 It mainly includes a prismatic ball-shaped prize ball connection gutter 343 that extends to. As shown in FIG. 43, etc., the ball inlet 341 of the plate back plate 340 is opened toward the inside of the storage plate 311 of the plate 310, and the length in the left-right direction is the first inclined surface 311 a of the storage plate 311. It is almost the same length as. The ball supply port 342 is arranged at the right end of the third inclined surface 331c of the storage tray 311 at a position corresponding to the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350. In addition, the prize ball connection gutter 343 is arranged at a position biased to the left end in front view with respect to the ball inlet port 341, and the length in the left-right direction is about half the length of the ball inlet port 341. The length is such that the rear end penetrates the prize ball passage port 111 of the door frame base body 110 and communicates with the outlet 921 of the lower end (front end) of the front guide passage 920 in the full tank unit 900 described later. ..

In addition, the plate back plate 340 is arranged at a position in which the front end of the prize ball communication gutter 343 is set back a predetermined amount with respect to the ball inlet 341, and between the ball inlet 341 and the prize ball communication gutter 343. , Further has a shelf portion 344 that extends over the entire length of the ball inlet port 341 in the left-right direction and through which game balls can flow. The game balls that have flowed through the prize ball communication gutter 343 can be made to flow into the storage tray 311 to the downstream side of the second ball outlet 312 by the shelf portion 344.

Further, the inner tray plate 340 corresponds to the ball removal path 393 of the lower speaker unit 390, which will be described later, and has a substantially L-shaped penetrating path opening 345, and a ball flow at the upper left of the front view of the ball removing path opening 345. A latch opening 346 that is disposed below the inlet 341 (the second ball removal port 312 in the dish 310) and penetrates in a partition shape into which the rear end of the latch unit 366 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 described later is inserted. , The wiring insertion port 347 which is disposed in the upper right corner in a front view and penetrates in a substantially ward shape, and the ball rental unit 301 which is disposed on the upper side of the inner plate 340 between the ball inlet port 341 and the wiring insertion port 346 And a ball rental unit mounting portion 348 for.

[1-2C-4. First ball removal mechanism]
Next, the first ball removal mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300, as shown in FIG. 44, FIG. 45, FIG. 50, etc., has a first ball removal button 351 and a first ball removal button 351 that the player presses. A first ball removing button base 352 which is slidably supported in the vertical direction and is inserted from below into the first ball removing button mounting hole 315 of the plate body 310, and a plate is provided on the first ball removing button base 352. Supported by a first ball-removing button decoration 353, in which the first ball-removing button 351 is fixed so as to project upward with the body 310 interposed therebetween, and a first ball-removing button decoration 353 and a first ball-removing button base 352. A rotation shaft 354 supported at the position of the first ball removal mechanism support portion 316 of the pan 311 that is the right side (left side in FIG. 50) of the lower end of the first ball removal button 351 that has been cut, and the rotation shaft. An inverted L-shaped first ball-removing crank 355 having one end contacting the lower end of the first ball-removing button 351 and a second end extending downward, and a first ball-removing crank. The lower end on the other end side of the plate 355 is abuttable and is supported by the first ball removing mechanism support portion 316 of the plate body 311 so as to be slidable in the substantially left-right direction, and the third inclined surface 311c of the plate body 310 and the first inclined surface 311c. A first ball removing slide 356 capable of closing the boundary with the ball removing path 313 and a first ball removing spring 357 for biasing the first ball removing crank 355 to rotate in a predetermined direction are provided. .

The first ball removing slide 356 of the first ball removing mechanism 350 is inserted and arranged in the slide groove 316a of the first ball removing mechanism supporting portion 316 of the dish 310 so that the first ball removing slide 356 can slide in the left-right direction. In addition, when the first ball-removing crank 355 rotates in this state, the lower end on the other end side of the first ball-removing crank 355 slides in the left-right direction. By sliding in the left-right direction, the tip of the first ball-sliding slide 356 can move forward and backward with respect to the inside of the flow path at the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c of the dish 310 and the first ball-draining path 313. It is made possible, and when moving forward to the boundary portion and closing the flow path, the game ball flowing through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied to the ball supply port 342, and moves backward from the boundary portion to form the flow path. When opened, the game balls that have flowed through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied (discharged) to the first ball removing path 313 side.

In addition, the upper end of the first ball-removing spring 357 is locked to the first ball-removing crank 355 on the side opposite to the one end that abuts the lower end of the first ball-removing button 351 with the rotating shaft 354 interposed therebetween. A hook portion 355a is formed. The first ball removal spring 357 has its upper end engaged with the hook 355a of the first ball removal crank 355, and has its lower end engaged with the hook 316b of the first ball removal mechanism support 316 of the dish 310. By stopping, the first ball removal crank 355 is moved to the position where the first ball removal slide 356 closes the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313, and the first ball removal button 351 is the most closed position. It can be biased so as to rotate in the direction in which the position is raised.

When the player presses the first ball-removing button 351, the first ball-removing mechanism 350 has a first ball-removing crank 355 through a contact pin 355b that abuts the lower end of the first ball-removing button 351. Is rotated in a direction in which one end side thereof moves downward against the urging force of the first ball removing spring 357, and the other end side moves away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removing path 313. Move to. Then, the first ball removing slide 356 moves in the direction away from the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removing path 313 together with the lower end of the first ball removing crank 355, and the tip of the first ball removing slide 356. Becomes a state in which the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball-removing path 313 communicate with each other by retreating from the flow path of the boundary portion, and all the game balls in the third inclined surface 311c, that is, the storage tray 311 are changed to the first ball. It can be discharged to the outside through the extraction path 313.

It should be noted that when the pressing of the first ball removal button 351 is released, the first ball removal crank 355 is rotated by the urging force of the first ball removal spring 357, the first ball removal button 351 is raised, and the first ball removal button 351 is raised. The tip of the extraction slide 356 advances into the flow path at the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313 and closes the flow path, and the third slide surface 311c (in the storage tray 311) is closed. The game ball can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 through the ball supply port 342.

[1-2C-5. Second ball removal mechanism]
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51 and the like, the second ball removing mechanism 360 of the dish unit 300 has a second ball projecting forward from the second ball removing button opening 321c of the body portion 321 of the dish unit body 320. The removal button 361, the second removal ball button 361, the second removal ball slide 362 which is fitted and fixed to the tip and is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by the lower speaker unit 390, which will be described later, and the front and rear of the second removal ball slide 362. Of the rod-shaped second ball-removing crank 363, which is rotatably supported by the lower speaker unit 390 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the left-right direction, and rotation of the second ball-removing crank 363 causes the dish 310 to move. A second ball-removing shutter 364 rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction between a closed position for closing the second ball-removing port 312 and an open position for opening the second ball-removing port 312; A second ball removing spring 365 for urging the ball removing shutter 364 to a closed position where the second ball removing port 312 is closed, and the second ball removing shutter 364 is opened against the biasing force of the second ball removing spring 365. The latch unit 366 which can be held in a position, and the opening 367a which slidably supports the lower surface of the second ball-removing shutter 364 and corresponds to the second ball-removing port 312 are fixed to the lower side of the dish 310. The second ball removing base 367 and the rear end of the second ball removing slide 362 are slidably held and the latch unit 366 is supported, and in cooperation with the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 described later, A second ball-removing mechanism support 368 (see FIGS. 44 and 47) that pivotally supports the ball-removing crank 363.

The second ball removing slide 362 of the second ball removing mechanism 360 has a transmission groove 362a into which a rear end portion is opened upward and a lower end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 is inserted, and a rearward protruding portion from the rear end portion. The latch unit 366 includes an engaging claw 366a and an engaging protrusion 362b that can be engaged. The second ball-removing crank 363 is a rod-shaped member extending substantially vertically, and the lower end of the second ball-removing crank 363 is inserted into the transmission groove 362 a of the second ball-removing slide 362 from above and is substantially vertically intermediate. The portion is rotatably supported by the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390. When the second ball removal slide 362 slides in the front-rear direction, the lower end of the second ball removal crank 363 moves as the transmission groove 362a slides, and the second ball removal crank 363 rotates. The upper end of the second ball removal crank 363 moves in the direction opposite to the lower end.

Further, as shown in the drawing, the second ball-removing shutter 364 is arranged above the second ball-removing slide 362, and the second ball-removing opening 312 of the dish 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball-removing base 367 are provided. A plate-like closing portion 364a having a substantially semicircular shape (D shape) that can be closed, and a rod-like rod portion extending from the closing portion 364a in one of the left and right directions (left direction in front view, right direction in FIG. 51). 364b and is formed in a substantially P shape as a whole. The tip of the rod portion 364b of the second ball-removing shutter 364 is pivotally supported by the dish 310 and the second ball-removing base 367 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and the rod portion 364b is also supported. The upper end of the second ball-removing crank 363 comes into contact with the rear-side substantially middle portion in the left-right direction. Further, the front end portion of the second ball removing spring 365 is engaged with the rear base end portion of the rod portion 364b of the second ball removing shutter 364. Although not shown in the drawings, the rear end portion of the second ball removing spring 365 is adapted to be locked by a locking boss that hangs downward from the lower surface of the dish 310. Thus, the closing portion 364a of the second ball removing shutter 364 is urged to the closed position (the position shown in FIG. 51) that closes the second ball removing port 312.

Further, the second ball removing base 367 of the second ball removing mechanism 360 can pass the upper end of the second ball removing crank 363 between the opening 367 a and the position where the second ball removing shutter 364 is pivotally supported. A slit 367b extending in the front-rear direction is provided, and the upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 pivotally supported on the lower side of the second ball removing base 367 through the slit 367b is the upper surface of the second ball removing base 367. The second ball-removing shutter 364 arranged in the position can come into contact with the rod portion 364b. It should be noted that the second ball removing base 367 is formed in a shallow dish shape as shown in the drawing, and the dish body 310 can form a housing space for housing the second ball removing shutter 364. There is. Further, the height of the accommodation space for accommodating the second ball-removing shutter 364 is set to a height smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the second ball-removing shutter 364 rotates to cause the second ball-removal opening 312. Even when is opened, the game ball does not enter between the dish 310 and the second ball removing base 367.

In the second ball removal mechanism 360 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the second ball removal button 361 protruding forward from the front surface of the dish unit body 320, the second ball removal slide 362 slides rearward, and The second ball-removing crank 363 is rotated so that the lower end of the second ball-removing crank 363 is moved rearward by being guided by the transmission groove 362a of the second ball-removing slide 362. Then, as the second ball-removing crank 363 rotates, its upper end moves forward in the direction opposite to the lower end, and the second ball-removing shutter 364 that contacts the upper end of the second ball-removing crank 363. However, the closing portion 364a is rotated about the tip of the rod portion 364b so as to move forward against the urging force of the second ball removing spring 365. In this way, when the closing part 364a moves forward and the second ball removal port 312 of the dish 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball removal base 367 are opened, the second ball removal port 312 of the storage tray 311 is opened. The game balls stored on the upstream side will be discharged to the outside below the dish unit 300 through the second ball outlet 312.

The second ball removal mechanism 360 of the present example is provided with a latch unit 366, and the second ball removal button 361 is pressed to cause the engagement projection 362b at the rear end of the second ball removal slide 362 to be paired with the latch unit 366. When abutting between the engaging claws 366a, the pair of engaging claws 366a closes and engages so as to sandwich the engaging protrusion 362b, and resists the urging force of the second ball removing spring 365 to remove the second ball. The button 361 can be held in a pressed state, that is, the second ball removal port 312 can be held in the opened (opened) position by the closing portion 364a of the second ball removal shutter 364. When the second ball removal button 361 is pressed in this state, the pair of engagement claws 366a of the latch unit 366 are opened, the engagement with the engagement protrusion 362b is released, and the second ball removal spring 365 applies the urging force. The closing portion 364a of the second ball removing shutter 364 can be returned to the position for closing the second ball removing port 312.

[1-2C-6. Operation button unit]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 55, the operation button unit 370 of the dish unit 300 is mounted and fixed from above on the operation button mounting recess 314 of the dish 310 of the dish unit 300. An octagonal main button 371 with four corners cut off in a plan view, and a pair of left sub button 372L and right sub button 372R that are symmetrically arranged on the left and right sides of the main button 371 and have a home base shape in a plan view. The sub button 372, the operation button unit base 373 that holds the main button 371 and the sub button 372 slidably in the vertical direction and is inserted into the operation button mounting recess 314 of the dish 310, and the operation button unit base 373. A plate-shaped operation button unit decoration member 374 for decorating the upper surface, and an operation button unit substrate 375 having a plurality of color LEDs 375a fixed to the lower side of the operation button unit base 373 for illuminating and decorating the operation button unit 370 mounted on the upper surface, Is equipped with.

The operation button unit 370 also includes a main button sensor 376 that detects an operation of the main button 371, a left sub button sensor 377L that detects an operation of the left sub button 372L, and a right sub button that detects an operation of the right sub button 372R. And a button sensor 377R. The main button sensor 376, the left sub button sensor 377L, and the right sub button sensor 377L are photo sensors each having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and are fixed at predetermined positions on the operation button unit substrate 375. ..

In the operation button unit base 373 of the operation button unit 370, as shown in the drawing, a main button accommodating recess 373a which is substantially rhombic in plan view and can accommodate the main button 371 from above, and a main button accommodating portion 373a. A plurality of vertically extending guide grooves 373b formed on the inner peripheral surface for guiding the main button 371 in the vertical direction, and a substantially circular opening formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a. 373c, a plurality of light guide openings 373d for guiding light from the LEDs 375a of the operation button unit substrate 375, which is opened at a predetermined width along the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a and is arranged on the lower side, to the upper side, A pair of sub button accommodating recesses 373e capable of accommodating the button 372 from above, a screw insertion hole 373f formed in a diagonally upper corner of the major axis, and a plate-shaped top plate forming an upper surface of the operation button unit base 373. 373 g and a plate-shaped side wall portion 373 h that hangs downward from the lower surface so as to surround the outer periphery along the outer periphery of the top plate portion 373 g.

The operation button unit base 373 is formed in a box shape having an open lower surface by the top plate portion 373g and the side wall portion 373h, and the main button accommodating recess 373a and a plurality of ( Here, eight light guide openings 373d, two sub button housing recesses 373e, and two screw insertion holes 373f are opened. Further, in the operation button unit base 373, the main button housing recess 373a has a thicker thickness where the guide groove 373b is not formed, and the strength and rigidity of the inner wall surface and the bottom surface are enhanced. At the same time, each light guide opening 373d formed on the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a is formed in a cylindrical shape that is long in the up-down direction, and the outer peripheral wall of these cylindrical light guide openings 373d may also be used. The main button housing recess 373a is reinforced (see FIG. 53).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the main button 371 has a translucent main button lens 371a that forms the upper surface of the main button 371 and a tube that supports the main button lens 371a and is open at the top and bottom. -Shaped main button base 371b, a vibrating body 371c arranged below the main button base 371b, and a vibrating body holder that encloses the vibrating body 371c and is fixed to the lower side of the main button base 371b via mounting screws 371d. And 371e. Although not shown, the main button 371 has an upper end abutting on a lower side surface of the main button base 371a and a lower end abutting a bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a on the operation button unit base 373. A main button spring for urging the 371 to rise is provided.

The main button lens 371a of the main button 371 is formed in a box shape with an octagonal shape in plan view and an open lower surface, and has a smooth surface on the front side, while a plurality of small lenses on the back side. A portion is formed so that the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit substrate 375 can be widely diffused, and the entire surface of the main button 370 can be substantially uniformly illuminated and decorated.

As shown in the figure, the main button base 371b has an octagonal outer shape on the upper end side, which is similar to the main button lens 371. It has a shape, and the lower end thereof extends downward from an opening 373c formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a in the operation unit button base 373, and is directly above the LED 375a group arranged in the center of the operation button unit substrate 375. It can be located in. Further, the main button base 371b has a main locking claw 371f extending downward from two opposite sides, and a plurality of vertically extending guide protrusions inserted into the guide groove 373b of the operation button unit base 373. And 371 g. The main locking claw 371f of the main button base 371b is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the main button housing recess 373a of the operation button unit base 373, so that the main button 371 is closed. It is possible to prevent the main button housing recess 373a from being pulled out by the urging force of.

Further, the main button base 371b is configured such that the vibrating body 371c can be attached to the inside of the one main locking claw 371f via the vibrating body holder 371e and the mounting screw 371d, and a portion where the vibrating body 371c is attached. A detection piece 371h (see FIG. 54) detected by the main button sensor 376 is formed inside.

When the main button 371 is pushed downward against the biasing force of the main button spring, the main button 371 of this example causes the detection piece 371h of the main button base 371b to be located between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the main button sensor 376. Upon entering, the operation is detected by the main button sensor 376. Further, the main button 371 is configured such that when the operation is detected by the main button sensor 376, the vibrating body 371c is activated, and the operation of the vibrating body 371c causes the main button 371 to vibrate. It is possible to recognize that the operation of the main button 371 has been accepted, and to surprise the player by the vibration of the main button 371. A light shield plate 375b is attached to the operation button unit substrate 375 to prevent the main button sensor 376 from malfunctioning due to light from the mounted LED 375a.

The sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 includes a sub button lens 372a having a substantially isosceles right triangle shape in plan view and a light transmitting property, and a sub button lens 372a supported on an upper surface of the home base shape in plan view. The sub button base 372b accommodated from above in the sub button accommodating recess 373e of the operation button unit base 373, and the sub button lens 372a disposed between the sub button base 372b and the bottom surface of the sub button accommodating recess 373e. And a sub button spring 372c for urging the button base 372b in the direction of raising it. The sub-button base 372a of the sub-button 372 has a sub-locking pawl 372d that hangs down the sub-button spring 372c, and a plate-shaped guide wall 372e that hangs downward from a long side of the home base. And a detection piece 372f extending further downward from the lower end of the guide wall portion 372e.

In this sub button 372, the sub locking claw 372d is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the sub button housing recess 373e of the operation button unit base 373. By locking 372d to the locking portion, it is possible to prevent the sub button 372 from coming out of the sub button housing recess 373e by the urging force of the sub button spring 372c. When the sub button 372 is pushed downward against the urging force of the sub button spring 372c, the detection piece 372f of the sub button base 372b enters between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sub button sensor 377. The operation of the sub button 372 is detected by the sub button sensor 377.

Further, as shown in the figure, the operation button unit decoration member 374 of the operation button unit 370 is formed in a plate shape with a substantially diamond shape in a plan view, and the main button lens 371a of the main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372 are formed. An opening 374a through which the sub button lens 372a can pass is formed, and a translucent decorative member lens 374b is provided at a position corresponding to the light guiding opening 373d of the operation button unit base 373. . Further, a mounting hole 374c into which a mounting screw (not shown) can be inserted from above is formed in a diagonally upper corner portion of the major axis. Through the mounting hole 374c and the screw insertion hole 373f of the operation button unit base 373. The operation button unit 370 is attached and fixed to the dish 310 by a predetermined attachment screw. In this example, a screw concealment 378 for concealing the two mounting holes 374c is attached to the upper surface of the operation button unit decorative member 374.

As described above, in the operation button unit 370 of the present embodiment, the operation button unit base 373 is formed in a triple tubular shape by the main button housing recess 373a, the light guide opening 373d, and the side wall 373h, Since the strength and rigidity are increased, the operation button unit 370 is less likely to be damaged even if the main button 371 or the like is hit and operated strongly. Further, the operation button unit 370 is adapted to be attached and fixed from above to the operation button attachment recess 314 of the dish 310, and in the unlikely event that the operation button unit 370 is damaged or malfunctions occur. The dish body 310 can be easily attached and detached and replaced from above. Further, since the operation button unit 370 is supported (placed) on the lower side of the operation box unit 370 by the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 which will be described later, the operation button unit 370 is resistant to impact and load from the main button 371 and the like. In addition, not only the operation button unit 370 but also the entire dish unit 300 is less likely to be damaged.

[1-2C-7. Lower speaker unit]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the lower speaker unit 390 of the dish unit 300 includes a lower speaker 391 having a larger diameter than the side speaker 121 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower portion. A box-shaped speaker box 392 for holding the speaker 391 at a position closer to the right of the front surface when viewed from the front and at a position behind the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 of the plate unit main body 320 is mainly provided. The lower speaker unit 390 of the present embodiment is a bass reflex type speaker in which the internal space of the speaker box 392 is opened to the outside through the opening 392a, and it is possible to emit more deep bass to the speaker diameter of the lower speaker 391. You can do it.

The opening 392a of the speaker box 392 is formed at a position desired for the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 of the plate unit main body 320, and the flow of air that enters and leaves the speaker box 392 due to the vibration of the lower speaker 391, It is designed to come in and out through the duct opening 321f. Further, the flow of air coming in and out through the duct opening 321f by the driving (vibration) of the lower speaker 391 is formed so as to pass through the grip members 412 and 413 of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400. The air flow (wind) from the lower speaker 391 can be applied to the hand of the player who operates the section 410, and the player can feel and enjoy the game like never before. There is. It should be noted that by sending an acoustic signal of a frequency lower than the human audible band to the lower speaker 391, only the wind can be applied to the player from the duct opening 321f, and it can be combined with the vibrating body 371c of the main button 371. It is now possible to entertain tactile sensations that are not available on conventional gaming machines.

Further, on the rear surface of the speaker box 392, it is arranged downstream of the first ball removal path 313 and the second ball removal opening 312 of the dish 310, and flows through the first ball removal path 313 and the second ball removal opening 312. It is provided with a ball removal path 393 that guides the game ball that has been played to the lower part of the speaker box 392 in the substantially left-right direction center. The ball removal path 393 is formed in a substantially L shape with an open rear side, and through the ball removal path opening 345 of the inner plate 340 of the plate unit 300, the door frame base body of the door frame base unit 100. The rear side is closed by a ball removal path cover 191 that closes the ball removal path opening 111 of the 110. In addition, the game balls that have flowed through the ball removing path 393 are discharged from the ball discharge port 321g of the main body 321 of the plate unit main body 320 to the lower side of the plate unit 300.

Further, the speaker box 392 has a second ball-sliding slide holding hole 394 for holding the front end of the second ball-sliding slide 362 of the second ball-stripping mechanism 360 slidably in the front-rear direction on the upper left side in front view. A second ball-removing mechanism support portion 395 that is disposed on the rear side of the second ball-removing slide holding hole 394 and supports the second ball-removing mechanism support member 368 of the second ball-removing mechanism 360. The second ball removal mechanism 360 can be supported at a predetermined position by the second ball removal slide holding hole 394 and the second ball removal mechanism support portion 395.

[1-2C-8. Handle device]
Next, as shown in FIG. 56 to FIG. 58, the handle device 400 in the dish unit 300 includes the operation handle portion 410 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 on the open side and the door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 410. And a joint unit 180 which is attached to the back surface of the rotary shaft 415 and is linked with the rotary shaft 415 that rotates in response to the rotary operation of the operation handle portion 410 and changes the rotary motion of the rotary shaft 415 into a slide motion.

First, the operation handle portion 410 is a handle support cylinder portion of a cylindrical handle base 303 that is attached so as to project forward from the handle base attachment opening 321d of the main body portion 321 of the tray unit body 320 of the tray unit 300 in the door frame 5. It is inserted and fixed in 303a. The handle support cylinder portion 303a is formed so as to be inclined outward (to the right side) in a plan view seen from above the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the operation handle portion 410 is inserted and fixed in the handle support cylinder portion 303a. Also, the door frame is tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). It will be attached and fixed to 5. As described above, by tilting the operation handle portion 410 toward the outside in a plan view, there is an advantage that the player can easily grasp the operation handle portion 410, the rotation operation does not feel uncomfortable, and the rotation operation is easily performed. Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, even if the operation handle portion 410 is installed at an inclination, the rotational movement of the rotation shaft 415 of the operation handle portion 410 is smoothly transmitted, and the resilience of the ball striking device 650 is increased. A structure that can be adjusted is adopted. After the operation handle portion 410 is inserted into the handle support cylinder portion 303a, the handle support cylinder portion 303a and the operation handle portion 410 (to be precise, the rear grip member 413) are connected by screws or the like so that the operation handle portion 410 is It cannot be pulled out from the handle support cylinder portion 303a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the operation handle portion 410 is pivotally supported rotatably between the front grip member 412, the rear grip member 413, and the front grip member 412 and the rear grip member 413. The operation member 414 includes a rotary operation member 414, a rotary shaft 415 having a linear column shape whose one end is fixed to the rotation operation member 414, and a cam 416 fixed to the other end of the rotation shaft 415. The rear grip member 413 is integrally formed with a small diameter portion fitted to the handle support cylinder portion 303a and a large diameter portion in front of the small diameter portion. Has been formed. When the rotary shaft 415 is inserted through the shaft through hole 418, the bearing bush 417 is fitted into the rear end of the shaft through hole 418, and the rotary shaft 415 is inserted through the bearing bush 417. On the other hand, the rotary shaft 415 penetrated through the shaft through hole 418 via the bearing bush 417 penetrates through the bearing hole 424 of the fixed bearing member 423 fixed to the front surface side of the rear grip member 413, and the rotary operation member 414 is rotated. It is fitted in a shaft fitting hole 426 formed at the center.

Further, on the front side of the rear grip member 413, a projection and a mounting hole (both not shown) for fixing the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 are provided, and the one-shot button 421 is swingably supported. A swing pin (not shown) is formed, and the touch sensor 420, the firing stop switch 422, and the one-shot button 421 are attached to the protrusion, the mounting hole, and the swing pin. Then, the wirings from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 are put together in a state in which they are attached, and a wiring through tube having a wiring through hole 419 formed at a side of the shaft through hole 418 of the rear grip member 413. The portion 428 and the wiring opening 184c (see FIG. 31) are led out to the back surface of the door frame 5 and connected to the handle relay terminal plate 194 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The wiring from the handle relay terminal plate 194 is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 described above, and is electrically connected to a payout control board 1186 described later. An urging spring 425 is provided between the fixed bearing member 423 and the rotation operating member 414 so as to surround the rotation shaft 415, and the urging spring 425 always moves the rotation operating member 414 to the original position. It is designed to return to the position. Further, a switch contact protrusion 427 is provided on the outside of the shaft fitting hole 426 of the rotation operation member 414, and when the rotation operation member 414 is in the original position by the urging force of the urging spring 425, the switch contact 414 is contacted. When the protrusion 427 contacts the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 to turn off the firing stop switch 422, and when the turning operation member 414 is turned by the player, the switch contact protrusion 427 acts as the actuator of the firing stop switch 422. It turns on and turns off. Further, since the one-shot button 421 can be swung while the firing stop switch 422 is ON, the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 can be turned OFF by pressing the one-shot button 421. ing.

It should be noted that the outer peripheral surface of the turning operation member 414 is plated with a conductive material so that when the player touches the turning operation member 414, the touch sensor 420 detects the contact. Then, when the player turns the turning operation member 414 to turn on the firing stop switch 422 and the touch sensor 420 detects the contact, the firing motor 695 (see FIG. 91) of the hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later. ) Is driven to rotate.

Further, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotary shaft 415 is formed in a sphere shape, and the cam contact of the slide body 182 (see FIGS. 31 and 59) of the joint unit 180 described later according to the rotation of the rotary shaft 415. The portion 182d is pressed and slid in one direction. In the present embodiment, the operation handle 410 is obliquely attached in plan view as described above by the cooperation structure of the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotary shaft 415 and the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180. It is possible.

As described above, the operation handle portion 410 is inserted and supported from the front side of the door frame 5 into the handle support cylinder portion 303a of the handle base 303, and the joint unit 180 is attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c from the rear side of the door frame 5. Thus, as shown in FIG. 56, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotary shaft 415 is housed in the cam engaging recess 182c of the slide body 182. In this case, since the operation handle portion 410 is attached in an inclined shape in a plan view, the cam 416 is also inclined with respect to the vertical surface of the door frame 5, but the cam engagement concave portion 182c has a predetermined front and rear direction. Since it has a space width, the entire inclined cam 416 can be housed in the space of the cam engagement recess 182c. In the stored state, as shown in FIG. 59(A), the rotation center of the cam 416 is located on the side of the cam contact portion 182d, and the tip of the beaded cam 416 is below the cam engagement recess 182c. It is designed to be located in space.

When the player rotationally operates the rotational operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 in the above-described state, the rotation shaft 415 rotates and the cam 416 also rotates accordingly, so that as shown in FIG. 59(B). The slide body 182 moves in one direction (in the case of FIG. 59, the right direction in the drawing) by the contact between the cam contact portion 182d of the cam engagement recess 182c and the one side outer surface (outer surface of the rotation front side) of the cam 416. Slide to. That is, the rotational movement of the rotating shaft 415 is converted into the sliding movement of the slide body 182. Therefore, the distance S1 between the rotation center of the cam 416 and the edge of the slide body 182 in the traveling direction of the slide protrusion 183 in the initial state (before rotation) shown in FIG. The rotation makes the distance S2 larger than the distance S1. That is, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 slides by the distance of "S2-S1". Then, as shown in FIGS. 57, 60, and 61, the sliding movement of the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the hitting ball launching device 650, and the biasing spring 684 ( By adjusting the tension of (see FIG. 91) and adjusting the strength of the urging force of the hitting mallet 687, the resilience of the hitting ball desired by the player can be obtained. The relationship between the handle device 400 and the hitting ball launching device 650 will be described in detail after the description of the hitting ball launching device 650.

The wiring led out from the inside of the operation handle portion 410 to the back surface of the door frame 5 through the wiring through hole 419, the wiring through tube portion 428, and the wiring opening 184c is located on the shaft support side along the lower side of the back surface of the door frame 5. And then connected to the operation handle terminal 1194 (see FIG. 132) of the payout control board 1186 collectively attached to the board unit 1100 attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 3. ..

[1-2C-9. Effect of plate unit]
Next, the flow of the game balls in the storage tray 311 of the dish unit 300 of this embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, flow into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 through the full tank unit 900 and the prize ball connection gutter 343 of the inner plate 340. That is, the game ball that has flowed in from the ball inlet 341 first flows into the first inclined surface 311a. The first inclined surface 311a is formed so that the front side and the right side when viewed from the front are lowered, and the game balls that have flowed into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inlet 341 are along the inclination of the first inclined surface 311a. The outer peripheral wall 311h surrounding the outer periphery of the front side of the storage tray 311 comes into contact with a position substantially opposite to the ball inlet 341. This position of the outer peripheral wall 311h is slanted in a curved shape with respect to the surface of the plate back plate 340 in which the ball inlet 341 is formed, and the game sphere contacting the outer peripheral wall 311h moves to the right when viewed from the front. It is designed to reflect.

Then, the game ball that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball inflow port 341 and is reflected to the right by the outer peripheral wall 311h crosses the fourth inclined surface 311d and enters the fifth inclined surface 311e. The fifth inclined surface 311e is leftward in front view, that is, the fourth inclined surface 311d side is lowered, and the inclination angle thereof is set to a gentle inclination that allows the game ball entering from the first inclined surface 311a to climb up. And, the game ball that has entered from the first inclined surface 311a over the fourth inclined surface 311d flows to the upper portion (the right end portion in plan view) of the fifth inclined surface 311e while going up the fifth inclined surface 311e. It will be. Further, the fifth inclined surface 311e is divided from the front side to the right side end portion to the rear side by the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f, and the game ball that has entered the fifth inclined surface 311e is surrounded by the periphery. Around the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f that surrounds the first inclined surface 311e, the first inclined surface 311e goes around the fifth inclined surface 311e and returns to the side of the fourth inclined surface 311d arranged on the left side of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

The game ball that has entered the fourth inclined surface 311d from the fifth inclined surface 311e flows to the second inclined surface 311b on the rear side of the fourth inclined surface 311d according to the inclination of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and further, the second The sloping surface 311b enters the third sloping surface 311c on the right side, and is supplied to the sphere launching device 650 from the sphere supply port 342 of the plate back plate 340 arranged at the downstream end of the third sloping surface 311c. Is becoming That is, the game sphere that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball supply port 341 does not directly go from the first inclined surface 311a to the third inclined surface 311c via the second inclined surface 311b, but from the first inclined surface 311a. The fifth slope 311e is once entered through the fourth slope 311d, and then the third slope 311c is reached through the fourth slope 311e and the second slope 311b. The game ball that has flowed in from 341 can be detoured.

As a result, it is possible to store a plurality of game balls by effectively using the entire storage tray 311, and the game balls block the ball inlet 341 when the game balls are stored with a small amount of storage like a conventional pachinko machine. Then, the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is actuated, the payout of the game balls is stopped, or the operation of launching the game balls by the ball launching device 650 is stopped, so that the game is interrupted. It is possible to effectively prevent the accident.

By the way, a large number of game balls are stored in the storage plate 311 of the plate unit 300 of this example, so that the ball inlet port 341 is closed by the stored game ball, and the prize ball connection gutter 343 and the prize of the plate back plate 340. When the game balls stay in the tank unit 900 arranged between the ball unit 800 and the tank unit 800, the tank switch 916 of the tank unit 900 operates to stop the payout of the game balls from the prize ball unit 800. , The game ball launching operation in the ball launching device 650 is stopped. Especially, when the launching operation of the ball launching device 650 is stopped, the game cannot be interrupted, so that the player stores When the game balls stored in the plate 311 reach an appropriate amount, the first ball removal button 351 and the second ball removal button 361 are operated to place the game balls from the storage plate 311 under the dish unit 300 ( For example, it must be discharged to a dollar box). In this example, when the full tank switch 916 is actuated, the player is informed that the storage tray 311 is full, and then the shooting operation of the ball shooting device 650 is stopped.

In order to discharge the game balls from inside the storage dish 311, when the first ball removal button 351 arranged on the upper surface of the dish unit 300 is operated (pressed), the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350. Slides to release the closing between the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball-removing path 313, allows the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c to flow down to the first ball-removing path 313, and the ball It can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 300 from the ball discharge port 321g through the extraction path 393. By operating the first ball removing button 351, the game ball can be pulled out from the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c, which is the lowest position in the storage tray 311, so that all the game balls are discharged from the storage tray 311. Is able to. However, in the ball removal by operating the first ball removal button 351, since the game balls are aligned in a line on the third inclined surface 311c, there is a problem that it takes time to remove the ball.

Then, when the second ball-removing button 361 arranged on the left side of the front surface of the dish unit 300 is operated (pressed), the second ball-removing shutter 364 of the second ball-removing mechanism 360 moves to move the second ball-removing shutter 364 inside the storage plate 311. The ball removal port 312 is opened, and the game ball on the upstream side of the second ball removal port 312 in the storage tray 311 passes through the second ball removal port 312, and from the ball discharge port 321g through the ball removal path 393 to the dish unit. It can be discharged below 300 (see FIG. 62B). As shown in the figure, the second ball outlet 312 is an opening that is several times larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that many game balls can be quickly discharged at one time. Therefore, the presence of the two buttons, the first ball-removing button 351 and the second ball-removing button 361, allows the player to select the length of time for ball removal. In addition, if a big hit occurs during the game, a large number of balls will be paid out to the dish unit 300, and if this is left and the game is continued, a full tank switch 916 (Fig. (Refer to 111), the payout operation is stopped by the function (see 111) and the ball striking operation of the game ball is stopped and the game cannot be continued even though the ball hitting is stopped and the jackpot is being hit. Yes, in such a case, by operating the second ball removal button 361, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the firing position is maintained and a game during a big hit. To be able to continue.

Further, in the dish unit 300 of this example, when the second ball removal button 361 is operated, the second ball removal shutter 364 is held in the open position by the latch unit 366 of the second ball removal mechanism 360, and the second ball removal port is opened. The 312 can be left open. In this state, the game ball on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 is discharged, and when the game ball on the first inclined surface 311a almost disappears, the game ball flowing in from the ball inlet 341 is as described above. , Tries to flow toward the fifth inclined surface 311e by being reflected by the outer peripheral wall 311h, and the second inclined surface 311b and the second inclined surface 311b downstream of the fourth inclined surface 311d and the fifth inclined surface 311e and the second ball outlet 312. Game balls are supplied on the third inclined surface 311c. Therefore, even if the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c is consumed by the firing operation of the ball launching device 650, as long as the game ball flows into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341, the second inclined surface 311b, If the game ball is supplied to the third inclined surface 311c through the fourth inclined surface 311d and the fifth inclined surface 311e and the game ball is stopped by the shooting operation of the game ball, the second ball becomes the second ball. Since it is produced from the outlet 312, even if the second ball outlet 312 is left open, a certain amount of game balls can always be secured in the storage tray 311 and the game can be continued. ing. That is, even in the state where the payout of the game balls is continuous during a big hit game, the game can be continued without worrying about the amount of the game balls in the storage tray 311.

In the dish unit 300 of the present example, as shown in FIG. 63 and the like, the storage tray 311 of the dish body 310 has a bottom surface that is a front surface in which a first inclined surface 311a, a second inclined surface 311b, and a third inclined surface 311c are continuous. While it becomes lower as it goes to the right (sphere supply port 342) in the visual sense, the ball inlet 341 of the plate back plate 340 has a rectangular shape that extends substantially horizontally in the left-right direction. Therefore, it is probable that a step is formed between the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341, and the step becomes larger toward the right when viewed from the front. ing. The step between the bottom of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341 has almost no step at the left end of the ball inlet 341, and at the right end of the ball inlet 341 the outer diameter of the game ball Is also a slightly higher step. As a result, the game balls that have flowed in a substantially straight line in the front-rear direction via the prize ball connection gutter 343 flow into the storage tray 311 mainly through the left side portion of the ball inlet port 341 having a small number of steps. Therefore, the potential energy (falling energy) of the game balls falling from the ball inlet 341 to the storage tray 311 is small due to the small number of steps, and the load applied to the storage tray 311 is reduced to damage the storage tray 311. Can be prevented.

By the way, when the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases and a large number of game balls are stored on the first inclined surface 311a as well, from the ball inlet 341 via the prize ball connection gutter 343. The game balls flowing into the storage dish 311 are shaped to push the game balls stored in the storage dish 311 from the side, and the game balls are pressed against each other by the lateral force acting on each game ball. It becomes a state. In that state, when the game balls in the storage tray 311 (third inclined surface 311c) are consumed via the ball supply port 342, the game balls are discharged near the upstream of the third inclined surface 311c (second inclined surface 311b). When the width of the flow path becomes narrow, the game balls are pressed against each other and the fluidity of the game balls may be reduced, resulting in ball clogging, but in the present example, as described above, the ball inlet port 341 moves in the left-right direction. Since it has an elongated rectangular shape, the game ball from the prize ball connection gutter 343 can directly flow into the second inclined surface 311b through the shelf 344 and can be supplied to the third inclined surface 311c. (See FIG. 62(B)).

In addition, since the lower side of the ball inlet 341 is higher than the outer diameter of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface of the storage tray 311, the portion on the right side of the center of the ball inlet 341 in the left-right direction is through the shelf 344. As a result, the game balls flowing into the storage dish 311 will flow into the upper side of the game balls stored in the storage dish 311 and the fluidity of the game balls is suppressed by suppressing the game balls from pushing each other in the lateral direction. Not only can it be prevented from falling, but the lower game balls (especially the game balls that are in contact with the front surface of the plate inner plate 340) are encouraged to move laterally by the game balls flowing in from above, and naturally. The ball clogging can be eliminated (see FIG. 63).

In this way, the storage tray 300 of the present embodiment, even if the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311, increases, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800 are stored in the horizontally long shelf of the ball inlet 341. Since it is made to flow into the upper side of the game ball stored in the storage tray 311 via the portion 344, it is possible to favorably prevent the ball clogging of the game ball in the storage tray 311 from occurring, and the storage is performed. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing by continuing the game without worrying about the game ball in the plate 311.

[1-2D. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 450 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. 64 is a front perspective view of the glass unit, FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view showing the glass unit in a disassembled state from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing the FIG. 65 in the rear. As shown in the drawing, the glass unit 450 has an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 451 which has an opening larger than the game window 101 and is made of synthetic resin, and two front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 451 are closed. It includes a transparent glass plate 452 and a strip-shaped glass decoration substrate 453 arranged along the inner circumference of the unit frame 451 between the two glass plates 452.

The unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 has a substrate insertion groove 451a into which the rear side is opened and the glass decoration substrate 453 is inserted, and a plurality of openings 451b which are opened from the substrate insertion groove 451a toward the inner peripheral side of the unit frame 451. An engaging groove 451c formed on the outer periphery of the unit frame 451 substantially at the center in the front-rear direction, a terminal plate support portion 451d protruding leftward from the left upper end in front view, and an outer periphery that is upward with respect to the vertical center. The stopper pieces 451e project from the position in the left-right direction, and the locking projections 451f project in the left-right direction from both ends of the lower side.

The glass decoration substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 is strip-shaped and flexible, and the plurality of color LEDs 453a are located on the front surface side (the inner surface side of the unit frame 451) at a position corresponding to the opening 451b of the unit frame 451. When the glass decoration board 453 is inserted into the board insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451, the LED 453a faces the inner surface side of the unit frame 451 through the opening 451b.

Furthermore, the glass unit 450 is fixed to the glass decoration relay terminal plate 453 connected to the glass decoration substrate and supported by the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451 and the end of the glass decoration substrate 453 to the glass decoration relay terminal plate 454. And a terminal board holder 456 that covers the terminal board support portion 451d of the unit frame 451 that supports the glass-decorated relay terminal board 454.

In this glass unit 450, glass plates 452 are adhesively fixed to the front and rear of the unit frame 451 with the glass decoration substrate 453 inserted in the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451. Further, in this glass unit 450, the engaging groove 451c formed on the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 451 engages with the vertical bending protrusion 151 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 451 and the stopper 451e and The locking protrusion 451f is fitted into the glass unit supporting step 110a of the door frame base body 110 from the rear side, and then is detachably attached to the door frame 5 by the stop lever 196. ..

In addition, the glass unit 450 can emit light between the two glass plates 452 by appropriately causing the LED 453a of the glass decoration substrate 453 to emit light, and the atmosphere different from that of conventional pachinko machines ( A pachinko machine 1 having a game window 101 (having a mood) can be provided.

[1-2E. Security cover]
Subsequently, the security cover 470 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. The crime prevention cover 470 is provided with a crime prevention function of covering the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 450 to prevent illegal tools from entering the game board 4. As shown in the figure, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 450 between the reinforcing metal plates 142 and 143, and the upper side part thereof is an arc-shaped contact recess 471 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 603 of the game board 4. And a post-crime projection piece 474 is provided so as to project rearward along the contact recess 471. Further, a crime prevention rear end projection 475 is obliquely formed on the rear surface of the shaft support side with the crime prevention cover 470 attached. On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 470, with the security cover 470 attached, a crime prevention front projecting piece 472 is projected along the lower shape of the unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450, and U-shaped at both lower ends. The mounting elastic piece 473 formed is formed so as to project forward.

The security cover 470 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back surface side of the door frame 5 by attaching the attachment elastic piece 473 to the attachment opening 116 formed in the door frame base unit 100. Although not shown in the figure, the crime prevention front protrusion 472 faces the lower rear one side of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 in the attached state. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front protrusion 472 is in contact with the vertical bending protrusion 151. Further, although the post-crime prevention protrusion 474 and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 are in a state of protruding rearward, when the door frame 5 is closed, half of the post-crime prevention protrusion 474 on the pivotal support side is The lower half of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 enters and faces the inner side of the inner rail 603. It is inserted into the groove 607, and the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 475 is in a superposed position along the upper surface of the crime prevention projection 608 formed on the pivotal support side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 76). ).

Thus, in the state where the security cover 470 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the above-described door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 are used for the crime prevention structure, and the crime prevention protrusion 166 and the crime prevention space 586 which will be described later. In addition to the crime prevention structure due to, even if an attempt is made to intrude a fraudulent tool from below the glass unit 450, the fraudulent tool is intruded from the front lower direction of the crime prevention cover 470 due to the polymerization of the crime prevention front piece 472 and the unit frame 451. The crime prevention protrusion 474 and the inner rail 603 forming the front component member 601 are superposed on each other, so that an unauthorized tool is prevented from entering from the lower rear side of the crime prevention cover 470. In particular, with respect to intrusion of an illegal tool from diagonally below the pivotal support side of the door frame 5, the intrusion of the illegal tool into the outer rail 602 is prevented by the overlapping structure of the crime prevention protrusion 608 and the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 475. Further, the overlapping structure of the inner rail 603 and the crime prevention post-piece 474 can prevent an illegal tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4.

In addition, similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent protrusions 153 and 154 of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 143, in addition to the crime prevention structure against the invasion of the illegal tool from the opening lower side of the door frame 5, By engaging the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the crime prevention rear projecting piece 474 in a concavo-convex manner, it is possible to further prevent an illegal tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4. The vertical surface between the crime prevention rear projection 474 and the crime prevention rear end projection 475 on the back surface side of the crime prevention cover 470 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the lower part of the front surface of the guide passage for the hit ball, it also has a function of preventing a hit ball flying or backward in the guide passage part from colliding with the glass plate 452.

[1-3. Body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. 67 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the component, FIG. 68 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the component, and FIG. 69 is a main body frame main body before mounting the component. FIG. 70 is a side view of 500, FIG. 70 is a perspective view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the components, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the main body frame 3 with the components mounted, viewed from the front. 72 is a perspective view of a state in which the main body frame 3 to which the components are attached are axially supported by the outer frame 2 as seen from the front, and FIG. 73 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the components are attached, and FIG. FIG. 75 is a perspective view of the main body frame 3 to which the components are attached as seen from the rear surface, and FIG. ..

In the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment, the game board 4 can be detachably mounted from the front side, and a hitting ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for paying out prize balls, a tank rail member 740, and a ball passage unit. 770, a prize ball unit 800, a full tank unit 900, a lock device 1000 for locking the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame excluding the game board 4. Various components such as a substrate unit 1100 in which various control substrates for controlling the electrical components provided in 3 and a power supply substrate 1136 are collectively provided, a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580, and the like are mounted. The main frame main body 500 is provided.

First, the main frame main body 500 on which the above-described various components are mounted and the main frame 3 on which the various components are mounted will be described. 67, in order to attach an upper shaft support metal member 503 and a lower shaft support metal member 509 (both refer to FIG. 71) for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 on one side above and below one side of the main body frame main body 500. Shaft support bracket mounting steps 501 and 502 of the main frame main body 500 with the upper shaft support bracket 503 and the lower shaft support bracket 509 attached to the shaft support bracket mounting steps 501 and 502. The side is substantially flush with the upper side and the side of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower and side of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially flush with the lower and side of the lower shaft support 509 (FIG. 73). Here, the upper shaft support bracket 503 and the lower shaft support bracket 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 73. The upper shaft support metal fitting 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, the upper end side thereof protrudes forward, and the shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward thereof. A door shaft support hole 505 is formed on the side.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support fitting 509 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly above. The support plate 506 located below constitutes the frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2, and the support plate 507 located above the support plate 507 of the door frame 5. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 148 on the body frame 3 is configured. Therefore, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support projection 68 of the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the door support plate 507 is provided in the lower shaft support portion 148 of the door frame 5. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the protruding shaft pin 147 is formed.

By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof is a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 71) for installing the game board 4. And, a slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510 is a plate portion 511. Further, the front surface upper side portion and the front surface open side portion surrounding the game board installation recessed portion 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the back surface of the door frame 5, and the front surface upper side portion, An upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by a protrusion protruding in parallel to the lateral direction, and a side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outer side and an inner side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the inner side on the right side when viewed from the front. A crime prevention recess 583 formed by an inner wall whose rear end is an inclined surface connected to the first side wall 540 is formed, and the front shaft support side edge on the left side when viewed from the front is the front upper edge or the front open side. Unlike the side portion, it is not formed so as to have a predetermined width facing the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front shaft supporting side portion of the main body frame main body 500 is forward compared to the front upper side portion or the front open side portion. Is a shaft support side portion 587 (see FIG. 110) with a large amount of protrusion.

More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed on the upper side of the front surface is bent backward at both long side ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached and fixed to the rear surface of the upper side of the door frame 5. Bending protrusions 155 and 156 are inserted respectively. Further, the side crime prevention groove 582 and the crime prevention recess 583 formed on the front open side edge are folded rearward at both long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 attached and fixed to the open rear surface of the door frame 5. The open side outer bending protrusion 153 and the open side inner bending protrusion 154 to be bent are respectively inserted. Further, at the shaft supporting side portion 587 of the front shaft supporting side portion, the tip end of the shaft supporting side L-shaped bending protrusion 157 of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 fixedly attached to the shaft supporting side rear surface of the door frame 5. The parts come into contact with each other.

With the structure described above, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire through the gap between the abutment surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and particularly, the open side where fraudulent acts are most likely to occur. The structure is such that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the side and on the upper side where fraudulent acts are likely to occur next. Of course, the fraud prevention by the contact between the shaft-support-side reinforcing sheet metal 142 and the shaft-support-side L-shaped bent protrusion 157 on the shaft-support side also functions sufficiently, but in many cases, the shaft-support side is sturdy. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected to each other by the supporting metal fittings 45, 66 and the shaft support metal fittings 503, 509, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is larger than that of the upper side part and the open side part. It is difficult to make a gap in. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a single crime prevention structure is used instead of a double crime prevention structure. These points will be described later in detail.

Further, in addition to the above-described configuration, the front upper side portion, the front open side portion, and the front shaft support side portion on the front side that surrounds the game board installation recessed portion 510 are at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the front open side portion. A door hook hole 549 is provided for penetrating a door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 121) provided in a locking device 1000, which will be described later, attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3 on the open side, and popping it out forward. Further, a board positioning protrusion 576 for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed on the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front shaft support side portion. Further, on the inner front surface at a position slightly lower than the board positioning protrusion 576 on the side of the front shaft support side, the L-shaped bending protrusion 157 of the shaft support side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 is closed with the door frame 5 closed. Two upper and lower regulating projections 577 into which the tips are inserted are projected. The function of the restriction protrusion 577 is as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 67, a board stopper insertion hole into which an end portion of a game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open side flat portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72. The upper surface of the plate portion 511 serves as a game board placing portion 512 for placing the game board 4, and when the game board 4 is placed substantially in the center of the game board placing portion 512, the game board 4 is placed. A passage support protrusion 513 for supporting the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 76) formed in the No. 4 is provided in a protruding manner. Further, as shown in FIG. 67, rail mounting bosses 514 project from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the end portion on the open side at predetermined intervals, and the rail mounting boss 514 has a firing rail 515 ( 71) are fixed by screws. Further, a rail connecting member 516 is projectingly provided on the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 is installed. It is arranged to be adjacent to the connection passage portion 609 (see FIG. 76) which is the downstream end of 603.

In addition, at the lateral position of the rail connection member 516 (position opposite to the firing rail 515), the upper end portion of the elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 71) for fixing the lower portion of the game board 4 to each other. A fixing tool mounting boss 517 for mounting is attached, and a stopper 518 is projecting obliquely downward. That is, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotatably provided around the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and is rotated clockwise with the game board 4 placed on the game board placing portion 512 to rotate clockwise. The fixture 519 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by rotating the game board fixing tool 519 counterclockwise and removing it. In this case, the game board fixing tool 519 is prevented from excessive rotation in the counterclockwise direction by the stopper 518.

Further, a lower portion of the open side of the plate portion 511 is formed with a projecting device mounting portion 520 of a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is protruded toward the front side in a bulging manner (it is concave when viewed from the back surface). The hitting ball launching device 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This point will be described later in detail. A handle connecting window 522 is formed in the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520, in which the slide member 710 (see FIG. 95) that cooperates with the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 is housed. A shaft hole 523 facing the end face of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 91) of the ball striking mallet 687 is formed at a position adjacent to the handle connecting window 522. Further, a hammer penetrating opening 521 for projecting the hitting mallet 687 of the hitting ball launching device 650 upward is formed in the upper wall portion of the launching device mounting portion 520, and a plate portion 511 diagonally above the malleting penetrating opening 521 is formed. A cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 penetrates is formed on the front surface of the.

On the other hand, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, as shown in FIG. 68, there is formed a ball discharge passage 524 extending from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 and then extending downward. .. The ball discharge passage 524 is for discharging balls discharged from a ball connection passage 880 (see FIG. 71) described below from below the pachinko machine 1 to the inside of the island. Further, a columnar guide protrusion 525 is provided rearward above the launcher mounting portion 520, and a guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 128) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is formed in the guide protrusion 525. It is inserted to facilitate the attachment of the board unit 1100. Further, mounting hole portions 527 for mounting the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left, right, upper and lower sides of the plate portion 511, and mounting pieces 1122 of the board unit 1100 are made to correspond to the mounting hole portions 527 and fixed with screws. Further, a launching device mounting boss 529 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650 is provided to project rearward inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 520, and further, at the lowermost end portion on the open side, as shown in FIG. As shown, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the guide projection has a vertically elongated tip to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 is provided so as to project rearward.

In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with a ball removal connection opening 530 which is an opening at the upstream end of the ball removal discharge passage 524, as shown in FIG. .. The downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 880 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 530. Further, a portion adjacent to the ball removal connection opening 530 is horizontal so that a full tank unit mounting portion 531 for mounting a full tank unit 900 (see FIG. 71) described later is orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engagement groove 532 that is engaged with the engagement piece 924 (see FIG. 111) of the full tank unit 900 is formed in the front portion of the full tank unit mounting portion 531. Further, as shown in FIG. 71, on the front surface of the plate portion 511 in front of the full tank unit mounting portion 531, an outlet for blocking prize balls discharged from the outlet 921 of the full tank unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened. An opening/closing device 579 is provided.

Although the outlet opening/closing device 579 will not be described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening/closing plate is lowered by the lever that abuts on the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. When this is done, there is no contact with the lever, so the open/close plate rises and closes the outlet 921. Therefore, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not spill from the outlet 921. Further, as shown in FIG. 71, a fastening hole penetrating in the vertical direction at a position corresponding to above the launching portion of the launch rail 515, which is a game board placing portion 512 formed along the upper edge of the plate portion 511. A fastening connecting rod 534 for hooking the fastening band 619 is formed on the front portion of the fastening hole 533. The fastening connecting rod 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being removed from the main body frame 3.

Next, the configuration of the game board installation recess 510 will be described. The game board installation concave portion 510 is provided so as to extend rearward from the inner side surface on the shaft support side and the above-mentioned upper side portion and the flange surface portion on the open side, and to extend rearward from the first side surface wall 540. The main body frame 3 includes the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542 provided rearward from the second side wall 541, and the fourth side wall 543 provided rearward from the third side wall 542. The left and right side edges and the rear portion of the upper side are formed in a concave shape.

The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (the side on the shaft support side) of the rear side are extended straight backward with a step when viewed from the rear side, while the left side ( The open side) is formed in a step shape (see FIG. 75) that inclines inward from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is the rearmost end of the fourth side wall 543 when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 on the left side (open side) to the fourth side wall 543 are formed straight rearward. May contact the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 and may not be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall surface 540 on the opening side to the fourth side wall 543 may be opened smoothly by forming an inward slope. It is something that can be done.

At the same time, the lock device 1000 is mounted along the first side wall 540 on the open side, but the mounting is performed by using the lock mounting hole 547 (see FIG. 117) provided on the rear end side of the first side wall 540. Therefore, in order to form the lock attachment hole 547, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side are formed in an inclined step shape. Further, the size of the step between the first side wall 540 and the fourth side wall 543, and the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 need to contact the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. Therefore, the steps are formed with a certain level of difference, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be continuously formed without forming a step.

The side walls 540 to 543 are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3 and d4, respectively, as shown in FIG. 69, and in the case of the present embodiment, d1+d2+d3+d4=about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543. The rear protruding portions of various game devices provided in 4 are housed.

That is, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 contact the rear surface of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a step portion that contacts and extends rearward from the first side wall 540 substantially in parallel with the first side wall 540 and accommodates a rear protruding portion of the gaming device provided on the game board 4 It is what constitutes. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the rearward protruding amounts of all the portions of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper portion on the back surface side of the main body frame 3. The award ball tank 720 is formed so as to be located at substantially the same position as the rear wall 722 of the storage portion 728 that stores the balls.

As a result, the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, so that, for example, the game is played. Even when the gaming device is mounted such that the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the board 4, the rear protruding portion of such gaming device can be easily accommodated.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543, on the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (axial support side) of the open side rear wall 544, An upper rear wall 545 and a pivotally supporting rear wall 546 as a rear wall are respectively provided so as to project inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. A front surface of the shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 67), and a ball passage unit 770 and a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later and which constitute a ball payout mechanism, are detachably attached to the rear surface thereof. It is designed to be used. Therefore, it is sufficient for the width of the inward protruding portion of the rear wall 546 on the shaft support side to have a width for mounting the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800.

Further, the upper rear surface wall 545 has a flat plate-like front surface (see FIG. 67), and a tank rail member 740 to be described later is attached to the rear surface thereof, so that the lower end side thereof is formed in an inclined shape. Therefore, the width of the upper rear wall 545 protruding inward is sufficient if the tank rail member 740 mounted in an inclined shape has a height width dimension. Further, a front surface of the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 67), and a cover body supporting cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports a cover body 1250 described later is formed on the rear surface thereof. Therefore, the projecting width dimension of the open side rear wall 544 is sufficient if there is a width dimension forming the cover body supporting tubular portion 575.

As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear surface wall 544, the upper rear surface wall 545, and the shaft support side rear surface wall 546 that are provided to project inward from the rear end side of the fourth side surface wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate-shaped portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by 543 is secured, for example, even when a game device in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the game board 4 is attached, such a game device The rear protruding portion can be stored easily. A rear opening 580 is formed inside the open rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot-supporting rear wall 546 so that the rear opening 580 can be opened and closed by a cover body 1250 described later. Is becoming

Next, a more detailed structure of the game board installation recessed portion 510 will be described. As described above, the open side flat portion has the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 passes. Although it is opened in three places in the middle and bottom, the lock locking hole 548 into which a locking projection 1004 described later of the locking device 1000 is engaged is further above and below the hook holes 549 for doors above and below (see FIG. 68). ) Has been formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and the lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 68) for performing the attachment with a screw is provided at the rear end of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the upper part and the middle part. The lock device 1000 is mounted by screws not only in the upper and middle positions, but also in the lock mounting hole 547 formed near the screw stopper 1003 and the cylinder lock through hole 526 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later. The lower part of the locking device 1000 can also be attached by fixing with the screw with screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 70, when the body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 is provided on the left and right of the upper side of the first side wall 540. A guide arc projection 552 that abuts is projected, and an escape recess 551 that communicates with a notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720 described later is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. When the attachment flange portion 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the spheres stored in is increased, the pressure is released to prevent the ball clogging from occurring. Further, when the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are substantially aligned with each other when seen from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in a plan view (see FIG. 4). (See). The guide arc projection 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and the lower side of the main body frame 3 and the decorative cover plate. This is to prevent a fraudulent act such as forming a gap with the gap 15 and inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

Further, a rail locking groove 553 for mounting the tank rail member 740 is formed along the opening edge of the rear surface opening 580 in the upper rear surface wall 545 described above, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear surface wall 543 are formed. A rail locking groove 554 is formed in the bent portion of the 545. Then, by locking the locking projections 749, 750 (see FIG. 99) of the tank rail member 740 into these rail locking grooves 553, 554, the tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3. Further, a rail retaining elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the rail retaining groove 553, 554 is engaged with the tank rail member 740. When the projecting pieces 749, 750 are locked and the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail locking elastic piece 555 is provided on the upper end of the tank rail member 740 on the downstream side so that the locked state does not come off. It comes to abut from above.

When removing the tank rail member 740, the rail locking elastic piece 555 is pressed backward and then the tank rail is released to release the locked state of the rail locking grooves 553, 554 and the locking projections 749, 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. An escape hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail retaining elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 110 etc.) is formed below the rail retaining elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is formed to allow the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided on the tank rail member 740 to escape, and the ground wire connector 557 is provided inside the tank rail member 740. The wiring is connected to a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached and connected to a ground connector provided on the power supply board 1136.

68 and 70, vertical standing walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the shaft supporting side rear surface wall 546, and the ball passage unit is provided between the standing wall 560. 770 and prize ball unit 800 are attached. Further, a prize ball guide protrusion 561 is provided in a bent shape from the uppermost stream portion between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle stream portion. The prize ball guide protrusion 561 is provided rearward on the rear wall 546 of the shaft support side so that the projecting height thereof gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and when the ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. Corresponding to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 104) of the ball passage unit 770, and guides the prize balls in a line. Also, a passage unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball passage unit 770 with a screw and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided on the left and right of the prize ball guide protrusion 561, and a ball break switch to be described later is provided. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 is provided so as to face 778 (see FIG. 104). The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

Furthermore, an engaging projection 565 as a locking portion that engages with a hook-shaped engaging portion 824 (see FIG. 106) as an engaging portion of the prize ball unit 800 from the middle stream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560. , A lock elastic claw 564 that engages with the button insertion engaging hole 821 (see FIG. 106) of the prize ball unit 800, and the rotation shaft 808 of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 (see FIG. 106). An escape hole 566 is formed to receive the end portion of (see). Further, a payout motor escape opening 572 is formed below the shaft support side rear wall 546, and the payout motor 815 as a drive motor of the prize ball unit 800 faces the payout motor escape opening 572. (See FIG. 71). Then, the prize ball unit 800 locks the lower end of the locking groove 573 formed at the lowermost end of the rear surface of the shaft support side rear wall 546 and locks the lower end of the locking groove 573 and the elastic projection 564 for locking the rear side of the shaft support side. It is adapted to be detachably attached to the face wall 546. This detachable structure will be described in detail later.

In addition, a cover body contact groove 567 into which the open side of the cover body 1250 is inserted is formed at the open end of the shaft support side rear wall 546, and the cover body contact groove 567 is provided below the cover body contact groove 567. A locking wall 569 is provided so as to project. Stop holes 568 corresponding to the stop holes 1253 (see FIGS. 74 and 139) of the cover body 1250 are formed in the cover body contact groove 567, and these stop holes 1253 and 568 are not shown in alignment with each other. By fixing with screws, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. Further, a locking protruding hook piece 570 having a U-shape in a plan view is protruded from the locking wall 569, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 is attached to the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed to the main body frame 3. Only the person in charge who has the padlock key opens the cover body 1250 by penetrating the formed through hole 1254 (see FIG. 74) and hanging a lock such as a padlock on the locking protruding hook piece 570. Can be prevented.

Although the configuration of the main body frame main body 500 including the game board installation recessed portion 510 and the plate portion 511 has been described above, when the door frame 5 is closed at the lowermost edge of the plate portion 511, other than the above description. Are formed with engagement grooves 584, 585 (see FIG. 67) into which the door frame projecting pieces 110d, 110e (see FIG. 25), which are formed by bending the lower side of the door frame base body 110 rearward, are inserted. There is. The engaging groove 584 is a groove formed below the above-described launching device mounting portion 520, and the engaging groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engaging groove 584 toward the shaft support side. The door frame protrusion 110d corresponding to the engagement groove 585 is provided rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110e corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, a door frame protrusion 110d with a large amount of protrusion is slightly formed in the lower portion of the open end. The door frame projections 110d and 110e and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above form the outer projections and the engagement portions on the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening/closing device 579, and the rail connecting member 516 and the launch device mounting portion 520 are projectingly formed. The arrangement positions of the plate portions 511 are biased toward the open side, and further, they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. Therefore, in the state where the door frame 5 is closed, the area extending from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 on which the launcher mounting portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are arranged to the open side is the back surface of the door frame 5 and the launcher mounting portion. Since the 520 and the front surface of the firing rail 515 are brought into close contact with each other, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has slipped through the gap between the door frame projection 110d and the engaging groove 585 described above is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5. It is extremely difficult to pass through between the launcher mounting portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 even better and reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

On the other hand, in the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are not arranged to the shaft support side, there is no portion protruding on the surface of the plate portion 511, and therefore the door frame 5 is closed. In, the space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. Therefore, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has slipped through the gap between the door frame projection 110d and the engagement groove 584 described above can easily form the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. Since it is possible to slip through the space 586, the mounting base 160 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 has a space 586 with the door frame 5 closed so that an illegal tool does not slip upward. A security protrusion 166 is formed so as to penetrate into the. The crime prevention protrusion 166 is formed on the mounting base 160 so as to extend from approximately the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the shaft support side. Therefore, the space below the launch rail 515 and the outer rail 602 attached to the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 that receives the crime prevention protrusion 166 protruding from the mounting base 160. The crime prevention protrusion 166 and the crime prevention space 586 form an inner protrusion and an engaging portion on the lower side of the door frame 5 and the body frame 3.

The main body frame 3 is, as described above, the game board 4, the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the locking device 1000, the substrate unit. The 1100 and the cover body 1250 are attached, but these will be described in order below.

[1-3A. Schematic configuration of game board]
The schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 89. 76 is a perspective view seen from the front of the game board 4, FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 78 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. 79 is a game board 4. 80 is an enlarged perspective view of a removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 81 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure on the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4. It is a partial perspective view of FIG. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view showing a front component member, a game panel, and a panel holder in the game board, which are vertically cut in the assembled state, and FIG. 83 is a front component member mainly configuring the game board. FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming panel, the panel holder, and the like, which are disassembled and seen from diagonally front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 83 seen from diagonally rear. Further, FIG. 85 is a perspective view which is obliquely shown in the state where the main control board box is fixed to the board holder. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 85 disassembled into a board substrate holder, a drawer holder, and a main control board box and is obliquely shown from the rear. Also, FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram of an exploded perspective view of the function display unit in the game board. Further, FIG. 88 is a schematic view of the function display sticker, and FIG. 89 is a partial view of the function display sticker of the game board through the game window.

As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has a transparent plate-shaped game panel 600, a panel holder 630 that holds the game panel 600 and has a substantially square outer shape, and the game panel 600 via the panel holder 630. The front component member 601 is attached to the front surface so as to surround the game area 605, and the function display unit 640 (see FIG. 87 and the like) fixed to the rear side of the front component member 601. On the surface of the game panel 600, various game devices and numerous obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the game area 605. The front component 601 is attached to the front surface of the panel holder 630 after the gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided. The front component 601 has a circular cavity so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 605. Is formed into a shape and the outer shape is formed along the outer shape of the panel holder 630, and an arc surface extending from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side past the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602. An inner rail 603 is formed from a lower position of the stopper portion 620 provided at the end of 602 to a position where the symmetrical backflow prevention member 604 of the stopper portion 620 on the upper side is provided. In the outer rail 602, a connecting passage portion 609 connected to a rail connecting member 516 provided in an extension of the firing rail 515 is formed obliquely at the start end portion thereof, and the connecting portion 609 is adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609 to form a foul mouth. 610 is formed. Further, a metal rail is closely attached to the outer rail 602 extending from the upstream end of the foul port 610 to the stopper 620.

The impact stop 620 is provided with an elastic body made of rubber or synthetic resin so as to repel the hit ball hitting the inside of the game area 605 when the hit ball sliding on the outer rail 602 collides vigorously. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the hit ball that has been fired once and taken into the inside of the game area 605 from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Further, a crime prevention protrusion 608 is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail 602 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. The crime prevention projection 608 vertically overlaps with the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 475 protruding from the crime prevention cover 470 as described above in the state where the door frame 5 is closed, and the axis of the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is overlapped. It is intended to prevent the intrusion of a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire which is inserted slightly below the middle of the gap on the support side.

Further, an out port 606 is provided at the center of the lower portion of the inner rail 603, and between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow prevention member 604, the shot hit to the game area 605. Although constituting a guiding passage to be guided, the hit ball that has flown back through the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the foul port 610 and guided to a foul ball inlet 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. And is again discharged to the dish unit 300. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. A rail crime prevention groove 607 is formed in the front constituent member 601 on the way from the outlet 606 of the inner rail 603 toward the stopper 620. The rail crime prevention groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime protection protrusion 474 protruding from the crime prevention cover 470 enters as described above when the door frame 5 is closed. Due to the concavo-convex engagement of the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the crime prevention rear projecting piece 474, an illegal wire such as a piano wire which is vertically overlapped and is inserted slightly below the middle of the opening side gap in the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 It finally prevents the intrusion of ingredients.

By the way, on one side of the game board 4, a positioning recess 611 that fits into a board positioning protrusion 576 formed on the main body frame 3 is formed, and on the other side of the game board 4, a board formed on the main body frame 3 is formed. A game board stopper 614 to be inserted into the stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The game board stopper 614 has its end inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when fixed by being pushed. Thus, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, after the positioning recess 611 is obliquely inserted from the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to fit the board positioning protrusion 576, the game board 4 The whole is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3, the game board stopper 614 which is in a free state in that state is pushed and fixed, and its end is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed. . Then, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. This allows the game board 4 to be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, it may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

In addition, the game board 4 in the present embodiment has a configuration that extremely easily prevents unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3. That is, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 80, a mounting notch 616 penetrating in the front and rear of the game board 4 is formed at the lower end of the lower side of the game board 4 opposite to the passage notch 613 (correctly, A mounting notch 616 is formed in the front component 601.), and a fastening bar 617 is horizontally fixed to the lower part of the mounting notch 616 in the horizontal direction. The fastening bar 617 is formed with a band groove-shaped fastening portion 618 for hanging the fastening band 619 substantially at the center thereof. On the other hand, as the removal preventing mechanism provided in the main body frame 3, as described above, the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3 and the firing rail 515 is fired. A fastening hole 533 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to above the portion, and a fastening connecting rod 534 for hooking the fastening band 619 is provided in a front portion of the fastening hole 533 (see FIG. 81). reference).

When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation concave portion 510 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 80, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board placing portion 512. With the state, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening connecting rod 534 are in the same state. Then, in this state, the tip of a commercially available fastening band 619 is inserted from above the fastening bar 617 into the mounting notch 616 with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening connecting rod 534 coincide with each other. Is inserted downward into the fastening hole 533 and guided forward, and the tip end thereof is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. Then, the unnecessary tip portion of the fastening band 619 protruding forward from the fastener is cut off. In this way, unless the fastening band 619 is cut, the game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 614, the game board fixing tool 519 and the like are released. Although the gaming board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if a different fastening band is fastened by using a fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor It can be easily understood that the dish 4 was removed and some illegal act was performed. In this way, the extremely simple removal prevention mechanism can prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3.

Further, the outer shape of the game board 4 has cutouts 612 formed on the upper left and right sides thereof, and a part of a front guide passage 920 portion of a full tank unit 900 described later is inserted obliquely laterally below the foul mouth 610. A passage cutout 613 is formed. Further, on the lower left and right sides of the front component member 601, there are provided certificate stamp sticking portions 615 for sticking certificate stamps for proof confirmation. Further, a function display sticker 649 is attached to the upper side of the lower right certificate stamp attaching portion 615 of the front component member 601.

On the other hand, on the back surface of the game board 4, the balls which have won the various game devices (for example, general winning holes 2004, 2101, starting holes 2001 and 2002, big winning holes 2003, etc.) provided in the game area 605 are located on the downstream side. A liquid crystal control board 3281 for controlling the display of a liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIG. 151 etc.) as a display device which is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 605 on the back surface of the back box 621 which can be aligned with and guided to. A peripheral board box 622 in which the peripheral control board 4140 is housed is attached.

Further, on the back surface of the game board 4, a board substrate holder 623 is fixed below the back box 621. This board holder 623 for the board has a space portion (the width in the front-rear direction of the space portion is relatively wider than the width of the back box 621 so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the back box 621 in the front thereof. Is formed), and a drop port 629 (see FIG. 75) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port 629 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with an out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 128) formed in the substrate unit 1100 described later.

Further, the board substrate holder 623 has a main control board box 624 on the back surface thereof for accommodating a main control board 4100 for controlling game operations, and a payout control board 1186, a power supply board 1136 and the like provided in a board unit 1100 described later. A relay terminal board 625 for connection is attached. The relay terminal board 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 which are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided in the board unit 1100 only by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3.

Further, the board holder 623 for a board is formed with a joining guide projection 628 projecting rearward from between the drawer connectors 626 and 627 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 625. The joining guide protrusions 628 are provided on the drawer board 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 side and the game board 4 side when the game board 4 is mounted on the main body frame 3 as described later in detail. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 are naturally inserted into the joint guide holes 1213 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 of the substrate unit 1100 (see FIG. 128). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

[1-3A-1. Previous component, game panel, panel holder, panel back plate]
Subsequently, the holding structure of the game panel 600 in the game board 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of the present embodiment is a plate-shaped game panel 600 made of a transparent synthetic resin having a size corresponding to the game area 605, and a synthetic resin holding the game panel 600 detachably from the front. A frame-shaped panel holder 630 made up of, and an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603 which are arranged on the front side of the panel holder 630 to partition the outer periphery of the game area 605 and guide the game balls into the game area 605. It mainly includes a front component member 601 and a plate-shaped panel back plate 635 arranged in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630.

As shown in the figure, the front component member 601 is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 601a and positioning protrusions 601b protruding rearward on the rear surface side. The positioning bosses 601a and the positioning protrusions 601b will be described later in detail, but can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 630, the board substrate holder 623, and the game panel 600 arranged on the rear side.

The game panel 600 in the game board 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 605, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin. .. The board thickness of the game panel 600 is thinner than that of the panel holder 630, and is set to a minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even when an obstacle nail (not shown) is implanted.

In this game panel 600, there are provided a plurality of fitting holes 600a which are arranged in the vicinity of the outer circumference and which are formed in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 600b which is arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left part and which penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction. Each is equipped. The fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b are arranged outside the game area 605, and perform positioning with the panel holder 630. In addition, the game panel 600 is provided with a stepped engagement step portion 600c having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and the lower side. The engaging stepped portion 600c has a shape in which approximately half the plate thickness of the game panel 600 is cut out, and is arranged outside the game area 605, like the fitting hole 600a and the elongated hole 600b. It is for engaging and fixing the game panel 600 to the panel holder 630.

Further, the game panel 600 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 600d at predetermined positions. The inner rail 603 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 601b protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 603 into the inner rail fixing hole 600d.

Further, the game panel 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 600e having a predetermined inner shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction so as to be provided with a center accessory 2400, a starting opening unit 2000, and the like, and fixes them. A fixing hole for forming is formed at an appropriate position. Note that these openings 600e are shaped so as not to penetrate the outer periphery of the game panel 600 in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the outer periphery of the game panel 600 is connected, so the strength of the game panel 600 by the opening 600e. It is designed to suppress the decrease in

The panel holder 630 in the game board 4 has a size that includes the game panel 600 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and has a thickness of a member (for example, a game board base) made of wood plywood in the game board of the conventional pachinko machine. It is made of a thermoplastic synthetic resin having approximately the same thickness (about 20 mm in this example). This panel holder 630 holds the game panel 600 in a detachable manner, and has a holding step portion 630a that is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is approximately the same size as the game area 605 inside the holding step portion 630a. A through hole 630b penetrating in the direction is mainly provided.

The holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the gaming panel 600, and the front surface of the gaming panel 600 held in the holding step portion 630a is the front surface of the panel holder 630. It is designed to be on the same plane as. Further, the holding step portion 630a has a front inner peripheral surface having a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance C (see FIG. 82) is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 600. By this clearance C, even if the game panel 600 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes with time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. Note that the clearance C may be filled with an elastic member such as rubber.

In addition, the panel holder 630 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b formed in the game panel 600 held by the holding step 630a, and extends from the front surface of the holding step 630a toward the front. It is provided with a plurality of projecting pins 630c that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 600a and the long holes 600b of the game panel 600. By fitting and inserting these projecting pins 630c into the fitting holes 600a and the long holes 600b of the game panel 600, the panel holder 630 and the game panel 600 can be positioned relative to each other.

Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with an engaging claw 630d and an engaging piece 630e that engage with the engaging step 600c at a position corresponding to the engaging step 600c of the game panel 600. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 82, the engaging claw 630d is arranged on the upper holding step 630a of the panel holder 630 and corresponds to the upper engaging step 600c of the game panel 600. The front surface of the holding step portion 630a projects forward and is elastically engaged with the engaging step portion 600c. The engaging claw 630d is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 630. On the other hand, the engaging piece 630e is arranged on the lower holding step 630a of the panel holder 630, corresponds to the lower engaging step 600c of the game panel 600, and plays between the front surface of the holding step 630a. A predetermined amount is formed along the front surface of the panel holder 630 toward the upper side (center side) in a state in which a predetermined gap having a size capable of inserting the engagement step portion 600c of the panel 600 is formed. By engaging the engaging stepped portion 600c of the game panel 600 with the engaging claw 630d and the engaging piece 630e, the game panel 600 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 630.

Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with a boss insertion hole 630f penetrating through the positioning boss 601a provided in the front component member 601 in the front-rear direction. The positioning boss of the front component member 601 is inserted into the boss insertion hole 630f. By inserting 601a, the panel holder 630 and the front component 601 are positioned with respect to each other.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 has a mounting support portion 630g which is recessed in the front side by a predetermined amount so as to leave an outer peripheral edge on the lower surface of the panel holder 630, which is slightly below the center in the vertical direction. Is provided. Due to this mounting support portion 630g, the rear surface of the panel holder 630 becomes a shape above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height in a state in which the rear side outer peripheral portion is projected rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth) is set to a depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) capable of accommodating the flange-shaped fixing portion 621a (see FIG. 155) of the back box 621 of the back unit 2000 mounted and fixed to the mounting support portion 630g. It is desirable that the distance is between 1 and 3 mm). By fixing and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 630g, the fixing portion 621a can be prevented from projecting rearward of the panel holder 630, and the panel holder 630, that is, the game board 4 can be prevented. The game board installation concave portion 510 can be securely installed and mounted.

Further, on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630, it is formed below the position where the mounting support portion 630g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and is recessed toward the front side to accommodate the panel back plate 635. And a locking portion 630i capable of locking a locking claw 635c formed on the panel back plate 635 and penetrating in the housing recess 630h in the front-rear direction. The housing recess 630h accommodates the panel back plate 635 in a detachable manner by locking the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 with the locking portion 630i, and the rear surface of the housed panel back plate 635 is a panel. It is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the holder 630.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 630j arranged in the mounting support portion 630g on the rear surface side and above the accommodation recess 630h and capable of screwing predetermined screws. They are arranged in a predetermined array. Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 630k arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 630j. The positioning hole 630k is a positioning projection formed on a member that is mounted and fixed by using the mounting hole 630j (for example, a positioning projection that protrudes forward from a fixing portion 621a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 621 (illustrated). Is omitted)) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 630k is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) as viewed from the rear.

It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 630j, a hole having a large inner diameter and a hole having a small inner diameter are mixed, and the mounting hole having an appropriate diameter is mounted according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 630j may be used.

Further, the panel holder 630 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 630l which are opened to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 630 is reduced by the lightening portions 630l. It has become. As shown in FIG. 83, these lightening portions 630l are not formed in the front side of the accommodation recess 630h, that is, within a predetermined range from the lower end on the front surface side of the panel holder 630 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 630 is configured to be a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the connection passage portion 609 of the front component member 601 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the ball hitting device 650 The game balls that have been launched are smoothly guided. Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 630 is provided with a thinned-out portion 630l so that the mounting holes 630j and the like are formed in a boss shape and supports them and maintains the strength of the panel holder 630. In this case, the grid-shaped ribs are formed in order to prevent them.

In addition, in this panel holder 630, an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and a positioning portion 630m corresponding to a positioning means such as an assembly jig are formed, and the gaming panel 600 is held in the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set it in the state of being. Further, the lower portion of the panel holder 630 is further provided with an opening 630n that communicates with the out port 606 of the front component 601 and a communication hole 630o that communicates with the foul port 610 of the front component 601.

Next, the panel back plate 635 is arranged on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 so as to cover the thinned-out portion 630l within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the rear surfaces of the panel recess 630h of the panel holder 630 have their rear surfaces. A plurality of screw holes 635a that can be housed so as to be substantially in the same plane, are arranged in a predetermined array on the planar rear surface, and can be screwed with predetermined screws, and a plurality of screw holes 635a that are arranged to correspond to the screw holes 635a A positioning hole 635b, a locking claw 635c that can be locked to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630, and a weight-reducing concave portion 635d that is depressed so as not to penetrate from the front surface side are provided.

The screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b in the panel back plate 635 have substantially the same structure as the mounting hole 630j and the positioning hole 630k in the panel holder 630. Similarly to the panel holder 630, the panel back plate 635 also has a recess 635d in which the screw holes 635a, the positioning holes 635b, and the like are formed in a boss shape, and supports and supports them. In order to maintain the strength of 635, a grid-like rib is formed. Further, the panel back plate 635 is provided with an opening 635e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 630n of the panel holder 630, the communication hole 630o, and the boss insertion hole 630f.

The panel back plate 635 is housed in the housing recess 630h of the panel holder 630, and the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 is locked to the locking part 630i of the panel holder 630 so that it is integrated with the panel holder 630. In that state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 635 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 630. By integrating the panel holder 630 and the panel back plate 635 in this way, the mounting holes 630j and the screw holes are arranged on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 in a predetermined arrangement on the outer peripheral side of the through hole 630b over substantially the entire circumference. A mounting hole made of 635a and the like and positioning holes 630k and 635b are arranged, and the existence of these mounting holes allows a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed at an arbitrary position.

As described above, according to the holding structure of the gaming panel 600 in this example, the gaming panel 600 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 from the front, the engaging claw 630d and the engaging piece 630e, By engaging the engaging stepped portion 600c, the gaming panel 600 can be held by the panel holder 630, and the gaming panel 600 and the front surface side of the panel holder 630 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the gaming panel 600 in the panel holder 630 to the conventional obstacle nail planting device without modifying the obstacle nail planting device which is used more, and to plant the obstacle nails. It is possible to prevent the cost from increasing.

Further, since the game board 4 having the game area 605 is divided into the game panel 600, the panel holder 630, and the front component member 601, the positions of obstacle nails, winning holes, etc. may vary depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1. The changing game panel 600 can be used as a replacement part, and the panel holder 630 and the front component member 601 can be used as a common part, and the panel holder 630, the front component member 601, and the like can be recycled, and the game panel 600 can be used. Only by exchanging only the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 4 compatible with various models.

Further, since the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 630j in a predetermined arrangement in advance, various types of the back unit 2000, the board substrate holder 623 for the panel, etc., which are mounted and fixed to the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 depending on the model. By designing the fixing portions of various members so as to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 630j even if the predetermined member mounting and fixing positions are different, the panel holder 630 is common to all pachinko machines 1 independent of the model. It can be used as a part.

In the present embodiment, in the game board 4, the transparent game panel 600 forming the rear surface of the game area 605 is held by the panel holder 630, but like the conventional pachinko machine, the game panel is shown. 600 may be integrated with the panel holder 630 and may be formed of a wooden plywood such as a veneer plate.

[1-3A-2. Board substrate holder]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the board substrate holder 623 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. This board holder 623 for a board is attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 630, and as shown in the figure, has a box-like shape with its front and upper parts open, and its bottom is substantially centered in the left-right direction and is located at the front side. It is inclined so as to become lower toward, and after receiving the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 600, it is possible to discharge downward from the substantially center in the left-right direction. A main control board box mounting portion 623a for mounting the main control board box 624 is formed on the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, and the main control board box mounting portion 623a is provided on the side (right side in rear view). A sealed portion 623b corresponding to the sealed portion 624a provided in the main control board box 624 is formed. A drawer holder 636 that supports the relay terminal plate 625 and the drawer connectors 626 and 627 is fixed to the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623.

The main control board box 624 of this example is supported by the main control board box mounting portion 623a on the rear surface of the board holder 623, and the sealing portion 624a of the main control board box 624 is the main control board box mounting portion 623a. The lateral sealed portion 623b is sealed. When the main control board box 624 is removed from the board holder 623 in this state, an opening mark is left on the sealed portion 623b of the main control board box mounting portion 623a, and the main control board box 624 is It is possible to visually confirm whether or not it has been removed illegally.

[1-3A-3. Function display unit]
First, as shown in FIG. 87, the function display unit in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a function display substrate 640a and a cover member 640b. As shown in the figure, the function display board 640a includes segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LEDs 1 to LED12, the segment indicator SEG1 is assigned the first special symbol indicator 641, and the segment SEG2 is assigned the second special symbol. The symbol display device 642 is assigned. The segment displays SEG1 and SEG2 are capable of displaying alphanumeric characters and figures, and by displaying these alphanumeric characters and figures as special symbols, the first opening unit 2000 described later is displayed. When the game ball wins the starting opening 2001, the segment display SEG1 variably displays a predetermined special symbol, and when the game ball wins the second starting opening 2002, the segment display SEG2 variably displays the predetermined special symbol. It has become.

Further, LED1 is assigned a first special symbol storage lamp 643a, LED2 is assigned a first special symbol storage lamp 643b, respectively, LED3 is a second special symbol memory lamp 644a, LED4 is a second special symbol memory lamp 644b. Each is assigned. When the game ball winning the first starting opening 2001 is not used in the variable display of the special symbol, the first special symbol memory display 643 is turned on or blinking with the number of balls of the winning game ball as the reserved number. There is. Specifically, when the holding ball (starting memory) is 1 ball, the first special symbol storage lamp 643a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 643b is turned off, and when the holding ball is 2 balls, the first special symbol storage The display 643 lights up together, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a blinks when the holding balls are 3 balls, the first special symbol memory lamp 643b lights up, and when the holding balls are 4 balls, the first special symbol memory display Both devices 643 blink. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the second starting opening 2002 is not used in the variable display of the special symbol, the second special symbol memory display 644 is turned on or blinking with the number of balls of the game ball that has won the winning number as the holding number. Is becoming Specifically, when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the second special symbol storage lamp 644a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 644b is turned off, and when the holding ball is two balls, the second special symbol storage The display 644 lights up together, when the holding ball is 3 balls, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 644b lights up, and when the holding ball is 4 balls, the second special symbol memory display Both devices 644 blink.

Further, the LED 5 is normally assigned with a symbol display device 645. The LED 5 is an LED that can turn on red/green/orange, and can also turn on by combining these red/green/orange colors. The LED 5 displays the lit color as a normal symbol, and when the game ball passes through the gate 2300a of the gate member 2200, which will be described later, the predetermined normal symbol is variably displayed.

Moreover, the normal symbol storage display 646 is assigned to the LEDs 6 to 9, respectively. The game ball that has passed through the gate 2300a is not used in the variable display of the ordinary symbol (when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is executed on the ordinary symbol display device 645 and when the movable piece 2005 is opened/closed) The game ball that is not used for the variable display of the normal symbol immediately after passing 2300a) has the number of balls of the game ball that has passed as the reserved number, and the normal symbol memory display 646 is turned on. Specifically, when the holding ball is 1 ball, the normal symbol storage lamp 646a is turned on and the normal symbol storage lamps 646b to 646d are turned off, and when the holding ball is 2 balls, the normal symbol storage lamps 646a and 646b are turned on. Normal symbol storage lamps 646c and 646d are turned off, when the holding balls are three balls, the normal symbol storage lamps 646a to 646c are turned on, the normal symbol storage lamp 646b is turned off, and when the holding balls are four balls, the normal symbol storage indicator All 646 lights up.

In addition, a gaming state display 647 is assigned to the LED 10. The LED 10 is an LED that can turn on red/green/orange, and can also turn on by combining these red/green/orange colors. The LED 10 displays the illuminated color as a gaming state to notify that the gaming state has a probability variation or a small hit.

Further, the LED 11 is assigned with a two-round display lamp 648a, and the LED 12 is assigned with a 15-round display lamp 648b. As described above, the two-round display lamp 648a is configured to illuminate and notify that the number of times (round) the special winning opening 2003 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two, while the 15-round display is displayed. The lamp 648b lights up and notifies that the round is 15 times.

Thus, mounted on the function display board 640a, the segment display SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol memory display 643, The second special symbol memory display 644, the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol memory display 646, the game status display 647, the round display 648 are assigned respectively, and perform various function displays, the segment display SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, that is, the first special symbol display device 641, the second special symbol display device 642, the first special symbol memory display device 643, the second special symbol memory display device 644, the normal symbol display device 645, the normal symbol memory The display unit 646, the game status display unit 647, and the round display unit 648 are integrated on the function display substrate 640a.

In addition, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642, respectively, to change the jackpot gaming state as a special symbol to change, therefore, the first special symbol memory display 643, the second special symbol memory display 644, Ordinary symbol display device 645, ordinary symbol memory display device 646, game state display device 647, round display device 648 are distinguished from each other, and LED1 to LED12 assigned to them are used as segment display devices SEG1 and SEG2, and alphanumeric characters and figures Variable display such as a special symbol.

The fixed value 6 is the sum of the numbers of LEDs 6 to 9 assigned to the normal symbol storage display 646 and the numbers of LEDs 11 and 12 assigned to the round display 648.

By the way, the function display substrate 640a is fixed to the cover member 640b with a screw (not shown), and the cover member 640b is attached from the rear surface of the front component member 601 of the game board 4 with a screw (not shown). A segment indicator opening 601c is formed in the front component member 601 at a position corresponding to the segments SEG1 and SEG2 of the function display substrate 640a, so that the contents displayed by these segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 can be visually recognized. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 87, the front component member 601 is provided with LED insertion holes 601d at positions corresponding to the LEDs 1 to 12 of the function display substrate 640a, and the cover member 640b is attached to the front component member 601. The LEDs 1 to 12 do not interfere with the game board 4 when mounted on the back surface of the. These LED insertion holes 601d are formed in a cylindrical shape so that the light that is turned on or blinks of the LEDs 1 to 12 is not mistaken for the light that is turned on or blinks of the adjacent LED. The contents displayed by the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2 and the contents displayed by the LEDs 1 to 12 lit or blinking are printed on a function display sticker 649 described later. The front component member 601 is provided with a function display sticker sticking portion 601e for sticking the function display sticker 649. A concave portion 601f is formed in the function display sticker attaching portion 601e. A tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver is inserted into the recess 601f to facilitate the peeling of the function display seal 649 attached. Here, in order to make it easier to peel off the function display seal 649, it may be possible to provide a projection portion on the function display seal 649, but when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3, the projection portion is pulled for some reason. Therefore, the function display sticker 649 may be peeled off from the function display sticker attaching portion 601e. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by forming the concave portion 601f in the function display sticker sticking portion 601e, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3, the function display sticker 649 does not come off from the function display sticker sticking portion 601e. ing.

[1-3A-4. Function display sticker]
Next, as shown in FIG. 88, the function display sticker 649 in the gaming machine 4 is printed on the surface thereof by being grouped into function groups Grp1 to Grp3, etc., in the non-gaming area of the gaming board 4. It is affixed to a function display sticker affixing portion 601e formed on a certain front component member 601.

As shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp1 is composed of a first special symbol display device 641 and a first special symbol memory display device 643, and these first special symbol display device 641 and first special symbol memory display device. 643 is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 while being surrounded by a solid line SL1 in which 643 can be visually recognized. The area surrounded by the solid line SL1 allows the display by the first special symbol display 641 and the lighting or blinking by the first special symbol memory display 643 to be visually recognized, so that the first special symbol display 641, the first special symbol memory The position corresponding to the display 643 is transparent. In the group Grp1, various information relating to the variable display of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 2001 is displayed. For example, when the winning prize is entered into the first starting opening 2001, the first special symbol display 641 variably displays a predetermined special symbol, or the first special symbol memory display 643 has the number of winning game balls as the reserved number. It lights up or blinks. Thus, by grouping the first special symbol display 641, the first special symbol memory display 643 into one group Grp1, these first special symbol display 641, the first special symbol memory display 643 It is possible to inform the player that indicates various information regarding the variable display of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 2001. As a result, the player visually recognizes the group Grp1 printed on the function display sticker 649, which is partitioned in the state surrounded by the solid line SL1, to change the special symbol due to the start winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 2001. Various information regarding the display can be easily confirmed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp2 is composed of a second special symbol display device 642 and a second special symbol storage display device 644, and these second special symbol display device 642 and second special symbol storage device. The display 644 is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 while being surrounded by a solid line SL2 where the display 644 can be visually recognized. The area surrounded by the solid line SL2 allows the display by the second special symbol display 642 and the lighting or blinking by the second special symbol storage display 644 to be visually recognized, so that the second special symbol display 642, the second special symbol storage The position corresponding to the display 644 is transparent. In this group Grp2, various information relating to the variable display of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2002 is displayed. For example, when the game ball starts winning in the second starting opening 2002, the second special symbol display 642 variably displays a predetermined special symbol, or the second special symbol memory display with the number of balls of the winning game ball as the reserved number. The device 644 lights up or blinks. Thus, by grouping the second special symbol display 642, the second special symbol storage display 644 into one group Grp2, these second special symbol display 642, the second special symbol storage display 644 It is possible to inform the player that indicates various information regarding the variable display of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2002. As a result, the player visually recognizes the group Grp2 printed on the function display sticker 649 that is partitioned in the state surrounded by the solid line SL2, and the variable display of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2002 is displayed. It is possible to easily check various kinds of information regarding.

Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp3 is composed of a normal symbol display device 645 and a normal symbol storage display device 646, and these normal symbol display device 645 and normal symbol storage display device 646 can be visually recognized as a solid line SL3. The function display sticker 649 is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649. In the area surrounded by the solid line SL3, the positions corresponding to the normal symbol display device 645 and the normal symbol memory display device 646 are transparent so that the lighting by the normal symbol display device 645 and the lighting by the normal symbol memory display device 646 can be visually recognized. Is becoming As described above, the normal symbol display 645 variably displays the presence/absence of opening/closing of the movable piece 2005 as a predetermined ordinary symbol, and when the movable piece 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state, the game ball goes to the second starting opening 2002. It will be easier to win the prize. Therefore, in the normal symbol display 645, the first special symbol display 641, the first special symbol memory display 643, the second special symbol display 642, the second special symbol memory display 644, the normal symbol memory display Stars are printed so that they can be distinguished from 646, the game state display 647, and the round display 648. In this group Grp3, various information regarding the gate 2300a can also be displayed. For example, when the game ball passes through the gate 2300a, the normal symbol display device 645 variably displays a predetermined normal symbol, or the normal symbol storage display device 646 is turned on with the number of balls of the game ball passed through as a holding number. In this way, by grouping the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 into one group Grp3, these normal symbol display 645 and normal symbol storage display 646 are related to the variable display of the normal symbols. It is possible to inform the player that the information is shown. As a result, the player can easily confirm various information relating to the variable display of the normal symbols by visually observing the group Grp3 printed on the function display sticker 649 partitioned in the state surrounded by the solid line SL3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 88, at positions corresponding to the game status display 647 and the round display 648, the game status display 647 and the round display 648 are surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6, respectively. It is partitioned and printed. The area surrounded by the solid lines SL4 to SL6 is transparent at the positions corresponding to the game status display 647 and the round display 648 so that the lighting by the game status display 647 and the round display 648 can be visually recognized. On the round indicator 648, a value of 2, which is the maximum number of rounds, is printed at a position corresponding to the 2-round display lamp 648a, and a position corresponding to the 15-round display lamp 648b is displayed so that the maximum number of rounds can be easily understood. A value of 15, which is the maximum number of rounds, is printed on. As described above, the gaming state display 647 displays the lighting color as the gaming state to notify that the gaming state has probability variation or a small hit, and the two-round display lamp 648a indicates that the big winning opening 2003 is The number of times (round) from the closed state to the open state is turned on twice, and the 15 round display lamp 648b turns on and notifies that the round is 15 times. As a result, the player can easily confirm the game state by visually checking the game state indicator 647 printed on the function display sticker 649, which is partitioned in the state surrounded by the solid line SL4, and can be confirmed by the solid line SL5. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the maximum number of rounds is two by visually observing the two-round display lamp 648a printed on the function display sticker 649 which is partitioned in the enclosed state. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the maximum number of rounds is 15 by visually observing the 15-round display lamp 648b which is partitioned in the enclosed state and printed on the function display sticker 649.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the groups Grp1 to Grp3 are partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in the state surrounded by the solid lines SL1 to SL6, and the game status display 647 and the round display are shown. The position corresponding to 648 is partitioned and printed in a state surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 in which the game status display 647 and the round display 648 are visible.

In this way, the function display sticker 649 is grouped into the functions of the segment displays SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, etc., which are collectively mounted on the function display substrate 640a shown in FIG. 87, such as groups Grp1 to Grp3. The contents are printed and partitioned. Moreover, a star mark is printed on the normal pattern display device 645 and the like, and even if the contents displayed by the segment display devices SEG1, SEG2, and LED1 to LED12 are collectively printed on the function display sticker 649, the meanings thereof are displayed. It is easy to understand.

The correspondence between such a function and the printed content is printed on the function display sticker 649 as a sticker management number 649a as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, this seal management number 649a is printed at a position that is difficult to see from the game window 101 through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. It is designed not to give unnecessary information to the player. Further, as shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the recess 601f provided in the function display sticker sticking portion 601e is also formed at a position that is difficult to see through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the recess 601f.

Further, the sticker management number 649a is for preventing the worker of the maker who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 from mistakenly installing the function indicating seal of another specification when assembling the pachinko machine 1. Further, the sticker management number 649a is also used for inventory management of the function display sticker 649, and modes such as group Grp1 to group Grp3 are managed by being linked to the sticker management number 649a. Accordingly, when the sticker management number 649a is checked, the stock of the function display sticker 649 corresponding to the sticker management number 649a can be known.

Here, in recent years, as the life cycle of the pachinko machine is shortened, the development period of the pachinko machine is shortened. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, a two-round display lamp and a fifteen-round display lamp that light up and notify that the number of times (rounds) the special winning opening 2003 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two times and fifteen times. In addition to this, when adding a 5 round display lamp or 8 round display lamp that lights up and notifies that the number of rounds is 5 or 8 times, it depends on the case where the number of starting ports is reduced from 2 to 1. The specification change of the pachinko machine 1 can be dealt with by using the common function display substrate 640a. Since the contents printed on the function display sticker are also changed in accordance with the specification change of such a pachinko machine 1, the functions of the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 described above, and the contents printed on the function display sticker, The correspondence relation of is printed on the function display sticker as a sticker management number. Thereby, for example, in the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1, before the line operator attaches the function display sticker 649 to the game board 4, it is determined whether or not the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 and the function display sticker 649 correspond to each other. This can be confirmed by visually checking the sticker management number 649a, and it is possible to prevent the function display sticker 649 that does not correspond to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 from being attached. Note that the function display seal 649 is a seal, and there is no work step of applying an adhesive or the like to the back surface of the function display seal 649, which contributes to improvement in productivity.

[1-3B. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95. FIG. 90 is a perspective view (A) of the entire hitting ball launching device 650, a perspective view (B) with the launch motor portion removed, and FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the hitting ball launching device 650. FIG. 9A is a front view (A) showing the relationship between the ball launching device 650 and the launch rail 515, and a perspective view (B) of the launch motor portion. FIG. 93 is a ball launching state in which the operation handle 410 is not operated. FIG. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the launch rail 515, and FIG. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball striking device 650 and the launch rail 515 when the operation handle portion 410 is being operated. Reference numeral 95 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C) viewed from the front, and a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the front view (B) of the slide member 710 provided in the hitting ball launching device 650. Is.

The hitting ball launching device 650 pivotally supports a hitting mallet 687 on the launching base frame 651, attaches a launching motor 695 for reciprocating the hitting mallet 687 to the launching base frame 651, and further hits the hitting mallet 687. A slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 for adjusting the urging force of the urging spring 684 for applying the urging force for returning to the are provided on the firing base frame 651.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91, the firing base frame 651 is formed by a synthetic resin into a horizontally long rectangular shape, and a bearing 689 of the ball striking hammer 687 is fitted in the substantially center thereof. A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653, 654 for restricting the origin of firing of the ball striking mallet 687 are attached and fixed to the upper portion and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the ball striking mallet 687 when the ball striking mallet 687 returns to the firing origin position by the urging force of the urging spring 684. Further, a slide guide hole 655 having a horizontally long narrow groove is formed above the firing base frame 651 (on the side opposite to the portion corresponding to the lower portion of the firing rail 515), and the slide member storage space is provided below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed.

The slide guide hole 655 is for guiding a slide movement of the slide rod 677 by inserting a guide locking piece 678 projecting on a rear end upper part of a slide rod 677, which will be described later. The slide member 710 is stored so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is guided by a guide bush 681 which is fixed to a guide hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 by a set screw 682 and which is fixed to a stop hole 662 formed in the firing base frame 651. It is performed by penetrating. Further, as shown in FIG. 92, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656.

Further, an eaves portion is formed at the front part of the upper side of the firing base frame 651 with respect to the main body of the firing base frame 651, and an opening 657 for an operating piece is formed in the eaves portion above the bearing cylinder 652. There is. In the operation piece opening 657, a weight 173 of a ball feeding member 172 (see FIG. 18) provided facing the hitting ball supply port 171b (see FIG. 18) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. The operating piece 658 that comes into contact with is attached to a mounting portion 660 projecting from the rear upper part of the opening edge of the operating piece opening 657 so as to be swingable by a stop pin 659. The operating piece 658 is formed in a "te" shape, the rear end of the upper side of which is pivotally supported by a stop pin 659, and a base plate which rotates integrally with the ball striking hammer 687 from the pivotal support portion to a circular arc portion below. The ball feed member 172 abuts on the operating piece abutting portion 693 projecting on the 690, and the upper side portion swings the ball feeding member 172 in conjunction with the reciprocating movement of the ball hammer 687. The hit balls flowing out from 171b are supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 515 one by one.

Further, on the firing base frame 651, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing the motor cover 694 having the firing motor 695 built therein are projectingly provided at two locations on the lower rear portion and one location on the upper front portion, for a total of three locations. At the same time, a swing piece boss 663 into which the shaft hole 673 at the lower end of the swing piece 672 connected to the slide member 710 for inserting the slide rod 677 into the lower portion of the slide member storage space 656 is inserted is provided. ing.

A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so as to be substantially in close contact with the ball-striking launcher 650 so as to increase its rigidity. Therefore, the metal plate 665 has through holes 666, 667, 668, 669 corresponding to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the swing piece boss 663, respectively. 671 is formed, and a horizontally elongated elliptical through hole 670 through which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is also penetrated. In the metal plate 665 configured as described above, after the slide member 710 is stored in the slide member storage space 656, the respective through holes 666 to 671 have the corresponding members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712, 663. The firing base frame 651 is fixed to the firing base frame 651 by tightly adhering to the firing base frame 651 so as to be penetrated or aligned with each other and fixed with screws.

The tip of the rocking piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 671, but the shaft hole 673 of the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the head portion. A swinging piece 672 is swingably supported around the lower end. As shown in FIG. 91, the oscillating piece 672 is formed in a vertically long rod shape, has a shaft hole 673 formed at the lower end thereof, and has a vertically elongated hole shape into which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted. Connection hole 674 is formed. The front surface above the connecting hole 674 serves as a contact portion 675 that contacts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Then, the swinging piece 672 is inserted into the swinging piece boss 663, and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin with washer 676. The swinging piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The attached swinging piece 672 swings with its upper portion around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

A horizontally long rod-shaped slide rod 677 is attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 665 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 projecting from the upper rear portion of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665 so as to engage with the guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677. The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is penetrated to fix the set screw 682 in the set hole 662. The slide rod 677 is slidably attached to the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide elongated hole 680 and the guide bush 681 described above. Further, the slide rod 677 is formed with an abutted portion 679 that comes into contact with the abutting portion 675 of the swinging piece 672 at one end (rear end) thereof, and one end of the biasing spring 684 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 683 for locking the locking wheel 685 is provided in a protruding manner.

The bearing cylinder 652 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached projects from the through hole 666, and the bearing 689 of the hammer 687 is fitted in the bearing cylinder 652 so as not to fall out. The lower end of the hammer 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689, and at the same time, the base plate 690 is fixed. The base plate 690 is provided with an operating piece contact portion 693 that abuts the operating piece 658 on the front rear surface side thereof, and a spring for locking the locking ring 686 at the other end of the biasing spring 684 on the front front surface thereof. A locking portion 692 is provided so as to project, and further a motor contact projecting piece 691 that engages with and disengages from a motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is provided at the front surface of the rear portion thereof. A hammer tip 688 made of synthetic resin is fixed to the upper end of the ball striking hammer 687, and the hammer tip 688 is formed by a lower end portion of the firing rail 515 and a firing position stopper 702 fixed above the firing position. Is approaching.

On the other hand, the launch motor 695 housed in the motor cover 694 is attached to the above-described motor attachment boss 661 of the launch base frame 651. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the motor cover 694 has a cylindrical portion formed therein so as to house the firing motor 695 and a motor mounting boss 661 that is enlarged in front of the cylindrical portion. And a mounting portion in which a mounting fixing hole 699 for mounting is formed integrally with each other, and a reverse rotation preventing cam 698 and a motor cam 697 are provided at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 housed inside the cylindrical portion. Is fixed.

A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer circumference of the reverse rotation prevention cam 698, and the reverse rotation prevention cam 698 is engaged with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 93) that is swingably fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701, and the firing motor. The reverse rotation of 695 is prevented. This is to prevent the motor cam 697 from rotating in the opposite direction and the motor cam 697 and the motor abutting protrusion 691 from meshing with each other, thereby preventing the failure of the ball striking device 650 from being driven. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a jewel shape, and reciprocates the hitting hammer 687 while engaging with and disengaging from the motor abutting projection 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 90(A), the main structure of the ball striking device 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 95, the slide member 710 housed in the above-mentioned slide member housing space 656 and slid is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with an open rear, and an elliptical elliptical convex portion 711 is projected on the front surface thereof. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 712 is protruded at a rear position of the elliptical convex portion 711. In addition, sliding contact projections 713 having an arcuate cross-section are provided at both ends of the upper surface and the lower surface so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 656. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 provided on the lower back surface of the door frame 5 is inserted.

The insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the front side of the side wall in the sliding direction, and is provided slightly inward of the first inclined surface 715 toward the inside from the inside of the upper and lower surfaces. A sandwiching piece 716 is formed which has a predetermined distance between the tips of the sandwiching pieces. A second inclined surface 717 is formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 so as to incline in a V shape when viewed from the side toward the inside. Then, in the state in which the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 95(B), one end of the slide protrusion 183 on the side of the inclined side 183a abuts the side wall in the front in the sliding direction. It is in a state of being inserted between the upper and lower holding pieces 716. Although a space 718 is formed on the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, the space 718 does not have any particular function.

Thus, the slide member 710 configured as described above is an ellipse formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG. The insertion space 714 is formed to face the shaped connection opening 664, and the slide member 710 is in contact with one space inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in the left space inner wall in FIG. 92A). Although it is illustrated as abutting, it is in a state of abutting on the inner wall of the right space in a normal state.).

Therefore, first, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the biasing spring 684 of the slide member 710 and the hitting ball launching device 650 will be described. The slide member 710 has an initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (the right side in FIG. 92(A)). 93, the swinging piece 672 connected to the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. Therefore, the slide rod 677 that is in contact with the swinging piece 672 is also urged in one direction (leftward in FIG. 93) by the urging force of the urging spring 684 to be in contact with the contact portion 675 of the swinging piece 672. The contacted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 is in contact with the contact portion 679. In this state, since the urging spring 684 is not tensioned, even if the hitting mallet 687 reciprocally rotates following the rotation of the firing motor 695, the returning force of the hitting mallet 687 is weak and the hitting ball at the launch position is hit. Even if it is issued, it does not reach the game area 605 of the game board 4.

On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (when it moves toward the inner wall of the left space in FIG. 92A), as shown in FIG. 94, Since the swinging piece 672 swings and tilts around the shaft hole 673 at the lower end, the slide rod 677 moves in the other direction (to the right in FIG. 94) due to the contact between the contact portion 675 and the contacted portion 679. Slide towards. Then, the urging spring 684 that is locked by the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the urging spring 684 is tensioned, the returning force of the hitting mallet 687 when the hitting mallet 687 reciprocally rotates following the rotation of the firing motor 695 becomes strong, and the hitting ball at the launch position is hit. It is strongly ejected and reaches the game area 605 of the game board 4. The strength of the resilience of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the sliding amount of the slide member 710 in the slide member storage space 656.

As described above, by moving the slide member 710, the resilience of the ball striking device 650 can be adjusted. The slide unit 182 of the joint unit 180, which moves according to the turning operation of the moving operation member 414, is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 182. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like.

As described above, by rotating the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400, the beaded cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 also rotates, so the slide body of the joint unit 180 is rotated. 182 slides in one direction inside the joint unit mounting recess 110c. Therefore, the slide protrusion 183 provided on the front surface of the slide body 182 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projection 183 of the slide body 182 penetrates the connection opening 664 formed in the launcher mounting portion 520 of the main body frame 5 to insert the slide member 710. It is designed to be inserted into the space 714. The insertion state in this case is a state in which one end of the slide protrusion 183 on the side of the inclined side 183a is in contact with the side wall on the front side in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716 as described above. .. Therefore, when the slide protrusion 183 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, since the slide rod 677 also slides as the slide member 710 slides, the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, by rotating the rotating operation member 414 of the handle device 400, the resilience of the hit ball of the hit ball launching device 650 can be adjusted.

By the way, in the present embodiment, since the handle device 400 is provided on the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 is provided on the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the handle device 400 is opened and closed every time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 710 of the hitting ball launching device 650 cooperate with or separate from each other. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, and the handle device 400 is provided. The hitting ball launching device 650 cooperates, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 183 separates from the insertion space 714 and separates the handle device 400 and the hitting ball launching device 650. Therefore, the handle device 400 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can be linked/separated very easily with the opening/closing of the door frame 5. In particular, when the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, even if the position of the slide protrusion 183 is slightly displaced in the vertical direction, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 protruding in the insertion space 714. The surface 717 allows the slide protrusion 183 to be smoothly inserted into the holding position.

In some cases, the player may stuff the stuffing into the turning operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 and fix the stuffing at a position where the stuffing has been rotated to some extent. May open and close 5. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide protrusion 183 simply separates from the insertion space 714, but when closing the door frame 5, the position of the slide protrusion 183 is increased. Is slightly deviated in one direction, but the slidable side 183a of the slide protrusion 183 and the first slanted surface 715 of the slide member 710 cooperate with each other to cause the slide member to move as the door frame 5 closes. The slide protrusion 183 and the slide member 710 are finally engaged while moving the 710 in one direction. That is, in the present embodiment, the operation handle device 400 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can cooperate with each other regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410. Is.

[1-3C. Prize ball tank]
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper portion of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 70) formed in the upper portion of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Then, the prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a cutout portion 729 is formed in the front wall 721 thereof, and the bottom surface thereof is from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall 723. A storage portion 728 is formed by a first inclined bottom surface 726 that inclines toward and a second inclined bottom surface 727 that inclines from the front wall 721 toward the outlet 730 described below.

A discharge port 730 is formed at the lower end of the slope of the second sloped bottom face 727. The discharge port 730 projects outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, it is formed so as to be surrounded by the discharge port protruding wall 725 that connects the downstream side wall 723 and the rear surface wall 722 in a U-shape. Further, mounting flanges 733 that engage with the tank mounting grooves 550 are formed on both outer sides of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, and the main frame 3 is provided on the rear surface side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720. Mounting abutment pieces 731 and 732 that abut and abut on the four side wall 543 are provided in a protruding manner, and a ball for attaching a sphere leveling member 744 described below to the lower portion of the rear wall 722 on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 720. A leveling attachment shaft 735 is provided so as to project. Further, an overflow prevention member 734 for preventing sphere jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 excluding the discharge port 730.

In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting flange 733 is mounted so as to be inserted into the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 of the main body frame 3 are mounted. It abuts against the fourth side wall 543. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is placed and mounted on the upper portion on the back surface side of the main body frame 3, and in this mounted state, as shown in FIG. 74, the prize ball tank 720 is stored through the notch portion 729 of the front wall 721. The portion 728 and the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3 communicate with each other, and as shown in FIG. ing. Therefore, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) that stores balls is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. It is formed so as to be approximately the same as the width in the front-rear direction up to the fourth side wall 543, and is placed on the upper portions of those side walls 541 to 543.

Further, as described above, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are deeply formed so as to cover the rearward projecting space in the peripheral portion of the game board 4, so that the side wall 541 to 541 thereof. Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper part of the 543 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, even if the prize balls are stored and the weight increases, the prize ball tank 720. Since the whole is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the stored balls can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 730 without the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727 being deformed. Further, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, the flow of the balls stored in the storage portion 728 may flow outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. Is configured. For this reason, compared to a prize ball tank in which an opening is provided in a part of the inclined bottom surface as a discharge port as in the past, a ball collapsing protrusion for eliminating a ball clogging is formed to project in the storage part near the discharge port. It is possible to obtain a structure in which ball clogging does not easily occur.

Then, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the state in which the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side wall 541 to 543 that houses the rearward projecting portion of the gaming device, and the prize is given. Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 is provided so as to project to the outside of the rear wall 722 of the storage section, the tank rail member 740 is located outside the storage section of the prize ball tank 720 (when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). Side), the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction, and thus accommodate the rear protruding portion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the game board 4. The upper side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 can be made to project rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, whereby even if the rear projecting portion of the gaming device projects at the upper side portion of the game board 4. It can be easily stored inside the rear side walls 541 to 543.

Furthermore, regardless of whether or not the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that house the rearward projecting portion of the game device, the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720 is provided. Only by being provided at a position outside the rear wall 722, a unique effect that the conventional prize ball tank does not have can be obtained. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a plan view showing the pressure state of the balls at the discharge ports of the conventional prize ball tanks (A) and (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the figure, normally, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored and retained in the storage part of the prize ball tank 720. In this case, when the discharge port 730A is formed by opening a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage part as in the conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. In the prize ball tank in which the discharge port 730A is formed on the opposite side, or when the discharge port 730B is formed adjacent to the ball collapsing projection 736B as shown in FIG. 97B, the discharge port 730A , 730B, the ball pressure is always applied to the discharge ports 730A, 730B from four sides due to the pressure of the stored balls and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure.

As a result, even if the pressure of the balls happens to be balanced due to the degree of overlapping of the balls and the balls on the downstream side flow out, the ball catching state may occur at the discharge ports 730A and 730B, and the ball may be clogged. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to the present embodiment, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, as shown in FIG. 97(C), The pressure of the stored spheres at the discharge port 730 is a pressure from two directions only by the acting force from the storage portion toward the discharge port 730 and its reaction, and is not received from the four directions as in the conventional case. For this reason, even if the ball on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult for the ball to be caught in the discharge port 730, and it is possible to achieve an excellent effect that the ball is not clogged.

[1-3D. Tank rail member]
Next, the tank rail member 740 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 described above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. FIG. 98 is a perspective view showing the relationship among the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. , A prize ball tank 720, a tank rail member 740, a ball passage unit 770, a prize ball unit 800, and a full tank unit 900 are perspective views seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. It is sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740, and the upstream part of the ball passage unit 770.

As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 553, 554 (see FIG. 70) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking projections 749 that are inserted into the rail locking groove 553 from above on the left and right sides and the lower side of the side surface on the rear surface side, and the upper side of the rear surface side surface. At the center, a hook-shaped locking protrusion 750 that is locked to the rail locking groove 554 from above is provided in a protruding manner. Thus, the tank rail member 740 is formed in an inclined gutter shape with an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end thereof forms a ball passage unit 770, which will be described in detail later. Facing. Further, inside the tank rail member 740, as shown in FIG. 4, a partition wall 741 forms a passage 742 in which the balls are aligned in two rows and flow down.

It should be noted that the bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a thin groove so that foreign matter that rolls along with the ball in the passage 742 will fall downward from the narrow groove. Further, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of this metal plate is connected to the above-mentioned ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 68). ing. Therefore, the static electricity charged on the sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded to the outside from the metal plate through the ground wire connector 557 and the ground connector of the power supply board 1136.

Further, an egg-shaped sphere leveling member 744 having a weight is provided swingably on the slightly downstream side of the middle stream region of the tank rail member 740. The ball leveling member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball leveling attachment shaft 735 of the prize ball tank 720 described above so as to be swingable, and moves toward the inside of each of the two rows 742 of the tank rail member 740. When the spheres that have drooped down and flow down through the passages 742 flow down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction, they are rectified to form one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 downstream of the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is covered with a ball pressing plate 745. The ball pressing plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball which is not in one step by the ball leveling member 744 is forced to be in one step.

Further, at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740, a pair of alignment gears 747 facing the respective passages 742 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery thereof, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 such that the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 747 are shifted by half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the sphere that has flowed down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 flows downward toward the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the balls of the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 100, the spheres flowing through the passages 742 are guided toward the center along the inclined surfaces 743 formed at the lower portions of the passages 742 in two rows while meshing with the alignment gears 747. During the guidance, balls from the two rows of passages 742 are alternately dropped into one row at the upper end inlet 773 of the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described below. The top surface of the alignment gear 747 is covered with a circular arc gear cover 746.

[1-3E. Ball passage unit]
Next, the ball passage unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a row to the prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. 101 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 102 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. 103 is a perspective view of the ball passage unit 770 seen from the back side, FIG. 104 is a front view of the ball passage unit 770, and FIG. 105 is a connection structure of the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. It is a side view for explaining. 102 and 103, the prize ball unit 800 portion is a ball passage portion formed on the unit base body 801 in which the gear cover 866, the aluminum heat radiating plate 841, and the unit sub-plate 825 are removed, and is drawn in an easy-to-understand manner. is there. However, the gears and the like are shown by alternate long and short dash lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

In the ball passage unit 770 of this example, a ball drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 that are bent on the back surface (the surface seen from the back surface) of a substantially rectangular plate material. As shown in FIG. 100(A), the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front-rear bending passage portion 772a whose upstream bends in the front-rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back) and the left-right bending passage portion 772a. The left/right bent passage portion 772b bends in the direction (left-right direction when viewed from the back), and the vertical passage portion 772c communicates with the left/right bent passage portion 772b and has a substantially vertical shape.

As shown in FIG. 100(A), since the position of the upper end inlet 773 that drops from the tank rail member 740 is approximately the center of the two rows of passages 742 as described above, Since the upper rear wall 545 and the pivotally supporting rear wall 546 of the frame 3 are located away from the front surface to the rear side, the prize ball guide protrusions projecting from the front and rear bending passage portion 772a and the pivotally supporting rear wall 546. 561 bends the ball drop passage 772 in the front-rear direction so that the ball fall passage 772 is located near the surface of the rear wall 546 on the shaft support side. Further, as shown in FIG. 104, the left and right bent passage portions 772b are formed in a substantially U-shape so as to fill the width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to reduce the momentum of the balls that have fallen from the tank rail member 740 along the front and rear bent passage portions 772a. It is formed by bending.

Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is also formed in a substantially vertical shape, it is formed to be slightly gently curved, and a cutout portion 775 is formed in one of the bent passage wall 771 that constitutes the vertical passage portion 772c. An out-of-ball detection piece 776, the upper end of which is pivotally supported by a support shaft 777, is swingably attached to 775. A ball cut switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball cut detection piece 776, and an actuator 779 of the ball cut switch 778 is in contact with the ball cut detection piece 776. The out-of-ball detection piece 776 and the out-of-ball switch 778 constitute an out-of-ball detection mechanism that detects out-of-ball in the vertical passage portion 772c.

Then, when a sphere exists in the vertical passage portion 772c, the sphere-existing detection piece 776 is pressed by the sphere present in the vertical passage portion 772c to push the actuator 779 to turn on the sphere-break switch 778. When the ball is no longer present in the portion 772c due to a ball clogging or a ball deficiency, the ball breakage detection piece 776 swings toward the inside of the vertical passage portion 772c, so that the actuator 779 turns off the ball break switch 778. When the out-of-ball switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, is stopped and the payout of prize balls is stopped.

A stopper projection 780 is formed at the lower end of the cutout portion 775 in order to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detecting piece 776 to the side opposite to the passage portion, and the ball of the ball passage unit 770 is formed. A ball clogging insertion groove 781 is formed in the vertical passage portion 772c corresponding to the breakage detection piece 776. The ball clogging insertion groove 781 is clogged at the ball breakage detection piece 776 by inserting a pin from the rear surface side of the ball passage unit 770 when it is difficult to swing the ball breakage detection piece 776 due to a ball jam or the like. It is provided in order to eliminate the above. Further, the other bent passage wall 771 facing the out-of-bulb detection piece 776 is formed to be slightly bulged toward the out-of-sphere detection piece 776 side. This is for surely pressing the ball break detection piece 776 to turn on the ball break switch 778 when the ball exists in the vertical passage portion 772c.

Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 at a position avoiding the above-mentioned ball drop passage 772. The positioning boss 783 is to be engaged with a positioning pin 574 formed on the shaft support side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is similarly formed on the shaft support side rear surface wall 546. It corresponds to the mounting boss 562. Then, in order to mount the ball passage unit 770 on the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, while the positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574, the passage unit mounting boss 562 and the stop hole 782 are aligned with each other. This can be done by screwing a screw 784 into the fixing hole 782 in this state. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engagement groove 785 which engages with an engagement piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side thereof, and has a lower portion for connecting with the prize ball unit 800. A connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

As shown in FIG. 103, the connecting lid member 786 is formed by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in an arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate material, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770. Support projection pieces 787 serving as shaft support portions projecting from both left and right ends of the shaft are fitted with projection shafts 789 serving as rotary shaft portions projecting from the ends of support pieces 788 extending from both end portions of the coupling lid member 786. As a result, it is rotatably supported. Further, the connecting lid member 786 is extended below the ball passage unit 770 when closed, and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball falling passage 772 are in communication with each other (see FIG. 105(B)). (State shown) and a state in which the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball dropping passage 772 do not communicate with each other by opening (state shown in FIG. 105(A)). A guide protrusion 791 for guiding the support piece 788 of the connecting lid member 786 is provided at the lower end of the rear surface of the ball passage unit 770 when the open state is changed to the closed state.

Thus, in a state where the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the shaft support side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted to the shaft support side rear surface wall 546 as described later (FIG. 105). In the state shown in (A), the connection lid member 786 is closed and the rear surface is locked by the locking elastic claws 820 provided on the prize ball unit 800, so that the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball. By connecting the curved passage 803 of the unit 800 with the passage wall 790, a ball falling in the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bending passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800. The reason why the rotatable passage cover member 786 is provided on the ball passage unit 770 is that the prize ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 and that the attachable/detachable portion can be attached. This is because the space formed between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 due to the attachment to the ball does not hinder the smooth fall of the ball.

In addition, between the pair of curved passage walls 771 provided in the spherical passage unit 770, the rear end wall 546 of the body frame 3 is protruded so that the protruding height thereof gradually decreases toward the downstream side. By inserting the prize ball guide protrusion 561 that is located in the upper part of the ball drop passage 772, the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is located substantially in the lower center of the center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front-back bending passage portion 772a that bends in the front-back direction when viewed from the front. As a result, in the configuration in which the pair of aligned gears 747 alternately sends out the balls flowing down in two rows to the prize ball unit 800 side one by one, the balls are smoothly sent to the prize ball unit 800 one by one through the ball drop passage 772. You can Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, it is possible to reduce the number of components that form the ball drop passage 772 and to attach the ball drop passage 772. Workability can be improved.

Further, the ball that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 through the front-rear bent passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left-right bent passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the prize ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. .. Further, the vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed with the momentum weakened is provided with a ball break detection mechanism (ball break detection piece 776 and ball break switch 778) for detecting a ball break. As a result, it is possible to reliably detect that the ball has run out in the ball drop passage 772, in other words, that the ball to be supplied to the prize ball unit 800 has run out (ball out).

[1-3F. Prize Ball Unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 800 arranged on the downstream side of the above-mentioned ball passage unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit 800 as seen from the back side, and FIG. 107 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member, and FIG. 109 is a rear view for explaining a passage and a driving relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 109 is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 108.

In FIG. 106, the prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 in which a bent passage 803, a prize ball passage 810, and a ball removal passage 811 that form a ball passage by a pair of bent passage walls 802 are formed, and a unit base body 801. The unit sub plate 825 covering the rear surface of the unit sub plate 825, the award ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached to the upper surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub plate 825, and the substantially central surface area (rear surface side area) of the unit sub plate 825 are provided. Gear groups 843, 844, 847 and a gear cover 866 that covers the detection disk 850 (rotation transmitting member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-shaped unit sub-plate 825 side. A curved passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 is provided with a space slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 801 to the approximate middle of the downstream side, but it is largely divided into left and right from the middle to the middle. From the to the downstream end, the unit base body 801 also serves as both side walls. Further, a portion where the curved passage wall 802 in the middle is largely divided into left and right constitutes a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 as a ball feeding rotating body is arranged, and from the lower part of the distribution space 805, a unit base body 801 is formed. A passage partition wall 809 is projectingly formed so as to form a pair of left and right bent passage walls 802 up to the downstream end thereof.

In other words, the left and right bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition walls 809 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right of the distribution space 805, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage constitutes a ball passage passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into the right and left, and a motor housing space 814 for housing the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. That is, the payout motor 815 is stored in the motor storage space 814 formed at a position avoiding the ball passage (the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, the ball passage 811) and within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. Fixed. The curved passage 803 is formed in a meandering shape to weaken the pressure of the ball retained in the passage 803 on the sprocket 807 and reaches the distribution space 805. An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface. The opening 804 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 803, and the dust or the like that has accumulated when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3 can be taken out.

Further, in the distribution space 805 described above, a sprocket 807 as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the case shown) recesses in which balls fit on the outer periphery is rotatably arranged. A bearing cylinder 806 that supports the other end of the rotary shaft 808 to which 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. In addition, the upper end of the passage partition wall 809 that forms the bottom of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side thereof. The counting switch 812 is detachably attached.

This counting switch 812 is composed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole through which a sphere passes at the tip, and a switch fitting recess 865 that matches the shape of its rear end is formed in the bent passage wall 802. By doing so, it can be easily and detachably attached. The wiring (not shown) from the counting switch 812 is connected to a relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit, which will be described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 that constitutes the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed on a passage cover plate portion 859 integrally formed with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813 are formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 that engages with one locking portion 860 at the lower end of the passage cover plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

A circular motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball passage passage 811. The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 815 is housed inside. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed to the rear surface side of the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841 mounted below the unit sub plate 825 with a screw 817 by a pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof. Then, with the payout motor 815 attached to the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841 of the unit sub-plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 penetrates through the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841 and The gear 843 is fixed.

In addition, by covering the rear surface side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841, a space in the depth width direction in which the above-described bent passage 803, prize ball passage 810, and ball removal passage 811 are formed. The cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is also accommodated in the inside. Further, since the motor housing space 814 housing the payout motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 is arranged are formed in an extremely close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the vertical direction of the unit base body 801 is increased. The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide protrusion 819 at the lower end of the above-mentioned ball removal passage 811, which guides the removed ball to the back surface side of the prize ball unit 800. The guided balls are guided to a ball-removing connection passage 880, which will be described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (collection gutter provided below the island stand). In addition, a locking elastic claw 820 that locks the connecting lid member 786 of the ball passage unit 770 described above is projected on the upper part of the unit base body 801, and the prize ball unit 800 is attached to the shaft support side of the main body frame 3. A button insertion engagement hole 821 and a hook-shaped engagement portion 824 for detachable attachment to the rear surface wall 546, and an attachment boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 with the gear cover 866 held therebetween. Is provided.

A rod-shaped attachment/detachment button 822, which is provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 801, is slidably attached in the depth width direction in the button insertion engagement hole 821, and its front end is, as will be described later. Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 on the shaft support side. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 is concave so that the tip of the locking elastic claw 564 can be inserted therein. Further, the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with the engaging protrusion 565 formed on the shaft supporting side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft supporting side rear surface wall 546. The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565 are engaged with each other by pushing the hook downward. In the engaged state, the locking elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engaging hole 821 engage with each other, so that the prize ball unit 800 cannot move upward.

The hook-shaped engaging portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right sides of the unit base body 801. Further, a mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 while sandwiching the unit sub plate 825 is provided with a through hole formed so as to project long toward the rear side and to be drilled in the unit sub plate 825. After passing through 858, corresponding to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866, by screwing a screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are connected while the unit sub plate 825 is sandwiched. is doing.

The structure of the unit sub plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 will be described. The unit sub plate 825 is a composite that covers the bent passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. The discharge motor 815 is attached to a resin plate material, and an aluminum heat dissipation plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball removal passage 811 is attached. Then, on the front side (rear surface side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub plate 825, a relay board region 826 for mounting the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit is formed on the upper part, and a plurality of gears 843, 843 are formed below it. A gear area 840 to which the 844 and 847 and the detection disk 850 are attached is formed.

The relay board region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for mounting the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit are provided in a protruding manner along the square shape. An engaging groove portion 828 that engages with the engaging protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with the locking protrusion 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. There is. Further, in the relay board area 826, a button insertion hole 834 through which the attachment/detachment button 822 is inserted and a mounting boss portion 832 for fixing the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit with screws (not shown) are formed. ..

The relay terminal plate 830 inside the prize ball unit attached to the above-mentioned relay substrate area 826 is described later with the wiring from the above-described counting switch 812, the payout motor 815, and the rotation angle switch 855 described later provided in the prize ball unit 800. This relays the wiring from the payout control board 1186 (see FIGS. 71 and 126), and a plurality of connectors are provided for that purpose, and the button insertion hole 833 and the attachment boss portion 832 through which the attachment/detachment button 822 is inserted. Corresponding mounting holes 831 are drilled. Then, with the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit mounted on the mounting rib 827 of the relay substrate area 826, the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned and fixed by a screw (not shown). The in-ball unit relay terminal plate 830 can be attached to the surface (rear surface) of the unit sub plate 825.

In addition, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 mounted as described above is covered by the substrate cover 835. The board cover 835 is formed in a box shape with a substantially square front surface open, and an engaging projection 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of the vertical side of one side thereof, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the substantially central side surface of the vertical side of the other side. ing. Further, a button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Then, the engaging protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is inserted into the engaging groove portion 828 of the relay substrate region 826 to be engaged with each other, and then the engaging protrusion 837 and the engaging claw portion 829 are engaged with each other. The relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit can be covered with the substrate cover 835. On the contrary, when detaching, the engaging claw 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the engaging protrusion 837, and the substrate cover 835 is pulled obliquely toward the front side to engage the engaging protrusion 836 and the engaging groove 828. The engagement with can be released. It should be noted that when the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the attachment/detachment button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 is inserted through the button insertion holes 833, 834 and slightly exposed to the outside from the button opening 838. There is. In addition, the wiring connected to the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit is drawn out from the connection opening 839.

Next, the gears 843, 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 provided in the gear area 840 formed on the unit sub plate 825 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 penetrates the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and projects to the surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub plate 825. The first gear 843 (driving gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 843, a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the first gear 843 has one end press-fitted into the back surface (front surface side) of the gear cover 866 and is bored in the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841. A third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on a shaft 845 whose other end is supported by the hole 846, and is above the second gear 844 on the unit sub-plate 825. It is rotatably provided on a shaft 848 that is press-fitted into the formed shaft hole 849. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear) that meshes with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotary shaft 808 that supports a sprocket 807.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 109, the front end portion of the motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. Further, one end of the rotary shaft 808 is press-fitted and supported by a bearing cylinder 806 formed in the unit base body 801, and the other end is supported by a bearing hole formed in the gear cover 866. 840 through a shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center to rotatably support a sprocket 807 in a distribution space 805, and a detection disk 850 in a space formed by a unit sub plate 825 and a gear cover 866. Is rotatably supported. However, as shown in FIG. 109, since the rear end of the sprocket 807 is in engagement with the center front surface of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 are integrated around the rotation shaft 808. It is designed to rotate. Therefore, when the payout motor 815 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850.

The outer circumference of the detection disk 850 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion projecting to the outside of the gear portion 852 has the same number as the concave portion of the sprocket 807 (in the case of the drawing). 3) detection notches 851 are formed therein. The detection notch 851 is detected by a light emitting and receiving type rotation angle switch 855 (rotational position detecting means) provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub plate 825. Is. The rotation angle switch 855 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 detected within a predetermined interval time during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 855 (in many cases, the sprocket 807 is in a ball biting state), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, a ball biting state). To do. The number of balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 and used for counting. Note that, as shown in FIG. 109, the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched by the substrate mounting portion formed on the gear cover 866.

As described above, among the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 that is press-fitted to the gear cover 866 side, and the gear cover 866 that covers the gear region 840 is provided. A mounting hole 867 is formed at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 projecting from the unit base body 801 and penetrating the through hole 858 of the unit sub plate 825. Then, while fitting the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side and the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub-plate 825 side, the mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are aligned. The unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed to each other with the unit sub plate 825 being sandwiched by being screwed from the rear surface of the gear cover 866 with the screw 868 in this state. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, wiring connected to the relay terminal board 830 in the prize ball unit (for example, wiring connecting the relay terminal board 830 in the prize ball unit and a payout control board 1186 described later) is provided. A wiring processing piece 869 is provided so as to be hooked and put together.

The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. FIG. 109 shows a state in which the unit base body 801, the unit sub plate 825, the prize ball unit internal relay terminal plate 830, the substrate cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled. As shown in the drawing, the cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is housed in a position below the bent passage 803 through which the ball to be paid out is guided. Further, in the unit base body 801, the sprocket 807 arranged in the ball passage (the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, the ball passage 811) and the depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. And a payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed inside the unit subplate 825. The unit sub-plate 825 rotates the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-closed surface side of the sprocket 807. A rotation transmission member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844 and 847, and a gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that transmits to the shaft 808 is provided, and moreover, in the distribution space 805 of the payout motor 815 and the bending passage 803. A sprocket 807 as a payout member to be arranged is connected to be rotationally driven by a plurality of gears 843, 844, 847, 850 (852) provided in a gear region 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 825. .. That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are housed within the depth width of the ball passage (the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, the ball passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. Moreover, the rotation transmission member (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844 and 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that connects the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are attached to the non-closed surface side of the unit sub plate 825. Since it is provided along the predetermined width, the prize ball unit 800 can be made thinner than that in which a payout motor or a part of the sprocket is arranged outside the ball passage.

In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 is further thinned because the ball passages (the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, the ball removal passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 are formed in a single passage shape. Is being promoted. That is, unlike the conventional one in which the payout motor 815 is projected to the front surface side or the rear surface side or the lateral side of the prize ball unit, when it is attached to the rear surface side of the shaft support side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3, It is possible to adopt a structure in which none of the prize ball unit 800 further projects rearward. Note that, in FIG. 109, the front end portion of the dispensing motor 815 is configured to slightly project from the rear surface of the unit base body 801, and this projecting portion is, as shown in FIG. 71, the rear surface wall 546 of the shaft support side. Since it is adapted to face the front portion of the main body frame 3 from the lower ejection motor escape opening 572, as a result, it is projected to a size obtained by subtracting the plate thickness of the shaft support side rear surface wall 546 from the projected size thereof. Therefore, the amount of protrusion toward the front of the rear wall 546 on the shaft support side is small. Further, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game board 4 is provided between the shaft support side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. A storage space for storing the rearward protruding portion of the game device can be made large in the depth width direction.

Further, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 on the pivotal support side, as shown in FIG. , The lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked in the locking groove 573, and the prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565. It is pushed downward while being in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged with each other and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565 are engaged with each other, the mounting itself is completed. Since the above engagement states are easily released by moving the prize ball unit 800 upward, in order to prevent this, the locking elastic claw 564 engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821. It is supposed to do.

That is, the locking elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged with each other, thereby preventing the prize ball unit 800 from moving upward in the attached state. As described above, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball passage unit 770 is rotated and locked by the locking elastic claw 820 as described above, so that the ball passage unit 770 falls. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 can be connected to each other via a passage formed by a pair of passage walls 790. Further, when the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is connected to the prize ball inlet 927 of the full tank unit 900 described later, and the downstream end of the ball removal passage 811 is the ball removal connection passage. It is connected to the upstream end of 880.

On the other hand, when removing the prize ball unit 800, the engagement by the locking elastic claw 820 is released to rotate the connecting lid member 786 to the front side, and then the attachment/detachment button 822 is pressed to open the locking elastic claw 564. By moving the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 to the front side to release the engagement, the prize ball unit 800 is pulled upward while the attachment/detachment button 822 is pressed. Of the prize ball unit 800 by pulling out the prize ball unit 800 toward the front side by releasing the engagement between the lower end portion and the locking groove 573 and the engagement between the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565. Can be easily removed.

[1-3G. Full tank unit]
Next, the full tank unit 900 arranged on the downstream side of the prize ball unit 800 described above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 to 116. 110 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 112 is seen from the front of the full tank unit 900. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back surface of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 114 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul mouth 610. FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view taken along the bottom swing plate 907 provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610.

The full tank unit 900 is placed and fixed on the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3 as described above, and as shown in FIG. 901 and a lid 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. In the box main body 901, the sphere that has flowed in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and is discharged from the outlet 921. Therefore, a side guide passage 902 is formed in the upstream portion of the cover 926 to guide the sphere that has flown in from the prize ball inlet 927 to one side from one end to the other end. A side guide passage 902 is provided with a side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side at one end immediately below the prize ball entrance 927. A buffer member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 902 to receive the impact of the ball flowing through the lateral guide passage 902 and guide the ball to the downstream side.

Further, the sphere colliding with the cushioning member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is guided so as to flow in the direction opposite to the flow of the sphere in the side guide passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. A reverse side guide passage 905 is formed. The sphere that has flowed through the opposite side guide passage 905 is then guided to the front guide passage 920 formed toward the front, and from the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920, the prize of the dish unit 300 described above. It is guided to the ball communication gutter 343.

By the way, a bottom surface opening 906 is formed on the upstream side bottom surface of the opposite side guiding passage 905 so as to open over the entire area of the bottom surface. There is. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a concave shape of a substantially square shape having an open top surface, and a pair of shaft support projections 911 are projectingly provided on a side wall in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside thereof. Further, a circular spring mounting concave portion 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom swing plate 907 that closes the bottom opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and has a semicircular bearing that is axially supported by being fitted to the shaft support projection 911 on the downstream side of the back surface when viewed from the front. The portion 908 is formed so as to project.

Further, as shown in FIG. 115, a spring locking projection 910 for locking the upper end of the spring 913 is provided so as to project downward in the center of the back surface of the bottom swing plate 907. Therefore, the bottom swing plate 907 is always urged by the urging force of the spring 913 in the direction in which its upstream side is oscillated upward. The spring 913 prevents the bottom swing plate 907 from swinging downward even when the normal payout number of prize balls (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom swing plate 907 at a time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or larger than the payout number are formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that causes the balls to swing downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, a detection protrusion 909 is projected forward on the upstream side of the bottom swing plate 907. When the bearing portion 908 of the bottom swing plate 907 is fitted and supported by the shaft support projection 911, the detection protrusion 909 penetrates the communication hole 929 and is positioned in the switch storage space 914 described below. Has become.

Further, a switch housing space 914 for housing the full tank switch 916 is integrally formed outside the side wall at the upstream end of the reverse side guide passage 905. To mount the full switch 916 in the switch housing space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the upper wall of the switch housing space 914 and on the side wall of the upstream end of the reverse side guide passage 905. A mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 holding the full-filling switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 with a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch including a light emitter and a light receiver, and detects ON/OFF by the detection protrusion 909 swinging vertically between the light receiver and the light emitter.

Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed at one side on the downstream side of the reverse side guide passage 905. The foul ball passage 922 is formed by bending so that the foul ball inlet 923 on the upstream side thereof communicates with the aforementioned foul ball inlet 610 and the downstream side thereof communicates with the upstream side of the front guiding passage 920. Has been done. Therefore, the foul ball introduced into the foul ball 610 is guided from the foul ball entrance 923 through the bent foul ball path 922 to the forward guiding path 920, and further through the exit 921 and the prize ball communication trough 343 to form the dish unit. Returned to 300.

Further, on the box main body 901, engagement pieces 924 engaged with the unit engagement grooves 532 formed in the full tank unit mounting portion 531 are projected on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923. A hooking protrusion 925 that is provided and that engages with a hooking piece 928 formed on the lid body 926 is formed. The hooking protrusion 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right side walls of the box main body 901.

On the other hand, the lid body 926 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 902, the reverse side guide passage 905, the front guide passage 920, and the foul ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. At 902, a square prize ball entrance 927 is opened at a position corresponding to the upstream end. Further, around the lid 926, a hooking piece 928 for engaging with the hooking protrusion 925 of the box main body 901 is provided so as to protrude downward.

In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 110, the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800 flow from the prize ball inlet 927 to the upstream side of the side guide passage 902. After entering, it is guided toward the side by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The sphere colliding with the cushioning member 904 is guided to the front guide passage 920 while being guided to the downstream side in the opposite side guide passage 905 in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902, and is guided to the front guide passage 920. From the outlet 921, it is guided to the dish unit 300 through the prize ball connection gutter 343. Further, the foul ball entering from the foul ball entrance 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 to join the front guiding passage 920, and passes from the exit 921 of the front guiding passage 920 through the prize ball connecting trough 343. It is guided to the dish unit 300.

Then, normally, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the sphere moves from the side guide passage 902 to the opposite side guide passage 905, it falls on the bottom swing plate 907, Since the elastic force of the spring 913 is strong when the number of ordinary prize balls is about to be paid out, the bottom swing plate 907 does not swing, and as shown by the solid line in FIG. The full tank switch 916 enters between the light emitter and the light receiver, and the switch is in a non-conductive state (OFF). On the other hand, when prize balls are stored in the dish unit 300 and the full tank unit 900 is also filled with the balls, the bottom surface swing formed on the entire upstream side of the front guide passage 920 and the reverse side guide passage 905. The bottom swing plate 907 swings downward against the urging force of the spring 913 due to the pressure of the sphere stored on the moving plate 907, and the detection projection 909 is thrown as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. The light-receiving type full switch 916 is disconnected from between the light emitter and the light receiver, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotation driving of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of prize balls is being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls is obtained. Will be stopped after it is paid out).

As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is performed by the bottom swing plate 907 having a width substantially the same as the width of the passage bottom surface of the passage (the opposite side guide passage 905 in the figure) through which the balls flow down. 916 is operated, and is urged by the urging member (spring 913) so as to oscillate on the bottom oscillating plate 907 when a certain amount of sphere is placed without oscillating due to the normal flow of the sphere. Therefore, compared to the conventional method that detects a ball clogging by placing a ball on the bottom surface of some passages, etc., the situation that the placement of the ball in that part of the passage is not detected due to the ball clogging. It can be surely prevented. This means that the fullness of the sphere can be reliably detected.

Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, it is detachably attached to the full tank unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3, so that the full tank device is formed in the main body frame as in the conventional case. It is not necessary to form a passage for a full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the case where the passage is assembled inside the delivery passage. In addition, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 into a zigzag-shaped passage, it is possible to guide the balls to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The awarded prize ball does not jump out of the dish unit 300. Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 922 for guiding the foul ball joins the front guiding passage 920 for paying out the prize ball by weakening the momentum of the balls and joining. It is possible to join foul balls without obstructing the flow of the balls.

[1-4. Lock device]
Next, the locking device 1000 that is vertically mounted along the open-side back side edge of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 to 125. 117 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the lock device 1000 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 118 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing a structure for locking the lock device 1000 to the main body frame 3, and FIG. FIG. 120 is a partial cross-sectional view cut horizontally in a position slightly below the vertical center of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 120 shows a detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. 121 is an enlarged cross-sectional view, FIG. 121 is a side view (A) of the lock device 1000, a perspective view (B) seen from the front side, and FIG. 122 is a perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the lock device 1000. 123 is a perspective view (B), (C) of a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001 of the locking device 1000, and FIG. FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device 1000, FIG. 124 is a front view for explaining the operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and FIG. It is a front view for explaining the operation of 1023 and 1032.

The locking device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3 from substantially the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. A plurality of (3 in the illustrated case) lock locking holes 548 formed in the upper and lower end portions near the rising portion of the first side wall 540 and in the middle, and the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540. The U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 described below is supported by the lock mounting hole 547 formed by cutting out in the middle and the lock mounting hole 547 formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIGS. 121 to 123, a lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base body 1001 as a lock base body having a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base body 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are U-shaped so that the sliding cannot be performed illegally. The tamperproof members 1023 and 1032 are attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

The U-shaped base 1001 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and inside thereof, a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably provided. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is integrated into a base body having an L-shaped cross section. This is because the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction is made extremely large as described above, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is made large. Since the dimension between the outer periphery and the outer periphery is extremely small, the lateral dimension of the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment can be made small, and the lock device 1000 can be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. It is because it improved. The U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, so that when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame for the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 have a fraud prevention structure in which the U-shaped base body 1001 is completely covered except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065.

First, a rectangular hook through opening 1002 through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame penetrate is formed above and below the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped base body 1001, and at the closed side. There is a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 123) that is in close contact with the first side surface wall 540, and a screw stop portion 1003 is horizontally protruded in the upper part and in the middle thereof. Locking protrusions 1004 are projectingly formed on the upper and middle portions (see FIG. 123) and the lower ends of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b on the open side.

The screw stopper 1003 and the locking projection 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3, and the locking projection 1004 is inserted into the lock locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. (See FIG. 118). In this state, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 are aligned with each other. Therefore, by screwing a screw (not shown) into the aligned hole, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3. Can be fixed. The lock device 1000 is attached by a screw not only in the upper and middle screw stoppers 1003, but also in the vicinity of the screw stopper 1003 and the cylinder lock through hole 526 formed on a lock mounting piece 1008 described later. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be mounted by fixing it with a screw (not shown) in correspondence with the lock mounting hole 547.

In addition, upon attachment thereof, locking projections 1004 formed at three positions on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 for positioning and locking, and the U-shaped. The screw fastening portions 1003 formed at two positions on the closed side (rear portion) of the base body 1001 and the screw fastening portions 1003 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are provided in the lock mounting holes 547. Since the structure is fixed with screws, the front part of the lock device 1000 is locked with the locking projection 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear part of the lock device 1000 is fixed with the screw fixing part 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. Moreover, since the lower portion of the lock device 1000 is fixed to the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into the U-shaped base body 1001 having an extremely thin width, the lock device 1000 is locked and fixed at the front part and the rear part of the lock device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 forming the locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) at the front portion is formed on the side surface 1001a of the U-shaped base body 1001 which is not in close contact with the first side wall 540. On the other hand, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side surface wall 540 of the U-shaped base 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as to prevent rattling, as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front part is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540. is there.

In addition, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and crimping it in the housed state, the sliding lever 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be slidably mounted inside the U-shaped base 1001. it can. That is, rivet elongated holes 1042 formed at three positions above and below the door frame sliding rod 1040, and one each on the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are formed. By allowing the rivet 1006 to pass through the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be moved upward and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 122(B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower ends of the rivet elongated holes 1055, 1061 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and as shown in FIG. 122(C), for the door frame. The rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper end of the rivet elongated hole 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

Further, in the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001, a fraud prevention notch portion 1007 is formed on the closed side surface thereof, and on the front end portion of the side surface 1001b which is in close contact with the first side surface wall 540 of the main body frame 3 on the open side thereof. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 is provided to project laterally, and a vertical insertion opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are further formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. The tamper-proof notch 1007 is configured such that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 described later moves forward and backward. This point will be described later in detail. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 is a front end of the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The lock mounting piece 1008 is provided with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and a mounting hole formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting 1013 with screws 1012 are provided at upper and lower portions, and further screw fixing portions 1003 for mounting the lower portion of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are provided.

Further, the insertion vertical opening 1020 is an opening for the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 to enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the fraud prevention members 1023, 1032, and the escape lateral hole 1022 constitutes an escape hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. Is. This point will be described in detail later.

The cylinder lock 1010 attached to the above-mentioned lock attachment piece 1008 will be described. In the cylinder lock 1010, a cylindrical cylinder lock main body is fixed in front of the lock attachment base plate 1011 and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body is the lock attachment base plate. An engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the other end thereof. The side is a second engagement projection 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame when rotating. In the cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above, the cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009, and the mounting holes 1013 and the lock mounting piece 1008 are formed at the upper and lower portions of the lock mounting substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by aligning with the mounting hole 1014 of the above and screwing with the screw 1012.

Next, the fraud prevention members 1023, 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. 123. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are for preventing the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being lowered by a piano wire, a wire or the like without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key. . Thus, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is configured to be swingable around a swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 1025 is formed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 described above. Of the insertion holes 1005 and the rivets 1006 for slidably mounting the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050, the lowermost insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

Further, in the first tampering prevention member 1023, a vertically elongated projecting piece insertion hole 1026 that overlaps with the insertion vertical opening 1020 is formed in the plate-like surface, and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 is inserted into this projecting piece insertion hole 1026. Is ready for you. That is, the second engagement protrusion 1018 penetrates the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the sliding engagement rod 1040 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 is connected to the rising engagement hole 1045. The second engagement protrusion 1018 is adapted to be engaged. Further, the outer shape line diagonally above the opening position of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is the inclined portion 1024. The inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the first engagement projection piece 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates, and when the engagement cam 1016 rotates, the first engagement projection piece 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 are provided. The first fraud prevention member 1023 swings around the swing shaft hole 1025 (clockwise direction in FIG. 125(B)) by contacting with each other.

Further, in the first fraud prevention member 1023, a stopper piece 1027 is projected on the outline diagonally below the projection insertion hole 1026, and a restriction projection 1031 is projected below the stopper piece 1027 to restrict the restriction. A pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 are vertically formed in the front portion of the projecting piece 1031. The stopper piece portion 1027 enters the engaging prevention notch portion 1007 and the engaging notch portion 1066 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally engaged. It is to prevent it from sliding. Further, in the restriction protrusion 1031, the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the second tampering prevention member 1032 are connected by the spring 1035. It regulates the movement to. The guide pin 1028 is fixed to the pin hole 1029. With the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 from the back surface side of the first tampering prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with the laterally elongated opening formed at the lowermost end. Furthermore, the connection hole 1030 is for connecting the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the second tampering prevention member 1032 with the connection pin 1034.

The second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 described above is formed of a plate material having an inverted "te" shape, the connection hole 1033 is formed at one end of the upper portion thereof, and the spring engagement member is formed at the other end of the upper portion thereof. A stop hole 1036 is bored, and an abutting portion 1037 is provided at the lower end portion. The connection hole 1033 is for connecting with the connection pin 1034 so as to be aligned with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the spring locking hole 1036 has a spring locking piece of the U-shaped base body 1001 at one end. The other end of the spring 1035 locked to the 1021 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 1037 abuts on the closing projection 41 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operations of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 described above will be described in detail later.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is composed of a vertically elongated metal plate-shaped member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally formed toward the front at three places on the one vertical side of the door frame. It is projected. The door frame hook portion 1041 projects forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and when the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the body frame 3, the body frame. 3 is projected forward from a door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 67 and 68) formed in No. 3 and is locked to a hook cover 158 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. It can be canceled.

Further, a vertically long rivet elongated hole 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed in the center of the upper, middle, and lower sides of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The uppermost rivet elongated hole of the rivet elongated holes 1042 is formed. A guide protrusion 1043 is provided below the 1042 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet elongated hole 1042 is for the rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 to pass therethrough, and moreover, the rivet 1006 does not hinder the upward movement of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating and contacting the upper end of the rivet elongated hole 1042. The guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece movement holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding rod 1040. And the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are guided to each other.

Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at an upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, one end of a spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is attached to the main body frame sliding rod 1050. The spring hook portion 1057 formed on the upper hook member 1051 is locked. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is urged downward and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is urged upward. A contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape in the middle of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The contact elastic piece 1047 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the sliding rod for door frame 1040 with a press to form a convex shape, and contacts the inner side surface of the U-shaped base body 1001 to internally use the door frame. The sliding rod 1040 prevents the rattling.

Further, a vertically extending play hole 1044 and a vertically engaging hole 1045 are formed on the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotates, the play hole 1044 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotation operation. It constitutes a living space. Further, the ascending engagement hole 1045 is engaged such that when the second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and pivoted, the pivot movement causes the door frame sliding rod 1040 to ascend. It is for doing. An escape notch 1049, which is a notch larger than the tamper-proof notch 1007 in the vertical direction, is formed at the lower rear of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The escape cutout 1049 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to surely engage the fraud prevention cutout 1007 and the engagement cutout 1066.

On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052. It consists of That is, the body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of one vertically long metal plate as in the related art, but is made up of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently housed in the narrow space of the U-shaped base body 1001.

By the way, the upper hook member 1051 is provided with a hook portion 1054 projecting rearward from the upper end thereof, a rivet elongated hole 1055 and a projecting piece moving hole 1056 are formed in the plate surface portion thereof, and the front portion thereof is A spring hook portion 1057 and a connecting hole 1058 are formed at the lower end of the vertical side, and contact portions 1059 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook penetrating opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing projection 38 provided on the inner side of the outer frame 2 on the open side. Has been formed.

The rivet oblong hole 1055 corresponds to the rivet oblong hole 1042 formed in the upper portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and in a normal state in which the rivet 1006 penetrates the rivet oblong hole 1055. The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet elongated hole 1055. As a result, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The guide piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1056 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. To guide you. The spring hook portion 1057 is to lock the other end of the spring 1048 as described above. Further, the connecting hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, the contact portion 1059 contacts the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when stored in the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051 can be smoothly performed without rattling. It is for

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided at its lower end with a hook portion 1065 projecting rearward, and a rivet elongated hole 1061, a descending engagement hole 1062, a play hole 1063 and a protruding portion are projected from above the plate surface portion to below. The one-side moving hole 1064 is sequentially formed, the connecting hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side thereof, and the engaging notch 1066 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side thereof. A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing projection 41 provided on the lower portion inside the outer frame 2 on the open side. Has been formed. The rivet oblong hole 1061 corresponds to the rivet oblong hole 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 penetrates through the rivet oblong hole 1061, The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061.

This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward. The descending engagement hole 1062 engages so that the body frame sliding rod 1050 descends due to the rotation operation when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. belongs to. Further, the play hole 1063 has a tip end portion of the second engagement protrusion 1018 so as not to interfere with the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a movable space. As described above, the protruding piece moving hole 1064 is inserted with the guide protruding piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. To guide you. Further, the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted into the connecting hole 1060. Further, the abutting portion 1067 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 can be performed smoothly without rattling. It is for

Although the respective members constituting the locking device 1000 have been described above, in order to assemble the locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053. Then, in that state, the guide projecting piece 1043 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet lengths are mutually inserted. The holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and superposed, and in the superposed state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetrating opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001. Meanwhile, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001. Then, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet elongated holes 1055, 1061, 1042. However, when inserting the rivet 1006 at the lowermost end, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and attach the first tampering prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034 and the guide pin 1028 is shown in the pin hole 1029. It is necessary to fasten it with a screw that is not attached, and further insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, in a state where the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base body 1001 by the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door is closed. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in mutually opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is bridged over the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021 and 1036, and the second fraud prevention member 1032 is provided. Is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip end portion is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

In order to attach the locking device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, as described above, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed on the main body frame 3. The locking projection 1004 projecting in a hook shape is inserted into the lock locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 while being inserted into the hook hole 549 for moving, and is moved upward, and in that state, the screw stopper 1003 protruding horizontally and the screw stopper By aligning the portion 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the aligned hole, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. 117. . In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 forming the locking structure of the front part is formed so as to project on the side surface 1001a which does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001 while the rear part is formed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 that form the fixing structure are formed to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base 1001, Compared with the case where the stop structure is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as to prevent rattling.

By the way, the operation of the locking device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the opening/closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening/closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In the state where the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 are locked. There is. When a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in that state and the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 124(B). , The tip of the first engaging projection 1017 is engaged with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and pushes the lower hook member 1052 downward against the biasing force of the spring 1048. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 which are connected are also pushed down and descend. Therefore, the locking projections 38, 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are released from each other, so that the main body frame 3 is pulled to the front side. 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2.

Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a state of being raised by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as the state shown in FIG. 124A), but the hook portion 1054. , 1065 has an upper side inclined downward toward the outside, and therefore, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined part of the hook portions 1054, 1065 causes the closing projections 38, 41 to close. Since it abuts against the lower end portion of the main body frame, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and finally, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are locked again. The body frame sliding rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip of the second engaging projection 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes up the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the biasing force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the body frame 3.

When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a state of being lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 124A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the inclined portion of the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame becomes the hook cover 158. Since it abuts on the upper end portion of the door frame, the door frame sliding rod 1040 rises upward, and finally, the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked again. The sliding rod 1040 is lowered to return to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the U-shaped base body 1001 has a substantially vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 can be securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction, and a fraudulent act of forcibly opening the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire from between them can be performed. There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

As described above, the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment unlocks the body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. In this case, a fraudulent act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 and lowering the cylinder lock 1010 without inserting a key may be performed. Is prohibited from conducting such cheating. The first of the structures for preventing such fraud is a locking mechanism composed of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The sliding frame 1040 for the door frame and the sliding bar 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. 125. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 125(A), the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are separated from each other. They are in contact with each other. In this state, the urging force of the spring 1035 causes the first tamper-proof member 1023 to rotate counterclockwise, the stopper piece 1027 enters the tamper-proof notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is tamper-proof cutout. It is in a state of engaging with an engaging cutout portion 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007. For this reason, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the body frame sliding rod 1050 to pull it down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engaging notch portion 1066 are engaged, so that the body frame sliding rod 1050 is It is impossible to illegally pull down (unlock) downward, and it is impossible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to normally unlock the main body frame 3, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. 125(B). The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engaging protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engaging protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The rotation starts in the illustrated clockwise direction around 1025, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch 1007. Therefore, the engagement between the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state to also rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. As a whole, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered, so that the hooked portions 1054, 1065 and the closing projections 38, 41 of the outer frame 2 are released from each other, and the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is released. It can be opened.

When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Therefore, the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the second tampering prevention member 1023. The positional relationship with 1032 is almost the same as the positional relationship shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 125(A) is obtained. .. Therefore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not interfere when closing the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being fraudulently performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after release, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised so that the body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be tampered with.

Even with the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame provided inside is locked. Since the sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065, respectively, they are in a completely covered state. Even if an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 will close the wrong space. Since the intrusion into the Internet is blocked, it is a structure that can not easily carry out illegal activities.

As described above in detail, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has a lateral width dimension that is extremely thin as compared with a lock device in which a conventional L-shaped base body is integrated. The sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is lower than the lower end side of the game board. Since the position is set to be, the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is extremely increased, and even if the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 still has the main body frame. It can be firmly attached to the back side of 3. Since the open side having a U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body provided inside the lock device 1000 are attached. Since the frame sliding rod 1050 and the frame-shaped sliding rod 1050 are completely covered by the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065, a main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Unauthorized acts such as pulling down the frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be easily performed.

Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base body 1001 at the upper, middle, and lower sides are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 for positioning and locking. The locking device 1000 has a screw fixing portion 1003 and screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three positions on the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 at the upper, middle, and lower portions, and is fixed to the lock mounting hole 547 with screws. Since the front part of the lock device is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear part of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, the structure is extremely simple. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

In the embodiment described above, a screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock attaching piece 1008 and a portion near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526 of the main body frame 3 are formed as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 with a screw. The lock mounting hole 547 is screwed into the lock mounting hole 547. Instead, a screw 1012 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 on the lock mounting piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 penetrates the lock mounting piece 1008. The structure may be such that the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 526. Further, even if the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screw fixing part 1003 at the rear part of the locking device 1000 and the lock mounting hole 547. It has been confirmed that it is firmly fixed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 1001a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b that adheres to the first side wall 540. And an L-shaped base body (lock base body) in which a door frame is slidably attached to a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base body (lock base body) and a first side wall 540. The sliding rod 1050 may be housed. Even in this case, the attachment structure and the fraud prevention structure can be the same as those of the embodiment.

[1-5. Board unit]
Next, the board unit 1100 attached to the lower portion of the back surface of the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 to 134. 126 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from the back side, FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit viewed from the back side, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from the front side. Yes, FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the substrate unit, FIG. 130 is a front view seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder that is the main body of the substrate unit, and FIG. 131 is a frame. 132 is a rear view of the substrate unit, FIG. 132 is a rear view of the substrate unit, FIG. 133 is a rear view of the substrate unit with the payout control substrate box and the terminal substrate box removed, and FIG. FIG. 135 is a plan view showing a connection relation of each board provided in the board unit, FIG. 135 is a schematic view showing an electrical connection between the board unit and the game board, and FIG. 136 is a payout control board and the board unit. 137 is a part of the rear view of the pachinko machine showing the wiring, etc., and FIG. 137 is a game board for explaining the cross-sectional location of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 138 (however, this game board is shown in FIGS. 76 to 80). FIG. 138 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 137. FIG.

The board unit 1100 is to be mounted in a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) formed in the lower portion of the back surface of the body frame 3, and as shown in FIGS. Attaching various boards such as a door relay board 1102, a power board box 1103, a terminal board box 1104, a payout control board box 1105, a main drawer relay board 1107, and a sub drawer relay board 1108 to a resin-molded frame board holder 1101. It is composed by. Among the above-mentioned boards, the door relay board 1102, the power board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105 are attached to the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 in the front-rear direction so as to overlap with each other, and are connected to the main drawer relay board. The board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are mounted on the front side of the frame board holder 1101. As will be described later, the power supply board 1136 is an extremely high temperature heat source because +34V, +18V, and +9V are created and supplied, and the heat generated from the power supply board 1136 rises. Therefore, by mounting the payout control board box 1105 accommodating the payout control board 1186 on the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 so as not to receive the rising heat. A metal shield heat dissipation plate 1106 is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like and to dissipate the heat generated from the power supply board 1136. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are covered and attached to the board cover 1109. Hereinafter, each member forming the board unit 1100 will be described in detail.

It should be noted that the shield heat dissipation plate 1106 according to the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 127 and FIG. The plate surface of the plate 1106 is formed as an uneven surface 1106a. The heat transmitted to the payout control board 1186 by the shield heat radiating plate 1106 can be suppressed to be small. The uneven surface 1106a increases the contact area with the outside (outside air) to enhance the heat dissipation effect. The uneven surface 1106a is preferably formed in a vertical shape or an inclined shape so that heat can be easily dissipated when installed. Of course, even if the uneven surface 1106a is formed on the shield heat dissipation plate 1106, the shielding effect against electromagnetic waves is not impaired. The shield heat dissipation plate 1106 prevents the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like. Thereby, the influence of noise due to electromagnetic waves can be suppressed, and thus the malfunction of the payout control board 1186 housed in the payout control board box 1105 due to the effect of noise can be prevented. In addition, the shield heat dissipation function of the shield heat dissipation plate 1106 is not limited to between the power supply board box 1103 and the payout control board box 1105, and is used when another plurality of board boxes are attached to the frame board holder 1101 in an overlapping manner. Is also achieved by providing the same shield heat radiating plate 1106 as that of the present embodiment between the board box located below and the board box located above.

First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed of a horizontally long synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 127 and 130, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one rear surface side portion (right side portion in FIG. 130). A relay board recess 1110 for mounting the door relay board 1102 is formed inside the wiring opening 1124. The relay board recess 1110 is formed as a square recess so as to match the outer shape of the door relay board 1102 having a substantially square shape. On the upper and lower sides of the relay board recess 1110, the back surface of the door relay board 1102 is formed. A contact protrusion 1113 that supports the door is formed, and a stopper claw 1111 that is locked to the surface of one longitudinal side of the door relay substrate 1102 in a state where the door relay substrate 1102 is housed in the relay substrate recess 1110 is formed. ing. In addition, above and below the outer side of the recess 1110 for the relay board, there are mounting bosses 1112 for engaging with engagement locking holes 1135 formed on one end side of the power supply board box 1103 and fixing with screw not shown. It is projected.

Further, on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101, two wiring processing pieces 1114 are formed closer to the center than the above-mentioned recess 1110 for relay substrate for locking and collecting wirings to be passed inside. The wiring processing piece 1114 is formed so as to project in an L-shape when viewed from the side with respect to the vertical surface, and the wiring is hooked between the vertical surface and the L-shaped projection piece. ing. Further, a region from the upper portion of the relay substrate recess 1110 of the frame substrate holder 1101 to a portion slightly closer to the other end side than the substantial center is a region for mounting the power supply substrate box 1103 (a lower region on the right side described below). Contact projections 1115 that come into contact with the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 are provided on the upper and lower sides thereof. Therefore, in the state where the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the power supply board box attachment area so as to abut the abutting protrusion 1115, a space is formed between the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 and the vertical surface of the frame board holder 1101. The wirings that are formed and connect the substrates to each other are stored in this space, and the two wiring processing pieces 1114 are the ones that lock and store the stored wirings.

A large amount of rearward projection is formed from the other end side of the region where the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the other end side of the frame board holder 1101 (left side in FIG. 130). That is, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a step shape in which the left side is higher and the right side is lower at a position slightly left of the center when viewed from the back side, and the lower right side region is for mounting the power supply substrate box 1103. Area (hereinafter, may be referred to as “power supply board box mounting area”). Then, on the other end side of the power supply board box mounting region, an insertion opening 1115a is formed into which the insertion protrusion 1134 protruding above and below the other end side of the power supply board box 1103 is inserted. Therefore, in order to attach the power supply board box 1103, after inserting the insertion protrusion 1134 into the insertion opening 1115a, the engagement locking holes 1135 formed on the upper and lower sides of one end side of the power supply board box 1103 are attached to the attachment boss 1112 from above. The power supply board box 1103 can be fixed to the frame board holder 1101 by inserting and fixing with screws (not shown).

Further, on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101, the above-mentioned high step-shaped region is one of the regions for mounting the payout control substrate box 1105 (hereinafter, also referred to as “payout control substrate box mounting region”). In the upper part of the stepped high region, a horizontal L-shaped concave wiring routing space 1116 is formed. A wiring opening 1121 (see FIGS. 129 to 132) is formed on the bottom surface of the wiring routing space 1116, and the wirings hooked on the two wiring processing pieces 1114 in the power supply board box mounting region are formed. The wiring drawing space 1116 and the wiring opening 1121 are drawn to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. Further, a locking projection 1117 for engaging the engaging elastic piece 1184 of the payout control board box 1105 is projectingly formed at the other end side (left end side in FIG. 127) of the payout control board box mounting area. ing.

Next, the structure of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 128, 129, and 131, the out-ball passage 1119 is inverted in the approximate center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. It is formed in an L shape. The out-ball passage 1119 is located above the outlet 606 (see FIG. 78), the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 68), and the drop port 629 (see FIG. 75). Is formed wide, and the downstream side is formed narrow so as to discharge the balls in a row. Therefore, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 71, the wide upstream portion of the out-ball passage 1119 is located behind the passage supporting protrusion 513 supporting the lower surface of the out port 606. ing. Then, the out ball, the winning ball, or the ball without the ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119 toward the outside of the pachinko machine (generally, the collecting trough on the island).

Further, on the front side of the frame board holder 1101 corresponding to the payout control board box mounting area, a main drawer relay board 1107 and a sub-drawer relay board 1108 are laterally spaced by a predetermined distance in the upper area. A drawer mounting region 1120 is formed which is vacant and mounted in parallel. In the drawer mounting region 1120, support holes 1204 and 1205 formed in the relay boards 1107 and 1108 are penetrated to form a drawer mounting boss 1118 for supporting the relay boards 1107 and 1108, respectively. A joining guide hole 1126 and a guide hole 1125 are formed above and below the intermediate position between the relay boards 1107 and 1108. As shown in FIG. 138, this joining guide hole 1126 is associated with the work of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 (holder-side connector) and the game board 4 provided on the board unit 1100 side. The joining guide protrusion 628 (see FIG. 78) formed on the board substrate holder 623 of the game board 4 is inserted so that the drawer connectors 626 and 627 (game board side connector) provided on the side are naturally connected. It is something. On the other hand, the guide hole 1125 is used for inserting the guide protrusion 525 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) protruding from the body frame 3 when the board unit 1100 is attached to the body frame 3, and the guide hole 1125 of the board unit 1100 is inserted into the guide hole 1125. The positioning is performed and the mounting work is facilitated. Further, mounting pieces 1122 for mounting the board unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 are provided on both left and right sides and a lower side of the frame board holder 1101 so as to project outward, and the mounting pieces 1122 are attached to the mounting hole portions 527 of the main body frame 3. The board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame 3 by fixing with screws (not shown) corresponding to (see FIG. 68). It should be noted that the mounting hole portion 527 is formed to have an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the mounting piece 1122, as shown in FIG. Further, on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 128) of the frame substrate holder 1101, a wiring retaining piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed to project.

The configuration of the frame substrate holder 1101 is approximately as described above, but the configuration of various substrates attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 having such a configuration will be described. First, the door relay board 1102 mounted in the recess 1110 for the relay board on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1130 and a door frame connection terminal 1131 are provided. The door frame connection terminal 1131 is provided on the door frame 5 so that the door frame connection terminal 1131 can be visually recognized from the outside when viewed from the rear side even when all the substrates are attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 as shown in FIG. The door frame wiring 1212 (see FIG. 134) such as an electric decoration component including a lamp and an LED and a speaker (see FIG. 134) is connected to the door frame connection terminal 1131 through the wiring opening 1124. The internal connection terminal 1130 is connected to the door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108 by the internal wiring 1213 (see FIG. 134). However, the internal wiring 1213 is provided inside the frame substrate holder 1101 so that the wiring processing piece 1114, the wiring routing space 1116, and the wiring opening 1124 described above are laid.

Further, the power supply board box 1103 attached to the power supply board box attachment area on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 includes a box main body 1132 for fixing the power supply board 1136 (see FIG. 133) and a cover body for covering the box main body 1132. 1133. On the box main body 1132, engagement locking holes 1135 that engage with the mounting boss 1112 are integrally formed above and below one end thereof, and insertion protrusions 1134 that are inserted into the insertion port 1115a are integrated above and below the other end thereof. Have been formed in the same way. Further, as shown in FIG. 133, the power switch 1137, the power supply line connector 1138, the CR unit power supply connector 1139, and the grounding part are provided on the part of the power supply board 1136 not covered by the cover body 1133 (the right side part and the lower left part in FIG. 133). A connector 1140 and a payout control board power supply connector 1141 are provided. The power switch 1137 is a switch for supplying power to all electric devices of the pachinko machine 1, and is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is used. In addition, the power supply line connector 1138 is used to connect a power supply line from a 24 V AC (AC24V) power supply line that is supplied to the island, or to ground noise or the like charged in the pachinko machine 1 to the outside as a frame ground. It is a connector for. The CR unit power supply connector 1139 is a connector for supplying power to a card type ball lender (not shown; generally called CR unit) adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. The grounding connector 1140 is electrically connected to various grounding wires provided in the pachinko machine 1 to prevent static electricity, and grounds noise or the like that has entered the pachinko machine 1 to the outside via the power supply line connector 1138. It is a connector for doing. Specifically, a ground wire that removes noise and the like from the door frame 5 (reinforcement plates 211 to 214) is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140a as a frame ground, and noise from a sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740. The ground wire for removing the noises is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140b as the frame ground FG1, and the ground wire for removing noises from the prize ball unit 800 is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140c as the frame ground FG1. A ground wire that removes noise and the like from the CR unit is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140d as a frame ground. These frame grounds are electrically connected to the frame ground of the power supply line connector 1138, and are grounded to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via this frame ground. Further, as shown in FIG. 134, a power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply connector 1141 for the payout control board, and the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply terminal 1192 of the payout control board 1186. Then, with the power supply wiring 1214, another control board (for example, a liquid crystal control board 3281 housed in the peripheral board box 622 or a main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624) via the payout control board 1186. ) And so on. The power supply wiring 1214 is guided from the power supply connector 1141 for the payout control board to the wiring routing space 1116, is drawn out rearward from the back surface of the payout control board box 1105, and is connected to the power supply terminal 1192. There is. That is, the power supply wiring 1214 is also laid inside the frame substrate holder 1101.

By the way, the rear surface of the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is formed in a step shape as shown in FIG. Is a mounting area 1143 for mounting the payout control board box 1105. The mounting area 1143 constitutes a mounting area for mounting the horizontally long payout control board box 1105 together with the above-mentioned payout control board box mounting area of the frame board holder 1101. An engagement hole 1146 into which a later-described engagement piece 1182 (see FIG. 129) of the payout control board box 1105 is engaged and inserted is formed at substantially the center of the above-mentioned step portion.

The cover body 1133 forming the mounting area 1142 for mounting the terminal board box 1104 has positioning holes 1145 for positioning or engaging the positioning pin 1148 and the engaging piece portion 1147 formed on the back surface side of the terminal board box 1104, respectively. Also, a mounting engagement hole 1144 is formed. The engaging piece portion 1147 is formed in an L-shaped cross section, while the mounting engaging hole 1144 is formed in a hole shape in which a wide portion and a narrow portion are continuous, so that the engaging piece portion 1147 is attached. After being inserted into the wide portion of the engaging hole 1144, the L-shaped engaging piece portion 1147 and the mounting engaging hole are slid in one direction (in the case of the drawing, toward the center of the frame substrate holder 1101). The narrow portion of 1144 is adapted to be engaged. A hooking piece 1149 is projectingly provided on the lower portion of the other side of the terminal board box 1104, and when the terminal board box 1104 is slidably engaged with the cover body 1133, the hooking piece 1149 is released from the payout control board box 1105. Of the box main body 1180. It should be noted that this engagement is an engagement state in which the terminal board box 1104 is easily disengaged by sliding the terminal board box 1104 in the non-engagement direction with a little force.

As shown in FIG. 132, the terminal board box 1104 includes an external terminal board 1150a provided with a plurality of external information terminals 1151 and payout control board terminals 1156, a frequency display terminal 1152, and a power supply ground terminal 1153. Two boards, a CR unit terminal plate 1150b provided with a CR unit terminal 1154 and a payout control board terminal 1155, are housed in parallel in the vertical direction. The plurality of external information terminals 1151 provided on the external terminal board 1150a are provided with various information signals necessary for managing the pachinko machine 1 such as a big hit information output signal and a starting opening winning information output signal (for example, installed in a game hall). A control computer (hole computer) which is installed in the main control board box 624 mainly receives information signals from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624. Is transmitted to the payout control board 1186 through the payout control board 1186, and is finally transmitted to each of the plurality of external information terminals 1151 by the connection between the external terminal board terminal 1188 and the payout control board terminal 1156 provided on the payout control board 1186. It The power display terminal 1152 of the CR unit terminal plate 1150b is connected to the remaining power display of a prepaid card, a ball rental switch, and a return switch of the pachinko machine 1, for example. .. The power ground terminal 1153 is composed of two connectors. One connector (left side in FIG. 132) is connected to the wiring from the CR unit power connector 1139 of the power board 1136, and the other connector is connected to the power board 1136. The wiring from one grounding connector 1140 among the plurality of grounding connectors 1140 is connected. Further, the CR unit terminal 1154 is connected to a wiring from a CR unit (not shown), and by connecting the CR unit terminal plate terminal 1189 of the payout control board 1186 and the payout control board terminal 1155. The payout control board 1186 and the CR unit are connected.

As described above, the terminal board box 1104 connects the payout control board 1186 and the CR unit with the external terminal board 1150a for deriving the game information from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the outside. This is to store both boards of the relay CR unit terminal board 1150b, which are conventionally housed in different board boxes and provided at different positions on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1. In the above, one terminal board box 1104 is collectively attached to the frame board holder 1101. Therefore, in particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a have a unique configuration in which they are connected via the payout control board 1186 without being directly connected by wiring.

Next, the payout control board box 1105 that can be mounted over the payout control board box mounting area of the frame board holder 1101 and the mounting area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 127, 129, and 129. This will be described with reference to 132. The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body 1180 to which a horizontally long rectangular payout control board 1186 is fixed by screws (not shown), a cover body 1181 attached to the box main body 1180 and covering the surface of the payout control board 1186, It consists of The box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 are engaged with one side (the right side in FIG. 132) of the box body, and are caulked and fixed to the other side (the left side in FIG. 132) by the separation cutting portion 1183. As a result, in order to separate the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181, the separation cutting section 1183 cannot be separated unless cut. However, the caulking fixing in the separating/cutting unit 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (4 locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4 in the figure) with a caulking member. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of improper separation, a trace of cutting remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether or not there has been an illegal act. In addition, an engaging piece 1182 that is inserted into an engaging hole 1146 formed in the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is projectingly formed in the center of one short side of the box main body 1180, and a lower side of the other short side is formed. An engaging elastic piece 1184 that elastically engages with a locking projection 1117 formed on the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed. Therefore, in order to attach the payout control board box 1105 to the frame board holder 1101, the engaging piece 1182 is inserted into the engaging hole 1146, and then the engaging elastic piece 1184 is engaged with the locking projection 1117. Can be easily installed. Then, in a state in which the payout control board box 1105 is mounted over the payout control board box mounting area of the frame board holder 1101 and the mounting area 1143 formed in the cover body 1133 of the power board box 1103, the inside of those mounting areas 1143 Further, the payout control board box 1105 is stored and is fixed so that it cannot be moved in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction. On the contrary, when detaching, while pushing the engaging elastic piece 1184 in the direction opposite to the elastic direction to disengage the engaging elastic piece 1184 from the locking projection 1117 and pulling up the dispensing control board box 1105, By pulling out the engagement piece 1182 from the engagement hole 1146, the payout control board box 1105 can be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

Further, the payout control board 1186 covered with the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 has a door frame opening switch terminal 1185a and a main body frame opening switch terminal 1185b on one side (right side in FIG. 132) thereof. , Prize ball unit terminal 1187, external terminal plate terminal 1188, CR unit terminal plate terminal 1189, operation handle terminal 1194, error LED indicator 4130, error release switch 4131, and ball removal switch 4132, and others. A full-tank switch terminal 1190, an inspection output terminal 1191, a power supply terminal 1192, a firing motor terminal 1193, and an internal connection terminal 1195 are provided on the lower side (the left side portion in FIG. 132).

The door frame opening switch terminal 1185a is a connector to which wiring from the door frame opening switch 4133 that detects that the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 is connected. The body frame opening switch terminal 1185b is a connector to which the wiring from the body frame opening switch 4134 that detects that the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 is connected. The prize ball unit terminal 1187 is a multi-pin connector to which the wiring from the relay board 480 of the prize ball unit 800 described above is connected. The external terminal board terminal 1188 is a multi-pin connector that is connected to the payout control board terminal 1156 of the external terminal board 1150a as described above. The CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1155 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b as described above. The full tank switch terminal 1190 is a connector to which the wiring from the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is connected. The error LED indicator 4130 displays the state of the pachinko machine such as a CR unit connection abnormality. When the error canceling switch 4131 is operated, a guidance of a canceling method corresponding to the error displayed on the error LED display 4130 flows from the side speaker 121 or the lower speaker 391. When the ball removal switch 4132 is operated, it starts discharging the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 (starts ball removal). The inspection output terminal 1191 is a connector for connecting to inspection equipment when inspecting the payout control board 1186, and is a terminal for outputting various output signals for inspection. The power supply terminal 1192 is a connector which is connected to the payout control board power supply connector 1141 of the power supply board 1136 by the power supply wiring 1214 as described above. The firing motor terminal 1193 is a connector to which the wiring from the firing motor 695 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is connected. The operation handle terminal 1194 is a connector to which wires from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 provided inside the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 are connected. The internal connection terminal 1195 is a connector connected to the payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107 by the signal power supply wiring 1215.

Note that resistors R1194a to R1194d are arranged near the left side of the error canceling switch 4131, as shown in FIG. These resistors R1194a to R1194d are connected to the ground (GND) when noise or the like from the door frame 5 (the reinforcing plates 211 to 214 shown in FIG. 18) enters various detection signals input to the operation handle terminal 1194. Does not become unstable, and its detailed description will be given later.

Next, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 that are mounted in the drawer mounting area 1120 formed on the front surface side of the frame board holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 129, the main drawer relay board 1107 is connected to the main drawer connector 626 (game board side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on the relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. A main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder-side connector) and a payout control board connector 1201 connected to the internal connection terminals 1195 of the payout control board 1186 and the signal power supply wiring 1215 are provided above and below. Further, the sub drawer relay board 1108 is connected to a sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on a relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back surface side of the game board 4, and a sub drawer relay connector 1202. A (holder-side connector) and a door frame connector 1203 connected to the internal connection terminals 1130 of the door relay board 1102 via the internal wiring 1213 are provided above and below. In addition, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are provided with support holes 1204 and 1205 on both left and right sides of each board, and the support holes 1204 and 1205 are protruded in the drawer mounting area 1120. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are positioned and supported in the drawer attachment area 1120 by being inserted into 1118, and then fixed by being covered with the board cover 1109.

By the way, the board cover 1109 includes a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107, and a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108. Rectangular connector openings 1206, 1207, 1208, 1209 for allowing the protrusions to protrude to the outside of the board cover 1109, and a pin into which the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted on the back surface side of the board cover 1109. Insertion holes 1210 (see FIG. 127) are formed, and stop holes 1211 for fixing the substrate cover 1109 to the frame substrate holder 1101 with screws (not shown) are formed at both left and right ends. Therefore, the support holes 1204 and 1205 of the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are inserted into the drawer mounting boss 1118 projecting from the drawer mounting area 1120, and the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted into the pin insertion hole 1210. The main drawer relay substrate 1107 and the sub-drawer relay substrate 1108 can be firmly fixed in the drawer mounting region 1120 by covering the substrate cover 1109 while inserting it and fixing it with screws (not shown) in the fixing holes 1211.

The configuration of the board unit 1100 has been described above. However, in the case of the present embodiment, among the various boards required to drive and control the pachinko machine 1, the main board is replaced when the game board 4 is changed. A door relay board 1102 that is a board other than the control board 4100 and the liquid crystal control board 3281, a power board 1136 housed in the power board box 1103, an external terminal board 1150 housed in the terminal board box 1104, and a payout control board box 1105. The dispense control board 1186 thus prepared is previously assembled into a frame board holder 1101 into a unit, and the assembled and unitized board unit 1100 is simply attached to the lower portion on the rear side of the body frame 3 to separately separate the main bodies. The work efficiency can be improved as compared with the work of mounting various substrates mounted on the back side of the frame 3. Further, in this case, the wiring between the boards unitized into the board unit 1100 can also be accommodated inside the frame board holder 1101. Therefore, the wiring connecting the boards can be laid in an orderly manner without being disturbed. can do.

Further, in the present embodiment, a main drawer relay board 1107 having a main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector) and a sub drawer relay board 1108 having a sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector) on the front surface of the board unit 1100. 138 is provided, as shown in FIG. 138, the main drawer connector of the relay terminal board 625 provided on the back surface side of the game board 4 in accordance with the work of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3 from the front side thereof. Since 626 and the sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector) are connected to the corresponding main drawer relay connector 1200 and the sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector), respectively, mounting of the game board 4 and connection between the boards Can be done at the same time. Therefore, the work of exchanging the game board 4 can be performed efficiently.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the board unit 1100 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, a payout control board box 1105 which requires connection work of wiring with various electric devices provided in the main body frame 3, and an external control box. The terminal board box 1104, which requires connection work with the CR unit and the management computer, and the terminal board box 1104 are arranged in parallel at the rearmost position of the board unit 1100 where they are easily visible, while the power supply board requires less connection work with the outside. Since the box 1103 and the door relay board 1102 are arranged inside, a plurality of boards can be efficiently overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the size of the board unit 1100 can be designed to a minimum. However, even in the power supply board box 1103 and the door relay board 1102 arranged inside, since all the terminal portions connected to the outside are visible from the outside, there is a problem that the connection work becomes fumbling. There is no.

[1-5A-1. Electrical connection between the board unit and the game board (connection by drawer connector)]
Next, electrical connection between the board unit 1100 and the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 135. As described above, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are provided on the game board 4 side, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 are provided on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135(a), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side can be inserted into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side for electrical connection. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are provided with terminals 626a and 627a as shown in FIG. 135(b), and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are shown in FIG. 135(c). Thus, the contacts 1200a and 1202a are provided. When the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are inserted into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side, as shown in FIG. 135(c), the terminals 626a and 627a push down the contacts 1200a and 1202a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a. Is displaced. The repulsive force of the contacts 1200a and 1202a generated by this displacement is brought into electrical conduction by strongly contacting the terminals 626a and 627a. Thereby, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are based on various control boards (for example, by the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186). Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals are formed. Further, the drawer connector 626 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connector 1200 on the board unit 1100 side are further provided with voltage supply lines for supplying various voltages created by the power supply board 1136. In this way, by attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3 in a detachable manner, the control signal lines and the voltages by the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side. The supply line can be connected so that it can be moved freely.

The terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a in this embodiment are of bellows type. The pin type may inadvertently touch and bend the pin when working, but the bellows type does not. The terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a are plated with gold having a small friction coefficient. As a result, good sliding (fitting) when the game board 4 is attached and detached is ensured.

Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, when the work is performed with the power switch 1137 shown in FIG. 133 being turned on, the contact between the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a, specifically, the contact At the contacts for various voltage supply lines, a large current (inrush current described later) flows, so that welding occurs. If the game board 4 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 3 to be mounted in this welded state, the contact 1200a is bent and broken, or when the game board 4 is detached from the main body frame, the contact 1200a has the drawer connector 1200. If the drawer connector 1200 is peeled off and damaged, the drawer connector 1200 cannot be used.

Further, if the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a are welded, various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on various control boards may be damaged due to damage to the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit for preventing welding is provided on the main control board 4100, which will be described later, to deal with this. The detailed description will be given later.

[1-5A-2. Wiring with prize ball unit]
Next, the wiring between the payout control board 1186 housed in the payout control board box 1105 and the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. 136. As described above, the relay terminal board 830 in the prize ball unit includes the counting switch connector 830a, the payout motor connector 830b, the rotation angle switch connector 830c, the ball break switch connector 830d, the grounding connector 830e, and the payout control. A board connector 830f is provided.

The counting switch connector 830a is connected to the wiring from the counting switch 812, the payout motor connector 830b is connected to the wiring from the payout motor 815, and the rotation angle switch connector 830c is connected to the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855. The wire break switch connector 830d is connected to the wire from the ball break switch 778 of the ball passage unit 770, and the ground connector 830e is connected to the ground wire from the dispensing motor 815. The payout control board connector 830f is connected to the prize ball unit terminal 1187 of the payout control board 1186 by a wiring (harness).

With the wiring from the counting switch 812, the wiring from the payout motor 815, the ground wire from the payout motor 815, and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, excluding the wiring from the ball break switch 778 and the rotation angle switch 855. The harness is put together by a wiring processing piece 869.

The balls supplied from the island are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740, taken into the ball passage unit 770, and guided to the prize ball unit 800, as described above. When the spheres rub against each other and become charged, they electrostatically discharge and generate noise. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment.

As described above, the sensor substrate 854 of the prize ball unit 800 is provided with the rotation angle switch 855, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 855 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the sphere. Further, the above-described harness that connects the payout control connector 480f and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, that is, the harness that connects the prize ball unit 800 and the payout control board 1186, is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the balls. Cheap.

[1-6. Cover body]
Next, the cover body 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 70, 74 and the like. The cover body 1250 covers the rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3, and is inserted into the cover body support cylindrical portion 575 formed on one side of the rear surface of the main body frame 3 from above in three places on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the one side. The shaft support pin 1251 is formed, and the engagement piece 1252 that engages with the cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the ball passage unit 770 is formed substantially at the center on the other side. Then, by inserting the shaft support pin 1251 of the cover body 1250 into the cover body support cylindrical portion 575, the cover body 1250 is rotatably supported by the main body frame 3 and the engagement piece 1252 is inserted into the cover body engagement groove 785. By locking, the cover body 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back surfaces of various components provided on the game board 4 can be protected. When releasing, the engagement between the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engagement groove 785 may be released.

Further, in the cover body 1250 in the illustrated case, the stop holes 1253 are formed above and below the engagement piece 1252 on the opening side, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 provided on the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3 is provided. Although a through hole 1254 for penetrating is formed, although not shown in more detail, similar to the cover body 1270 according to the second embodiment described next, a connection operation opening 1255, a standing wall, a contact protrusion, and a reinforcing rib are formed. Has been done. The connection operation opening 1255, the standing wall, the contact projection, and the reinforcing rib are provided at the same positions as the connection operation opening 1303, the standing wall 1304, the contact projection 1305, and the reinforcing rib of the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment. It has the same function. Then, with the cover body 1250 closed, the fixing holes 1253 of the cover body 1250 and the fixing holes 568 on the main body frame 3 side are aligned and fixed with screws (not shown). The rear opening 580 can be closed and fixed. Then, since the locking projecting hook piece 570 penetrates the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed to the main body frame 3, for example, a lock such as a padlock is projected on the locking projecting hook piece 570. The cover body 1250 can be opened only by the person who has the padlock key.

[1-6A. Other Embodiments of Cover Body]
The cover body 1250 shown in FIGS. 5 and 74 described above (hereinafter, referred to as “cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment”) is attached to the lower rear surface of the game board 4 as is apparent from FIG. 5. Although it is formed to cover the back surface of the game board 4 excluding the main control board box 624, this may be a cover body that covers the entire back surface of the game board 4 including the main control board box 624. A pachinko machine to which such a cover body 1300 (hereinafter, referred to as “cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment”) is attached will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 150. FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine with the cover body attached according to the second embodiment as seen from the rear side with the cover body open, and FIG. 140 shows the pachinko machine with the cover body attached according to the second embodiment. 141 is a side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached, as seen from the open side of the cover body, and FIG. 142 is the second embodiment. [Fig. 143] Fig. 143 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine with the cover body attached according to Fig. 143 seen from the pivotal side of the cover body, and Fig. 143 is a rear view of the pachinko machine with the cover body attached according to the second embodiment. 144 is a rear view of the pachinko machine with the cover body according to the second embodiment removed, and FIG. 145 is a perspective view of the payout control board box that overlaps and contacts the lower side of the cover body according to the second embodiment. 146 is a perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 147 is a back surface for explaining the action of the cylinder lock provided in the cover body according to the second embodiment. 148 is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 143, FIG. 149 is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 143, and FIG. 150 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 143. Note that in FIGS. 139 to 150, configurations having the same functions as those shown in the previous drawings are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The outer frame 2A of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached is, as shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment described above, and is attached to the door frame 5. The shape of the dish unit 300 provided is also slightly different. Further, the structure of the main body frame 3 is also a point of the locking wall 569 having a locking hole 568 (described later), a locking hole 569a and a guide hole 569b formed on the open end side of the shaft support side rear surface wall 546 (see FIG. 144), and The third side wall 542 and the fourth side wall 543 forming the rear side wall are different in that the positions of the cutouts 221 are extended downward (see FIG. 140 ), and the dispensing control board box 1105 is different. The configuration is also different only in that a contact low-step surface 1181a is formed on the cover body 1181 (see FIG. 145). However, the main control board box 624 shown in FIGS. 139 and 144 is attached to the board holder 623 for the board which is attached to the lower back surface of the game board 4 as in the embodiment shown in FIG. In 139 and FIG. 144, the game board 4 is not shown.

Therefore, first, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 146. The cover body 1300 is made of synthetic resin in the shape of a dish in which the peripheral side wall of a slightly vertically long rectangular shape stands up (a large number of air holes are formed in the side wall portion and the upper half of the rectangular plate portion). A plurality of (four in the illustrated case) shaft support pins 1301 inserted into the cover body supporting cylinder portion 575 formed in the body frame 3 and pivotally supported are integrally formed on the side wall on one side of the vertical side. An engagement piece 1302 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the ball passage unit 770 is integrally formed on the side wall on the other side of the vertical side, slightly closer to the upper side. Similar to the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment, the shaft support pin 1301 and the engagement piece 1302 are formed by inserting the shaft support pin 1301 of the cover body 1300 into the cover body support tubular portion 575 so that the cover body 1300 is main body. By pivotally supporting the frame 3 in an openable and closable manner and locking the engagement piece 1302 in the cover body engagement groove 785, the cover body 1300 can be closed to the main body frame 3 and provided on the game board 4. The back surface of various components including the main control board box 624 is protected. The difference between the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment and the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment is that the cover body 1300 is not simply provided so as to be openable and closable, but also cannot be illegally opened in a closed state. Since the cylinder lock 1309 is provided in the main control board box 624 and the back surface of the main control board box 624 is covered, a test terminal for connecting the RAM clear switch 624a exposed to the outside to the main control board box 624 and the inspection device is provided. The opening for connection operation 1303 is provided at a position corresponding to 624b, 624c, and the surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 is in contact with the front end side of the lower side wall of the cover body 1300. It is the point of contact. Therefore, a characteristic configuration of the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment will be described below.

First, the connection operation opening 1303 will be described. The connection operation opening 1303 is formed in a rectangular shape above the contact lower side wall 1306 at the lower side of the cover body 1300, and its size is as shown in FIG. 143. The main control board box 624 is provided with a RAM clear switch 624a exposed to the outside and test terminals 624b and 624c connected to the inspection equipment. Further, inside the connection operation opening 1303, a standing wall 1304 and an abutting protrusion 1305 that abut on the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 in a closed state are provided in a protruding manner. The standing wall 1304 is formed relatively high along the left and right opening edges of the connection operation opening 1303, and the contact protrusion 1305 projects relatively low along the one side opening edge from the upper opening edge of the connection operation opening 1303. As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, the standing wall 1304 and the contact projections 1305 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 (the surface of the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624). In order to prevent an illegal action from being performed on the main control board box 624, a fraudulent tool is inserted from the connection operation opening 1303 so that no gap is created between the main control board box 624 and the main control board box 624.

Next, the contact lower side wall 1306 formed on the lower side of the cover body 1300 will be described. When the cover body 1300 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact lower side wall 1306 is shown in FIGS. 149 and 150. As described above, the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 comes into contact with the upper side portion of the cover body 1181. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 145, on the upper side of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached, as shown in FIG. An abutting low step surface 1181a which is formed to be much lower than the surface is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 144, the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 is formed in the payout control board box mounting area of the frame board holder 1101 and the cover body 1133 of the power board box 1103. When attached to the attachment area 1143, the payout control board box 1105 is accommodated in the attachment area 1143 and is fixed so as not to move in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction. Therefore, the contact lower step surface 1181a, which is a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105, is covered by the contact lower side wall 1306 of the cover body 1300, so that the cover body 1300 is not opened. As long as the payout control board box 1105 cannot be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

Next, a configuration related to the cylinder lock 1309 will be described. In FIG. 146, an oval-shaped lock hole 1308 for penetrating the cylinder lock 1309 is formed on the lower side of the cover body 1300 and closer to the lower side. A threaded portion 1310 of the cylinder lock 1309 having an elliptical cross section penetrates through the lock hole 1308, and a nut 1312 is screwed into the penetrated threaded portion 1310 from the inside to fix the cylinder lock 1309 in the lock hole 1308. Further, in the cylinder lock 1309, a lock shaft 1311 is provided so as to project from the center of the threaded portion 1310 toward the inside of the cover body 1300, and the lock shaft 1311 is provided with a screw formed in a lower portion of the elliptical locking piece 1313. The locking piece 1313 is fixed to the rear end of the cylinder lock 1309 by penetrating the hole 1314 and tightening it with a nut 1315. With this configuration, it is possible to rotate the locking piece 1313 within a range of 90 degrees by inserting a key (held by a manager of a game hall, etc.) into the cylinder lock 1309 and rotating the lock. There is. Further, a guide protrusion 1316 for guiding opening and closing when the cover body 1300 is closed is provided at a lower portion of the lock hole 1308 so as to protrude inward. Furthermore, screw-fastening holes 1307 for screwing screws onto the upper and lower sides of the cover body 1300 on the open side and above and below the engaging pieces 1302 are formed.

On the other hand, a fixing hole 568, a locking hole 569a, and a guide hole 569b are formed on the main body frame 3 side so as to correspond to the screw fixing hole 1307, the locking piece 1313, and the guide protrusion 1316 described above. This structure will be described with reference to FIG. 144. Although the cover body contact groove 567 is formed on the shaft support side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 described above, the cover body contact groove 567 is formed. Stop holes 568 corresponding to the screw holes 1307 are formed in the upper and lower portions of 567 (up and down with the cover body engaging groove 785 of the ball passage unit 770 sandwiched therebetween). Further, as shown in FIG. 147, a locking wall 569 extends in the vertical center line direction of the main body frame 3 at the lower part of the rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 on the shaft support side. A lock hole 569a and a guide hole 569b are provided above and below the. The locking hole 569a is formed in an elliptical shape so that the locking piece 1313 can penetrate therethrough, and the locking wall 569 around the front surface side of the locking hole 569a is provided with a rib for reinforcement.

By rotating the cover body 1300 from the open state to the closed state, the locking protrusion 1316 is inserted into the guide hole 569b and the locking piece 1313 of the cylinder lock 1309 is locked, as shown in FIG. 147(A). The hole 569a is penetrated. By inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1309 and rotating the cylinder lock 1309 in this state, as shown in FIG. 147(B), the locking piece 1313 rotates 90 degrees, and one end of the locking piece 1313 is brought into contact with the front side of the locking wall 569. Engage. Therefore, the cover body 1300 is locked to the main body frame 3. Further, since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309 at the lower portion of the cover body 1300, in order to fix the upper portion of the cover body 1300 to the main body frame 3, the screw holes that are matched in the closed state are provided. The upper portion of the cover body 1300 is also fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing screws (not shown) in the 1307 and the stop holes 568. It should be noted that a cylinder lock may be provided on the upper portion of the cover body 1300, and the cover body 1300 may be locked on the body frame 3 by the cylinder lock at the top and bottom.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 140, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has the back side thereof at the rear end portion of the prize ball tank 720 (in the case of the present embodiment, after the discharge port 730). (A surface wall) and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740 are the same vertical surface when viewed from the side. For this reason, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part of the back side to the lower side, and it has a very neat shape, so when transporting the pachinko machine 1, the entire thickness is uniform. Since it is easy to grasp, it is easy to carry out loading and stacking work, and when it is actually installed on the island stand of the game hall, at the back of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the back row, it projects to the back of the opponent's pachinko machine It can be installed very smoothly without worrying about the wiring to be installed. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 using the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment also has the same effect as shown in FIG.

In the above-described second embodiment, the reason why the cover body 1300 is closed by both the upper screw and the lower cylinder lock 1309 is the first reason that the cover body 1300 is the same as the first embodiment. Since the covering area is larger in the vertical direction than the cover body 1250, if the closed state is held only at the center of the cover body 1300, the upper and lower parts may be deformed by heat, so the closed state at the two upper and lower positions. Has been configured to hold. As a second reason, as described above, since the contact lower side wall 1306 of the cover body 1300 makes contact with the upper side portion of the payout control board box 1105, the lower side portion of the cover body 1300 cannot be pryed open. In addition, it is necessary to firmly maintain the closed state of the lower portion of the cover body 1300, and as a result, the upper portion of the cover body 1300 must be closed. For this second reason, a locking device such as the cylinder lock 1309 for maintaining the closed state of the lower side (not limited to the cylinder lock, but any locking device that can be unlocked only by the manager of the amusement park) may be used. ) Is desirable.

Although the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has been described above, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has a lower side portion of the cover body 1300 when the cover body 1300 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Since the contact lower side wall 1306 is adapted to contact and cover the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101, the payout control is performed unless the cover body 1300 is opened. The substrate box 1105 cannot be removed from the frame substrate holder 1101. Then, since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309, it is possible to prevent not only an illegal act on the main control board box 624 covered by the cover body 1300 but also an illegal act on the payout control board box 1105 not covered by the cover body 1300. be able to. Even when the cover body 1300 is closed and the cylinder lock 1309 is locked, since the connection operation opening 1303 is opened in the cover body 1300, the test terminals 624b and 624c for testing are inspected. The RAM clear switch 624a can be operated when a device is connected or when software or the like runs away and recovers. Since the standing wall 1304 and the contact projection 1305 are formed inside the connection operation opening 1303 so that no gap is formed between the connection operation opening 1303 and the main control board box 624, the connection operation opening 1303 is opened. By inserting a piano wire or the like, it is possible to prevent fraud on the back surface of the game board 4.

Further, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has a back surface side in the closed state, the rear end side of the prize ball tank 720 and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740 being the same vertical surface when viewed from the side. Therefore, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the top to the bottom of the back side, and it has a very neat shape, and when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, the overall thickness is Because it is uniform and easy to grasp, loading and stacking work is easy, and even when actually installing on the island stand of the game arcade, at the back of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the back row, the back of the opponent's pachinko machine It can be installed very smoothly without worrying about the wiring protruding to the outside.

[2. Detailed composition of game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 156. FIG. 151 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the game board as seen obliquely from the front right, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the oblique left front, and FIG. 154 is shown. FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the game board as seen obliquely from the left rear, FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the game board as disassembled for each of the main components and is seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear view of the disassembled board. It is the perspective view seen from.

As shown in the figure, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and a frame-shaped front component member 601 that defines the outer periphery of a game area 605 into which a game ball is driven. And, the game panel 600 arranged to close the game area 605 on the rear side of the front component member 601 and the front side of the game panel 600 arranged on the upper side of the outlet 606 at the substantially center in the left-right direction in the game area 605. The starting opening unit 2000 supported, the electric winning opening unit 2100 arranged on the right side of the starting opening unit 2000 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 600, and arranged on the left side of the starting opening unit 2000 along the outer periphery of the game area 605. The side winning opening unit 2200 supported on the front surface of the game panel 600, the gate unit 2300 disposed on the right side of the electric winning opening unit 2100 and supported on the front surface of the gaming panel 600, and disposed in the substantially central portion of the game area 605. A frame-shaped center role object 2400 supported by the game panel 600, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 600, and a player side through the inside of the frame of the game panel 600 and the center role object 2400 to be visible from the player side. A liquid crystal display device 1400 as an effect display means that is attached and can display a predetermined effect image and notification information is mainly provided. Hereinafter, the configuration of each device mounted on the game panel 600 will be described in detail.

[2-1. Starter unit]
First, the starting opening unit will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159. FIG. 157 is a perspective view of each device mounted on the game panel disassembled for each member and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 158 is a perspective view of the starting opening unit viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. [Fig. 3] is a perspective view of the starting opening unit disassembled for each member and seen from diagonally front.

As shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the starting opening unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into an opening 600e formed in the lower part of the left and right center of the game panel 600, and then the game panel 600. Is fixed to the front of. The starting opening unit 2000 is provided with a plurality of receiving openings (winning openings) through which the game balls driven into the game area 605 can be received. As the plurality of receiving openings, a first starting opening 2001 arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction and a special winning opening 2010b arranged below the first starting opening 2001 are provided.

The configuration of the starting opening unit 2000 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 158 and 159, the starting opening unit 2000 has a starting opening base plate 2010 fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600, and a first starting opening 2001 at the upper end, and on the front surface of the starting opening base plate 2010. By being attached, the game ball that has entered the first starting opening 2001, the starting opening entering ball portion 2011 that sends the game ball into the upper opening 2010a of the starting opening base plate 2010, and the game that entered the first starting opening 2001 And a first starting opening sensor 2012 for detecting a sphere.

Further, in the lower part of the starting opening base plate 2010, a special winning opening 2010b penetrating in the front-rear direction and a game ball rolling in the game areas 605 on both sides of the special winning opening 2010b are received, and the special winning opening 2010b is provided in front of the special winning opening 2010b. A pair of guide parts 2010c for guiding is formed. In addition, on the front side of the pair of guide portions 2010c, a front cover 2020 arranged so as to shield the front of the special winning opening 2010b is provided, and the game ball received by the guide portion 2010c is from the front of the guide portion 2010c. It is designed not to be discharged. Further, on the rear side of the base plate 2101, there is provided a special winning portion 2015 whose front end faces the special winning opening 2010b. This special winning portion 2015 is capable of receiving a game ball passing in front of the special winning opening 2010b, a cylindrical front base member 2016 extending in the front-rear direction, and a rear base arranged on the rear side thereof. In the member 2017, in the front side base member 2016, a tongue-shaped retractable piece 2018 supported so as to be retractable in the front-rear direction, a solenoid 2019 arranged in the rear side base member 2017, and a plunger (not shown) of the solenoid 2019 are provided. A link mechanism (not shown) that transmits the movement to the tongue-shaped protruding/retracting piece 2018 and moves the tongue-shaped protruding/retracting piece 2018 in the front-rear direction. In other words, when the tongue-shaped projecting and retracting piece 2018 projects forward from the front surface of the front side base member 2016 (that is, the special winning opening 2010b), it is possible to receive the passing game ball and enter the inside of the front side base member 2016. On the other hand, when the tongue-shaped projecting/retracting piece 2018 sinks into the front side base member 2016 (that is, when the tip of the tongue-shaped projecting/retracting piece 2018 is located behind the special winning opening 2010b), a game ball can be entered. It is configured so that it cannot be done.

Further, a base plate lens portion 2021 having a decoration is fitted to the starter opening base plate 2010 below the special winning opening 2010b, and is arranged on the lower rear side of the starter opening base plate 2010. The light emitting substrate 2022 is designed to emit light.

[2-2. Electric winning unit]
The electric winning port unit will be described with reference to FIGS. 157, 160, and 161. FIG. 160 is a perspective view of the electric winning opening unit as seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 161 is a perspective view of the electric winning opening unit as disassembled for each member and seen from the oblique front. As shown in FIG. 157, the electric winning opening unit 2100 is located in the opening 600e formed on the right side of the opening 600e into which the starting opening unit 2000 is inserted and fixed, in the lower part of the game panel 600 to the right from the center in the left-right direction. On the other hand, after being inserted from the front side, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600. As shown in FIG. 160 and FIG. 161, the electric winning opening unit 2100 has a plurality of receiving openings (winning devices) capable of receiving the game balls hit into the game area 605. Specifically, there are a general winning portion 2102 having a general winning opening 2102a, a second starting opening unit 2103 arranged below the general winning opening 2102 having a second starting opening 2002, and a second starting opening 2002. An attacker unit 2104 having a rectangular large winning opening 2003 which is arranged on the lower side and extends to the left and right more than the general winning opening 2102a and the second starting opening 2002 is provided.

The general winning ball portion 2102 is disposed in the upper end cutout portion 2101a of the base plate 2101 and is capable of always receiving (entering) a game ball from the general winning opening 2102a on the upper surface. On the other hand, the second starting port 2002 arranged below the general ball-in portion 2102 is formed by a pair of blades 2106 that can be expanded between the general ball-in portion 2102 and the pair of blades 2106. In the state of standing up vertically, the game ball cannot be received in the second starting opening 2002 by the general ball-in portion 2102 and the pair of blades 2106, while the blade drive mechanism 2107 moves the pair of blades 2106 in the left-right direction. In the state where it is expanded to (state shown in FIG. 160), the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2002. That is, the second starting port 2002 is a variable winning port due to the pair of blades 2106. The pair of blades 2106 are adapted to be opened and closed based on detection of passage of a game ball by a gate sensor 2302 of a gate unit 2300 described later. Further, the pair of blades 2106 are arranged on both left and right sides of the opening 2101b formed on the upper side of the base plate 2101, and the lower side is covered by the ball entrance 2105 whose front surface is closed. The game ball winning the mouth 2002 is guided by the ball entering portion 2105 and sent to the opening 2101b. Further, the blade drive mechanism 2107 is connected to a starting opening solenoid 2109 supported by a solenoid box 2108 and a plunger 2110 of the starting opening solenoid 2109, and causes the movement of the plunger 2110 in the front-rear direction to rotate (open and close) a pair of blades 2106. The link member 2111 which converts into a motion is provided.

On the other hand, the attacker unit 2104 has a special winning opening 2003 in the front and an upper case 2114 and a lower case 2115 in which passages for game balls are formed, and the special winning opening 2003 is located below the base plate 2101. It is arranged so as to face the formed horizontally long rectangular window portion 2101c. Further, the special winning opening 2003 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular winning door 2113 capable of closing the opening. The prize door 2113 has a lower side rotatably supported by a door shaft 2116, and in a substantially vertical state (a state shown in FIG. 160), the special winning opening 2003 is closed so that the game ball cannot be received, and the upper side. Is rotated so as to incline to the front side, the special winning opening 2003 is opened so that a game ball can be received. This winning door 2113 is in a state in which the special winning opening 2003 is closed in a normal game state, and a lottery is performed by accepting a game ball into the first starting opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2002 (starting winning). According to the special lottery result (when the special lottery result is “big hit”), the special winning opening solenoid 2437 (see FIG. 191) is opened and closed. In the upper case 2114, a relay board 2117 that relays a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2109 and the like, and a second starting opening sensor 2349 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting opening 2002 are provided. There is.

[2-3. Side winning unit]
The side winning opening unit will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 162. FIG. 162 is a perspective view of the side winning opening unit as seen obliquely from the front. The side winning opening unit 2200 is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 600e formed on the left side of the opening 600e into which the starting opening unit 2000 is inserted and fixed, in the lower part to the left of the center of the game panel 600 in the left-right direction. After that, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600. The side winning opening unit 2200 has a side base plate 2201 that is formed in an arc shape in a front view and is fixed to the game panel 600, and a lens and a light emitting substrate (neither of which is shown) arranged inside the side base plate 2201 on the upper front surface. The state display portion 2202, the three general winning openings 2203 arranged in the lower part of the front surface of the side base plate 2201 and capable of entering a game ball rolling in the game area 605, and the front display of the side base plate 2201 are decorated. The lens 2204 and the decoration 2205 are formed. Further, on the rear surface of the side base plate 2201, there is a light emitting substrate 2206 that emits light to the lens 2204 and the decoration 2205 through an opening (not shown) formed in the side base plate 2201 to decorate them. It is attached by a cover 2207. The state display unit 2202 projects into the game area 605, and the game ball flowing down to the upper surface of the state display unit 2202 can be rolled toward the general winning opening 2203. In addition, the general winning opening 2203 projects into the game area 605 and is open on the upper side, so that a game ball rolling in the game area 605 can be always received (winning).

[2-4. Gate unit]
The gate unit will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 163. FIG. 163 is a perspective view of the gate unit as seen obliquely from the front. In the game panel 600, the gate unit 2300 is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 600e formed on the further right side of the opening 600e into which the electric winning opening unit 2100 is inserted and fixed, and then the gate unit 2300 of the game panel 600 is inserted. It is fixed to the front. As shown in FIG. 163, the gate unit 2300 includes a gate base plate 2301 having a gate 2300a having a width through which only one game ball can pass, and a game ball arranged in the gate base plate 2301 and passing through the gate 2300a. And a gate sensor 2302 for detecting. Further, a base plate lens portion 2304 capable of transmitting light is provided on the right side of the gate base plate 2301, and a bullet hole type lens 2305 and a decoration portion 2306 are further provided on the front surface thereof, which are base plate lenses. Light is emitted from the light emitting substrate 2307 disposed on the rear side of the portion 2304 and supported by the substrate cover 2308 to decorate the light emission.

[2-5. Center goods]
Next, the configuration of the center accessory 2400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 157, 164, and 165. FIG. 164 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 165 is a perspective view of the center accessory disassembled into its constituent members and viewed obliquely from the front. As shown in FIG. 157, the center accessory 2400 is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600 after being inserted from the front side into an opening 600e which is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 600. As shown in the figure, it is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the game area 605. Here, the game panel 600 corresponds to the game board of the present invention, and the center accessory 2400 corresponds to the center frame of the present invention.

As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the center accessory 2400 includes a frame-shaped base plate 2401, a main lens base 2402 attached from the upper front side of the base plate 2401 to the right side, and a front side of the base plate 2401. And a left lens base 2403 installed on the upper left side. On the front surface side of the main lens base 2402, a plurality of character lenses 2404 shaped into a predetermined character shape, an outer peripheral decoration member 2405 arranged on the outer peripheral front surface of the character lens 2404, and a handcuffed shape. A handcuff-shaped ornament 2406 and a segment display portion 2409 capable of displaying numbers and the like in 7 segments are provided. Further, a left side decoration portion 2407 is disposed on the front surface of the left lens base 2403, and a game ball rolling in the game area 605 on the left side of the center role object 2400 can flow into the center role object 2400. A warp entrance 2408 is also provided. A substrate cover 2411 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2401, and light is emitted from the light emitting substrates 2412 and 2413 supported by the substrate cover 2411 through the main lens base 2402 or the left lens base 2403. The character lens 2404, the outer peripheral decoration member 2405, the handcuff-shaped decorative body 2406, the left decoration portion 2407, and the like can be light-emitted and decorated.

Further, on the lower side of the base plate 2401, a stage front plate 2417 attached to the front surface side of the base plate 2401, a stage 2420 attached to the rear surface side of the base plate 2401, and a stage rear plate 2421 are arranged. A warp passage member 2423 that connects the warp inlet portion 2408 and the left end of the stage 2420 is disposed on the left side of the base plate 2401. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the base plate 2401 through the warp inlet portion 2408 and the warp passage member 2423 can be horizontally rolled by the arc-shaped stage 2420. In addition, in the stage 2420, the rolled game ball can be made to flow from the center of the stage 2420 in the left-right direction or in the vicinity thereof to the game region 605 above the first starting opening 2001. In particular, a chance entrance 2402a is formed in the center of the stage 2420, and the game ball entering the chance entrance 2402a is sent to a chance exit 2418a formed in a lower decoration 2418 described later. Here, the warp passage member 2423 corresponds to the warp passage of the present invention.

The lower decoration 2418 is arranged below the stage front plate 2417 and attached to the lower front surface side of the base plate 2401. Behind the lower decoration 2418, a reflector 2419 attached to the rear surface side of the base plate 2401 and a light emitting substrate 2422 supported by a stage rear plate 2421 are provided, and the light emitting substrate 2422 opens the reflector 2419. A plurality of lighting portions 2418b are formed in the lower decoration 2418 by projecting light through the lower decoration 2418. Further, by controlling the light emitting states of a plurality of light emitting sources (not shown) mounted on the light emitting substrate 2422, as many lighting units 2418b as the number corresponding to the number of the jackpot lottery held are lit and displayed. .

Next, the configuration of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 166 to 190. FIG. 166 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen obliquely from the front, FIG. 167 is a perspective view of the main unit of the back unit as disassembled and seen from the diagonal front, and FIG. 168 is a character decoration unit. FIG. 169 is a perspective view of the character decoration unit disassembled for each member and viewed from a diagonal front. Also, FIG. 170 is a perspective view of the rotary light unit as seen from diagonally front, and FIG. 171 is a perspective view of the rotary light unit as disassembled for each member and seen from diagonally front. Also, FIG. 172 is a perspective view of the upper left movable decorative unit as seen obliquely from the front, FIG. 173 is a perspective view of the upper left movable decorative unit as disassembled for each member and seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. FIG. 175 is a perspective view of the upper pistol unit disassembled and seen obliquely from the front, FIG. 175 is a perspective view of the lower left movable decorative unit seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 176 is a diagram showing the lower left movable decorative unit for each member. FIG. 178 is an exploded perspective view of the lower movable decorative unit as seen from an oblique front, FIG. 177 is a perspective view of the lower movable decorative unit as seen from an oblique front, and FIG. 178 is an exploded perspective view of the lower movable decorative unit for each member. It is the perspective view seen from diagonally front.

Also, FIG. 179 is a perspective view of a part of the back unit as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 180 is a perspective view of a part of the back unit as disassembled for each main component and viewed from the oblique front. 181 is a perspective view of the back box as seen diagonally from the front, FIG. 182 is a perspective view of the upper space forming unit as seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 183 is a diagram showing the upper space forming unit for each member. FIG. 184 is a perspective view of the lower space forming unit and the support box as seen from an oblique front, and FIG. 185 is a perspective view of the lower space forming unit and the support box as seen from an oblique front. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the member disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front. Also, FIG. 186 is a perspective view of the display unit as seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 187 is a perspective view of the display unit as disassembled for each member and seen from the oblique front. 188 is a front view of the game board showing the operating state of each movable decoration unit, FIG. 189 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the player on the right side of the adjacent seat, and FIG. 190 is an adjacent seat. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the player side on the left side.

As shown in FIGS. 155, 166, and 167, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 600, and is separated from the game panel 600 by a predetermined distance rearward mainly in the back box 3001. Position supported liquid crystal display device 1400, character decoration unit 3002 arranged in the upper space of back box 3001, rotating light unit 3003 arranged further above character decoration unit 3002, and left side of rotating light unit 3003. Of the upper left movable decoration unit 3004, the upper right movable decoration unit 3005 arranged on the right side of the rotating lamp unit 3003, the lower left movable decoration unit 3006 arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the liquid crystal display device 1400. A lower movable decoration unit 3007 arranged on the right side and a lower movable decoration unit 3008 arranged below the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and behind the stage rear plate 2421 (see FIG. 164) are provided. It is configured. The lower parts of the lower left movable decorative unit 3006 and the lower right movable decorative unit 3007 are shielded by a pair of shielding members 3010 attached from the front. Here, the character decoration unit 3002 corresponds to the second decoration of the present invention, and the lower movable decoration unit 3008 corresponds to the lower movable decoration of the present invention.

First, the character decoration unit 3002 will be described in detail. The character decoration unit 3002 is arranged on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, has a horizontal length larger than the width of the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and is closer to the player than the display screen 1400a (that is, the front side). ) Has been placed so as to approach. That is, as shown in FIG. 166, when the back unit 3000 is viewed from diagonally above, the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is blocked by the character decoration unit 3002, and the effect image displayed on the display screen 1400a is visually recognized. Has become difficult. As shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, this character decoration unit 3002 includes a mouthpiece member 3015 and a mouthpiece member 3015 which are modeled after a part of the face of the character (specifically, the nose and cheek portions). A light-transmissive eye member 3016, which is incorporated in the upper portion and imitates the character's eyes, and a hat member 3017, which is incorporated in the upper portion of the eye member 3016 and imitating the character's hat. ing.

Further, in the character decoration unit 3002, a pair of light guiding lenses 3018 are housed inside the eye member 3016, and the light emitting substrate 3022 supported by the substrate cover 3021 is provided behind the mouth member 3015 and the eye member 3016. Are arranged. The pair of light guide lenses 3018 are supported by a light transmissive lens base 3020, and the light projected from the light emitting substrate 3022 is applied to the inner surface of the eye member 3016 through the lens base 3020 and the pair of light guide lenses 3018. It has become so. That is, the entire light-transmissive eye member 3016 is configured to emit light by the light projected from the light emitting substrate 3022. Further, below the pair of light guide lenses 3018, a reflector 3019 is provided that limits the light projection direction so that the light projected from the light emitting substrate 3022 does not irradiate the oral member 3015 side. Further, on the rear surface side of the substrate cover 3021, a pair of decorative members 3023 arranged on both left and right sides of the cap member 3017 and an irradiation substrate 3024 for illuminating these decorative members 3023 from obliquely below are provided.

Next, the rotating light unit 3003 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 170 and 171, the rotating lamp unit 3003 radially emits red light with the vertical direction as the axial direction, and has a bottom opening and a circular opening 3030a formed on the top. It comprises a box-shaped base member 3030, and a lamp front cover 3031 and a lamp rear cover 3032 which are arranged on the upper side of the base member 3030 and are divided into two parts in the front and rear. The lamp front cover 3031 and the lamp rear cover 3032 are formed of a light transmissive red member, and when combined, have a dome shape having an accommodation space inside. Inside the pair of covers 3031 and 3032, a light guide tube 3035 that emits light and a reflector that restricts the emission direction of the light emitted from the light guide tube 3035 and changes the emission direction with time by rotating. And 3034 are accommodated. In other words, the reflector 3034 is provided with an opening 3034a through which the light guide tube 3035 is inserted, in the center, and an arcuate limiting plate 3034b that limits the emission direction of light and is provided upright from the upper surface. Further, the reflector 3034 is supported by a reflector pedestal 3033 having an opening 3033a formed in the center thereof, and the protrusion 3033b formed on the outer peripheral edge of the reflector pedestal 3033 is detected by a photo sensor 3042, whereby the rotational position of the reflector 3034 is detected. It is possible to detect.

Further, inside the base member 3030, as a drive mechanism for rotating the reflector pedestal 3033 and the reflector 3034, a motor 3037 supported by a motor base 3036 and a rotation shaft of the motor 3037 inserted into a through hole 3036a of the motor base 3036. Connected to the motor gear 3038, the relay gear 3040 meshed with the motor gear 3038 and rotatably supported by the shaft pin 3039, meshed with the relay gear 3040, and passed through the circular opening 3030a of the base member 3030 to the reflector pedestal 3033. And a transmission gear 3041 connected thereto. That is, when the motor 3037 operates, the reflector 3034 is configured to rotate at the number of rotations set by the plurality of gears 3038, 3040, 3041. Further, a light emitting substrate 3043 is provided on the upper surface of the motor base 3036, and the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3043 is guided to the central portion of the reflector 3034 through the light guide tube 3035. The light guide tube 3035 is supported by the reflector pedestal 3033 and is configured to rotate together with the reflector 3034.

Next, the upper left movable decoration unit 3004 will be described in detail. The upper left movable decoration unit 3004 is arranged on the left side of the rotating lamp unit 3003, and as shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, the upper pistol unit 3050 and the lower pistol unit 3051 (which are modeled after the shape of the pistol). Hereinafter, the "pistol units 3050, 3051") and the pair of upper and lower pistol units 3050, 3051 (muzzle portions (tip ends)) are moved vertically with the horizontal direction as an axial direction so that the pistol units 3050, 3051 can be moved. And a drive mechanism 3052. The drive mechanism 3052 is arranged between the wall-shaped base member 3053, the pair of solenoids 3054 arranged on the right side surface of the base member 3053, and the base member 3053 and the solenoid 3054, and is vertically slidable. And a solenoid cover 3055 that covers the solenoid 3054 from the right side. The link member 3057 has an engaging portion 3057a that engages with the plunger 3056 of the solenoid 3054, and an extending portion 3057b that extends upward from one end of the engaging portion 3057a, and the engaging portion 3057a on the player side. Connecting portions 3057c and 3057d that are respectively connected to the pair of pistol units 3050 and 3051 are formed at the end portion and the upper end portion of the extending portion 3057b.

Further, the base member 3053 and the pair of pistol units 3050 and 3051 are connected to each other via a support shaft pin 3058. Specifically, the bearing 3059 attached to the protrusion 3053c is provided on the left side surface of the base member 3053, and the insertion hole 3065a is formed on the rear right side surface of the upper pistol unit 3050 and the lower pistol unit 3051. A bearing 3059 fitted therein is provided, and the spindle pin 3058 is rotatably supported by the pair of bearings 3059. That is, the pair of pistol units 3050 and 3051 are rotatably supported about the support shaft pins 3058, respectively. On the other hand, shaft pins 3060 are connected to the lower right side surfaces of the pistol units 3050 and 3051, respectively. These shaft pins 3060 are arranged in parallel with the support shaft pins 3058, and are connected to the connecting parts 3057c, 3057d of the link member 3057 through the openings 3053a, 3053b formed in the base member 3053. According to this, when the pair of solenoids 3054 are operated to reciprocate the plunger 3056 up and down, a vertical force acts on the shaft pin 3060 through the link member 3057, and the pair of pistol units 3050 and 3051 are supported. The shaft pin 305 is adapted to rotate between a lower limit position and an upper limit position. A buffer seal member 3061 is arranged on the left side surface of the base member 3053, and when the pair of pistol units 3050 and 3051 hit the buffer seal member 3061 when reaching the lower limit position, the pistol unit 3050. , 3051 receives a shock.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 174, the pistol units 3050 and 3051 have a combination of a right cover 3065 and a left cover 3066, which are divided into left and right parts, and a finger hook part 3067, which is also divided into left and right parts. The shape is molded, and in the inner space 3065a of the right side cover 3065 and the inner space 3066a of the left side cover 3066, a lens portion 3068 arranged at the muzzle portion, a muzzle portion 3069 supporting the outer peripheral portion of the lens portion 3068, A light emitting substrate 3071 housed in a substantially central portion in the front-rear direction and a light guide tube 3070 for guiding the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3071 to the rear surface side of the lens portion 3068 are housed. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3071 is projected to the player side through the lens portion 3068. Further, the right side cover 3065 and the left side cover 3066 are made of a synthetic resin member, but the surface (outer surface) of the right side cover 3065 and the left side cover 3066 are entirely plated to form a light reflecting surface. It is possible to reflect the light emitted from.

Next, the upper right movable decoration unit 3005 will be described. As shown in FIG. 167, the upper right movable decoration unit 3005 is arranged on the right side of the rotating light unit 3003, and has an appearance in which the left-right direction is reversed as compared with the upper left movable decoration unit 3004, that is, the rotating light unit 3003 is the center. It has a line-symmetrical appearance. The configuration and operation of the upper right movable decoration unit 3005 are the same as those of the upper left movable decoration unit 3004, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted here.

Next, the lower left movable decoration unit 3006 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, the lower left movable decoration unit 3006 is arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and is arranged so as to be much closer to the player side than the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400. As shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, the lower left movable decoration unit 3006 is configured so that the pistol unit 3075 modeled after the shape of a pistol and the muzzle portion (tip end side) of the pistol unit 3075 move in the left-right direction. A drive mechanism 3076 for moving the pistol unit 3075 with the vertical direction as the axial direction is provided. Here, the pistol unit 3075 corresponds to the ornament of the present invention, and the drive mechanism 3076 corresponds to the ornament driving means of the present invention.

The pistol unit 3075 has substantially the same configuration as the pistol units 3050 and 3051 (see FIG. 174), and includes a right cover 3078 and a left cover 3079 that are divided into left and right parts, and a finger hook portion 3080 that is also divided into left and right parts. The appearance shape of the pistol is modeled by the combination of,. Then, in the inner spaces 3078a and 3079a of the right side cover 3078 and the left side cover 3079, a lens portion 3081 arranged at the muzzle portion, an annular muzzle portion 3082 supporting the outer peripheral portion of the lens portion 3081 and emitting light. A light emitting substrate 3084 and a light guide tube 3083 for guiding the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3084 to the rear surface side of the lens portion 3081 are housed. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3084 is projected to the player side through the lens portion 3081. Further, the right side cover 3078 and the left side cover 3079 are formed of a synthetic resin member, but their surfaces are light reflecting surfaces by plating the entire surface (outer surface). Here, the light emitting substrate 3084 corresponds to the light emitting means of the present invention.

On the other hand, the drive mechanism 3076 includes a base plate 3087 and a pedestal 3085 arranged on the upper surface of the base plate 3087. The pedestal 3085 has a disk-shaped rotating portion 3085a and a connecting piece 3085b that is erected from the rotating portion 3085a and is connected to the finger hook portion 3080 of the pistol unit 3075. Further, below the base plate 3087, the motor 3089 supported by the motor base 308, the motor gear 3090 connected to the rotating shaft 3089a of the motor 3089 that passes through the through hole 3088a of the motor base 3088, and the motor gear 3090 mesh with the motor gear 3090. In addition, a transmission gear 3092 rotatably supported by a pin 3091 fitted and fitted in a fitting hole 3088b of the motor base 3088 is provided. That is, when the motor 3089 is operated, the rotational force is transmitted to the pedestal 3085 via the motor gear 3090 and the transmission gear 3092, and the pistol unit 3075 is configured to rotate within a predetermined range. The transmission gear 3092 is formed with a protruding piece 3092a protruding in the centrifugal direction. By detecting the protruding piece 3092a by the photo sensor 3093, the rotational position of the handgun unit 3075 can be detected. There is.

Next, the lower right movable decoration unit 3007 will be described. As shown in FIG. 167, the lower right movable decoration unit 3007 is arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and has an appearance in which the left-right direction is reversed as compared with the lower left movable decoration unit 3006, that is, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is centered. Has a line-symmetrical appearance. The configuration and operation of the lower right movable decoration unit 3007 are the same as those of the lower left movable decoration unit 3006, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted here.

Next, the lower movable decoration unit 3008 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, the lower movable decoration unit 3008 is arranged at a position lower than the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and when moved to the effect position (when raised), the lower side. A part of the movable decoration unit 3008 is located in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400. As shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the lower movable decoration unit 3008 includes a telephone main body 3100 that is modeled after the shape of the main body of the telephone, a receiver 3101 that is modeled after the shape of the handset, The telephone main body 3100 includes a dial portion 3102 that is visible from the player side and a receiver driving mechanism 3106 that moves the receiver 3101.

More specifically, on the rear side of the telephone dial unit 3102, an annular lens 3103, a light emitting substrate 3105 that emits light from the rear side of the lens 3103, and a light projecting direction of light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3105 are provided. A reflector 3104 for limiting and irradiating a predetermined portion of the lens 3103 with light efficiently is provided.

The handset driving mechanism 3106 is connected to a base member 3107, a pair of solenoids 3108 fixed to the rear surface of the base member 3107, a solenoid plate 3109 that supports the solenoid 3108 from the rear side, and a plunger 3110 of the solenoid 3108. And a plunger link portion 3111 that reciprocates in the vertical direction according to the operation of the solenoid 3108. Further, a left fulcrum crank 3112 and a right fulcrum crank 3113 are partially overlapped with each other in the front-rear direction on the front surface side of the base member 3107, and the overlapped portion is provided on the rear surface of the telephone main body 3100. Is supported by a crank pin 3117. An engaging hole 3112a into which a protrusion 3111a of the plunger link portion 3111 (that is, a protrusion 3111a arranged through the opening 3107a of the base member 3107) is inserted in the central portion of the left fulcrum crank 3112 and the right fulcrum crank 3113. 3113a is formed. Further, a pair of left crank 3115 and right crank 3116 which are line-symmetrical to each other are provided in front of the left fulcrum crank 3112 and the right fulcrum crank 3113. The lower ends of the left crank 3115 and the right crank 3116 and the left fulcrum The crank 3112 and the connecting portions 3112b and 3113b formed at the ends of the right-side fulcrum crank 3113 are connected by fulcrum crank pins 3114, respectively. Further, a bow-shaped pin base 3119 is fixed to the rear surface side of the handset unit 3101, and the fitting portion 3119a of the pin base 3119 and the upper end portions of the left crank 3115 and the right crank 3116 are inserted via the insert pin 3118. Connected.

According to this, by energizing the left solenoid 3108, the plunger link portion 3111 connected thereto can be raised, and the left side of the handset portion 3101 can be lifted via the left fulcrum crank 3112 and the left crank 3115. Similarly, by energizing the right solenoid 3108, the plunger link part 3111 connected to it can be raised, and the right side of the handset part 3101 can be raised via the right fulcrum crank 3113 and the right crank 3116.

As described above, in the handset driving mechanism 3106, the solenoid 3108 and the link mechanism (the fulcrum cranks 3112 and 3113 and the cranks 3115 and 3116) interlocked with the solenoid 3108 are provided in two sets, respectively, and are driven separately. Therefore, the state in which the handset unit 3101 is placed on the telephone main body unit 3100 (first state), the state in which only one end of the handset unit 3101 is lifted and inclined (second state), and the entire handset unit 3101 are It is possible to selectively switch the state in which the object is lifted and horizontal (the third state). Therefore, for example, if the first state is maintained during standby and the second state and the third state are alternately switched at a predetermined period when performing the effect, one end of the handset unit 3101 is lifted. Only the other end can be raised and lowered repeatedly, and it is possible to visually recognize that the telephone is in a calling state, as in a cartoon world.

The character decoration unit 3002, the rotating lamp unit 3003, and the movable decoration units 3004 to 3008 have been described above in detail. Next, the respective configurations arranged around these units will be described in order.

As shown in FIGS. 167, 179, and 180, in the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, there are a production space that can be visually recognized through the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400 (see FIG. 151) and a space that cannot be visually recognized. There is an effect space that can be further visually recognized: an upper effect space S1 in which the character decoration unit 3002, the rotating light unit 3003, the upper left movable decoration unit 3004, and the upper right movable decoration unit 3005 are arranged, the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the lower left. The movable decoration unit 3006 and the lower right movable decoration unit 3007 are vertically divided into two parts. The outer space of the upper effect space S1 is partitioned by the upper space forming unit 3150, and the outer circumference of the lower effect space S2 is partitioned by the pair of lower space forming units 3151. Here, the lower space forming unit 3151 corresponds to the space forming member of the present invention.

Further, a support box 3152 for supporting a liquid crystal panel 3201 (described later) of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the like is arranged between the pair of lower space forming units 3151. Also, below the lower effect space S2 defined by the lower space forming unit 3151, that is, in a space that cannot be visually recognized, a game that enters the first starting opening 2001, the second starting opening 2002, the general winning opening 2203, and the like. A first passage forming member 3153 and a second passage forming member 3155 that guide the sphere to a predetermined position, and a plurality of entry detecting means 3154, 3156 for detecting the entered game ball are provided. In addition, an illumination relay board 3157 that relays a drive signal transmitted to each light emitting board is provided on the left side of the front surface of the back box 3001, and each of the lower parts of the back surface of the back box 3001 is on the lower side. A drive control board 3159 for controlling the drive of a motor, a solenoid, etc., an effect control board 3160 for controlling effects by the liquid crystal display device 1400, the upper left movable decoration unit 3004, etc. based on the game state, and a distribution board 3161 for distributing signals. Are supported by the substrate cover 3158.

First, the back box 3001 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 181, the back box 3001 is formed in a box shape with the front side opened, and a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward are provided at the front end. It is adapted to be fixed to the rear side of the game panel 600 (see FIG. 155) via the. Further, in the back box 3001, a rectangular opening 3001c is formed substantially in the center of the rear wall 3001b, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 supported on the rear side can be inserted through the opening 3001c. .. Further, a mounting portion for mounting and fixing the upper space forming unit 3150, the lower space forming unit 3151 and the like is formed on the back box 3001 at an appropriate position.

Next, the upper space forming unit 3150 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, the upper space forming unit 3150 includes a spherical (dome-shaped) base member 3170 whose front and bottom surfaces are open. The base member 3170 is formed of a light-transmissive member and is capable of projecting light toward the upper effect space S1 and a plurality of light projecting sections 3170a and a light projecting section 3170a when viewed from within the upper effect space S1. A plurality of concave portions 3170b formed in a groove shape toward the centrifugal direction are formed alternately along the circumferential direction of the front edge of the base member 3170. The surface (inner surface) of the concave portion 3170b is formed as a smooth surface, whereas the light projecting portion 3170a has a wavy uneven surface continuously formed on the outer surface of the base member 3170. It is configured such that the arranged members and the like are hard to see. Further, a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3170c protruding outward are formed at the front end of the base member 3170, and a flange-shaped fixing portion protruding inward is formed at the rear end of the base member 3170. Multiple) are formed.

A plurality of reflecting members 3171 attached from the inside are provided in the plurality of recesses 3170b of the base member 3170, and the inner surface of the light projecting unit 3170a and the inner surface of the reflecting member 3171 are continuous surfaces. Further, the reflecting member 3171 has a shape in which the front end is bent outward and the rear end is bent inward, and when it is fitted into the recess 3170b, the front edge portion is also a continuous surface. The reflecting member 3171 is made of a synthetic resin member, and the surface (at least the inner surface) of which is plated to form a light reflecting surface 3171a on the inner surface. Further, each of the light projecting portion 3170a and the light reflecting surface 3171a has a strip shape elongated in the front-rear direction, and is continuously formed from the front end to the rear end of the upper effect space S1.

In addition, outside the base member 3170, three upper light emitting substrates 3173 supported by an upper substrate cover 3172, two left light emitting substrates 3175 supported by a left substrate cover 3174, and a right substrate cover 3176 are supported. Two right side light emitting substrates 3177 are provided. The respective light emitting substrates 3173, 3175, and 3177 are arranged so as to face the respective light projecting units 3170a, and by irradiating the respective light projecting units 3170a with light, the respective light projecting units 3170a are illuminated and decorated. It is possible to project light toward the upper effect space S1. The upper substrate cover 3172, the left substrate cover 3174, and the right substrate cover 3176 are directly fixed to the inner surface of the back box 3001 (see FIG. 181), and the protrusion 3176a provided at the tip of the right substrate cover 3176 is provided. The right side substrate cover 3176 and the base member 3170 are relatively positioned by fitting with the engagement hole 3170d formed in the fixing portion 3170c of the base member 3170.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 166, a character decoration unit 3002 imitating a character is light-emitted and visually recognized through the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400 (FIG. 151) to give the player an impression of the game machine. At the same time, it is possible to give an impact. However, even if the character decoration unit 3002 is light-emitted, if only the character decoration unit 3002 looks shining, only a part of the character decoration unit 3002 becomes the light-emission decoration and the entire upper effect space S1 as a whole. Will be less powerful. That is, it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the effect of the light-emission decoration, which may reduce the interest in the effect.

On the other hand, in the present example, as described above, the upper space forming unit 3150 that partitions and forms the outer periphery of the upper effect space S1, that is, the upper space forming unit 3150 that surrounds the character decoration unit 3002 has the entire inner wall surface of the light projecting section 3170a. And a light reflection surface 3171a. Therefore, the light projected from the light projecting unit 3170a is directed to the upper effect space S1 surrounded by the upper space forming unit 3150, irradiates the outer surface of the character decoration unit 3002, and the light of the upper space forming unit 3150 is emitted. The inner wall surface 3150a can be decorated with light emission. In addition, since the light reflection surface 3171a is formed in a portion of the light emission inner wall surface 3150a where the light projecting portion 3170a is not formed, a part of the light projected from the light projecting portion 3170a is part of the upper effect space. It comes to reflect toward S1. As a result, the amount of light applied to the outer surface of the character decoration unit 3002 increases, and the light emission inner wall surface 3150a of the upper space forming unit 3150 that surrounds the upper effect space S1, that is, the entire periphery of the upper effect space S1 appears to shine brightly. Will be possible. In particular, since the surface of the light reflection surface 3171a is a smooth mirror surface, the image of the character decoration unit 3002 is displayed on the light reflection surface 3171a, and the gorgeousness of the upper effect space S1 is further enhanced.

In addition, since the plurality of light projecting portions 3170a and the plurality of light reflecting surfaces 3171a are alternately arranged on the light emitting inner wall surface 3150a, the light projecting direction and the light reflecting direction are changed in a complicated manner. The brightness of the entire wall surface 3150a can be increased. In particular, since the respective light projecting portions 3170a and the light reflecting surfaces 3171a are formed in a band shape and extend in the front-rear direction, it is possible to make the depth in the upper effect space S1 look wider than it actually is, and the upper effect space S1. It is possible to further increase the scale of production due to the overall luminous decoration. Further, since they are alternately arranged along the peripheral edge of the front surface, it is possible to sufficiently recognize the scattering of light due to the combination of the plurality of light projecting portions 3170a and the light reflecting surfaces 3171a.

By the way, if the upper space forming unit 3150 is formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped box whose front surface is open (that is, the cross-sectional shape is a U shape), the player has a back surface (that is, character decoration) of the space forming member. The surface facing the rear of the unit 3002) is directly faced, and the left and right side surfaces of the space forming member are difficult to see when viewed from the player side. Therefore, even if the light emission decoration using the entire light emission inner wall surface of the space forming member is performed, the power is given to the player watching the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the character decoration unit 3002. It may be difficult to make an impression, and the effect may be reduced by half.

On the other hand, according to this example, since the light emission inner wall surface 3150a of the upper space forming unit 3150 is formed in a spherical shape (that is, a dome shape) as described above, it is possible to move the line of sight while facing the front. The entire light emitting inner wall surface 3150a can be visually recognized, and even a player gazing at the display screen 1400a or the like can recognize the light emitting decoration of the entire upper effect space S1.

Further, upper movable space S1 is provided with upper left movable decoration unit 3004 (see FIG. 166) and upper right movable decoration unit 3005 pistol units 3050 and 3051 as movable decorations so that they move based on the game state or the like. Therefore, the effect of the effect in the upper effect space S1 is further enhanced. Further, since the light projected from the light projecting portion 3170a of the light emitting inner wall surface 3150a or the light reflected by the light reflecting surface 3171a is applied to the outer surface (front surface) of the pistol unit 3050, 3051, the pistol unit 3050, 3051 floats up, and its operation can be made conspicuous. In particular, since the light reflection surface is formed on the outer surfaces of the pistol units 3050 and 3051, the light projection direction and the reflection direction of the light in the upper effect space S1 change as the pistol units 3050 and 3051 move, The overall brilliance of the upper effect space S1 can be further enhanced.

By the way, when the entire light emitting inner wall surface 3150a is light-emitted and decorated as described above, a powerful effect can be obtained, but on the other hand, since the amount of light emitted to the outer surface of the character decoration unit 3002 increases, the character The relative brightness of the decoration unit 3002 itself due to the light-emitting decoration may be reduced, and the decoration effect may be unnoticeable.

On the other hand, according to this example, the character decoration unit 3002 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction in the upper effect space S1, that is, at the position farthest from the light emitting inner wall surface 3150a, and on both the left and right sides of the character decoration unit 3002, that is, the character. Since the pistol units 3050 and 3051 are arranged between the decoration unit 3002 and the light emission inner wall surface 3150a, respectively, the light amount for irradiating the outer surface of the character decoration unit 3002 can be achieved while the entire light emission inner wall surface 3150a is light-emitted. Therefore, the relative brightness of the character decoration unit 3002 can be increased and the decoration effect can be made conspicuous.

Further, the pistol units 3050 and 3051 move up and down along the arrangement direction of the light projecting portion 3170a and the light reflecting surface 3171a that form the light emission inner wall surface 3150a. The distance from the section 3170a to the pistol units 3050, 3051 and the distance from the light reflecting surface 3171a to the pistol units 3050, 3051 reciprocally change, and the irradiation angle to the pistol units 3050, 3051 and the pistol units 3050, 3051. It is possible to effectively change the reflection direction of light due to.

Further, since light is projected from the player side surfaces (that is, the front surface) of the pistol units 3050 and 3051, the front surface (that is, the light emission inner wall surface 3150a) facing the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400 is irradiated. Even the difficult part) can be illuminated, and effective light emission decoration using the entire pistol unit 3050, 3051 becomes possible.

Further, since the rotating light unit 3003 is provided in the upper effect space S1 and light is radially projected, the light reflecting surface 3171a formed on the light emitting inner wall surface 3150a can be evenly illuminated, and the entire upper effect space S1. The brilliance of can be further enhanced.

Next, the lower space forming unit 3151 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 179, the lower space forming unit 3151 defines the outer periphery of the lower effect space S2 and is arranged on both left and right sides of the support box 3152. As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the lower space forming unit 3151 arranged on the left side of the support box 3152 includes a side enclosure 3180a located on the left side of the lower effect space S2 and a rear side of the lower effect space S2. And a rear wall portion 3180b located at the left side, and a left wall member 3180 having a substantially L-shaped cross section. In addition, the lower space forming unit 3151 outputs light to the left decoration 3181 and the left lens 3182, and the left lens 3182, which is attached from the outside to the opening window 3180c formed in the side wall 3180a of the left wall member 3180. It is provided with a left light emitting substrate 3183 which illuminates the left lens 3182 to emit light and decorates the left lens 3182 and projects light toward the lower effect space S2. In addition, the left lens 3182 is formed with a character-shaped character light emitting portion 3182a protruding inward, and the left decoration 3181 has a housing portion 3181a for housing the left lens 3182 from the outside and a housing portion 3181a. A character window 3181b, which is formed on the inner surface and into which the character light emitting portion 3182a of the left lens 3182 is fitted, is provided. That is, only the character light emitting portion 3182a is configured to appear to shine by the light emitted from the left light emitting substrate 3183. Here, the left lens 3182 corresponds to the letter lens of the present invention, and the left light emitting substrate 3183 corresponds to the light emitting source of the present invention. A combination of the left lens 3182 and the left light emitting substrate 3183 corresponds to the light projecting section of the present invention.

On the other hand, the lower space forming unit 3151 located on the right side of the lower effect space S2 is similar to the lower space forming unit 3151 on the left side, and the side enclosure 3184a and the lower effect space S2 are located on the right side of the lower effect space S2. A right wall member 3184 having a rear surrounding portion 3184b located on the rear side, and a right decoration portion 3185 and a right lens attached from the outside to an opening window 3184c formed in the side surrounding portion 3184a of the right wall member 3184. 3186 and a right light emitting substrate 3187 for irradiating the right lens 3186 with light so as to decorate the right lens 3186 with light and to project light into the lower effect space S2. Here, the right lens 3186 corresponds to the letter lens of the present invention, and the right light emitting substrate 3187 corresponds to the light emitting source of the present invention. A combination of the right lens 3186 and the right light emitting substrate 3187 corresponds to the light projecting section of the present invention.

In the lower space forming unit 3151 that partitions and forms the outer periphery of the lower effect space S2, a left light emitting substrate 3183 and a right light emitting substrate 3187 that project light toward the lower effect space S2 are provided, but an upper space. It does not have a structure corresponding to the light reflecting surface 3171a of the forming unit 3150 and is a non-reflecting surface. For this reason, the brilliance of the entire lower effect space S2 is suppressed to some extent as compared with the upper effect space S1, and eventually the effect image on the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is suppressed from being difficult to be visually recognized due to the glare of the surroundings. be able to.

Next, the support box 3152 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the support box 3152 supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIG. 186) and decorates the periphery of the liquid crystal display device 1400. As shown in FIGS. Further, the liquid crystal display device 1400 includes a box-shaped liquid crystal cover 3190 having an opening window 3190a formed on the front surface and having a size allowing the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400 to be visually recognized. Further, the support box 3152 is mounted on the frame-shaped front decoration frame 3191 attached to the front surface of the liquid crystal cover 3190 so as to surround the opening window 3190a of the liquid crystal cover 3190, and on the upper front surface of the front decoration frame 3191. The light emitting decoration unit 3199 is provided. The light emitting decoration unit 3199 includes a decorative frame portion 3192 having a length substantially equal to the width of the front decorative frame 3191, a blue lens 3193, a yellow lens 3194, and a red lens fitted into the opening 3192a of the decorative frame portion 3192 from the rear side. 3195, a light emitting substrate 3196 for illuminating and decorating these lenses 3193, 3194, 3195 from the rear side, a spacer 3197 interposed between the light emitting substrate 3196 and the front decoration frame 3191, and a front decoration The frame 3191 is composed of a pair of plated decorations 3198 provided on both left and right ends. Here, the opening window 3190a corresponds to the opening of the present invention, and the blue lens 3193, the yellow lens 3194, and the red lens 3195 correspond to the light emitting decoration of the present invention.

Next, the display unit 3162 including the liquid crystal display device 1400 will be described in detail. The display unit 3162 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 by a pair of lock members 3163 (see FIG. 180). As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the display unit 3162 is attached to the base member 3200 and the front side of the base member 3200. A liquid crystal panel 3201 that is attached and has a display screen 1400a on the surface, a frame-shaped liquid crystal case 3202 that houses the liquid crystal panel 3201, and a display screen 1400a that is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal panel 3201 and housed in the liquid crystal case 3202. And a grid member 3203 having a grid shape for covering. Here, the combination of the base member 3200, the liquid crystal panel 3201, and the liquid crystal case 3202 corresponds to the above-described liquid crystal display device 1400 (the effect display means of the present invention), and the lattice member 3203 corresponds to the decorative plate of the present invention. To do.

Further, on the rear surface of the base member 3200, a relay board 3204 for relaying a drive signal transmitted to the liquid crystal panel 3201, a peripheral control board 3207 supported by the board setting member 3205, and a ROM mounted via a spacer 3211. A substrate 3209 and a scaler substrate 3210 are arranged. The ROM substrate 3209 and the scaler substrate 3210 are supported by the substrate cover 3206 and the substrate stay 3208.

By the way, in a general gaming machine, the display screen of the effect display device can be visually recognized by the surrounding players, particularly the player who is playing in the adjacent seat, and the effect image displayed on the display screen can be easily seen. ing. In particular, when the variation of the symbol row reaches the reach state, or when a special effect image appears, a sound effect is generated along with it, so let the surrounding players notice the effect contents and peep Has become a factor. In this way, when the player is peeped in from the surrounding players, it becomes difficult to concentrate on the game, and an unpleasant mood is evoked, which lowers the motivation for the game.

On the other hand, in this example, as described above, the lower left movable decoration unit 3006 (see FIG. 188) and the lower right movable decoration unit 3007 of the pistol unit 3075 are arranged on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1400, respectively. The pair of pistol units 3075 are arranged so as to be closer to the player than the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Therefore, the player who views the display screen 1400a and the pair of pistol units 3075 from the front clearly recognizes the effect image displayed on the display screen 1400a without being blocked by the pistol unit 3075, as shown in FIG. 188. However, as shown in FIG. 189 or FIG. 190, a player in the adjacent seat (hereinafter, referred to as a “peeping player”) who wants to peep at the effect image tries to see the display screen 1400a from the left and right diagonal directions. Therefore, the line of sight is blocked by the approaching pistol unit 3075, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize a part of the display screen 1400a. In particular, since the light reflecting surface is formed by plating on the outer surface of the pistol unit 3075, even if a part of the display screen 1400a can be visually recognized, a glittering handgun unit 3075 and the effect image of the display screen 1400a are displayed. It is difficult to peep at them because they have to be viewed again. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the behavior of the peep player and to suppress a decrease in the game motivation due to being peeped.

Further, since the pair of pistol units 3075 move based on the game state, it is possible to change the reflection direction of light in accordance with the movement of the pistol unit 3075, which in turn makes it difficult for the peep player to visually recognize. It becomes possible to promote it. Further, since the movable range of the pistol unit 3075 is within the area on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1400, that is, between the eyes of the peep player and the display screen 1400a, the operation of the pistol unit 3075 is performed. Even inside, you can always block the line of sight of the peep player.

Further, since light is projected from the player side surface (that is, the front surface) of the pistol unit 3075, the front surface that faces the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400 (that is, the surrounding light is difficult to irradiate and a reflection surface is formed). Even if it is difficult to make it shine, it is possible to make it more visible, which in turn makes it more difficult for the peep player to visually recognize it. In particular, since the handgun unit 3075 turns within a predetermined range with the vertical direction as the axial direction, it is possible to temporarily match the line of sight of the peeping player with the light projection direction along with the operation of the handgun unit 3075. As a result, it is possible to cause the peep player to be dazzled and eliminate the desire to peep.

Further, as described above, the lower effect space S2 defined by the lower space forming unit 3151 is formed on the rear side of the center accessory 2400, and the pistol unit 3075 and the liquid crystal display device 1400 form the lower effect space S2. It is located inside. Further, the lower space forming unit 3151 is provided with a left light emitting substrate 3183 and a right light emitting substrate 3187 that project light into the lower effect space S2. For this reason, the relative brightness of the display screen 1400a in the lower effect space S2 is lowered, and the difficulty of visual recognition to the peep player can be further increased.

Further, since the lower space forming unit 3151 is composed of the side enclosures 3180a and 3184a and the rear enclosures 3180b and 3184b, the player who visually recognizes the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is shown in FIG. 188. As described above, the side enclosing portions 3180a and 3184a are directly opposed to the rear enclosing portions 3180b and 3184b, and the side enclosing portions 3180a and 3184a are viewed diagonally to the left and right. Then, as shown in FIG. 185, since the left light emitting substrate 3183 and the right light emitting substrate 3187 that project light in the lower effect space S2 are provided in the side surrounding portions 3180a and 3184a, when the display screen 1400a is visually recognized. The possibility of directly seeing the left lens 3182 and the right lens 3186 is reduced, and the light projected from the left lens 3182 and the right lens 3186 becomes less glare. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 189 or 190, the peep player tries to peep at the display screen 1400a from the diagonally front side. You will be able to see it directly and you will feel more glare. Further, since the left lens 3182 and the right lens 3186 emit a character-shaped character light emitting portion 3182a, the peep player can visually recognize the effect image displayed on the display screen 1400a. Since the shape of the character light emitting unit 3182a and the effect image are viewed in an overlapping manner, the impact of the effect image is weakened, and the motivation to peep can be reduced.

Further, as described above, the entire display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is covered with the lattice-shaped lattice member 3203, and the lattice member 3203 is arranged so as to face the player. Therefore, the player who visually recognizes the display screen 1400a from the front, as shown in FIG. 188, sees the effect image through the mesh of the lattice member 3203, and for example, in the dot display device in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged vertically and horizontally. Such an effect image will be visually recognized. On the other hand, since the peep player visually recognizes the lattice member 3203 from diagonally front as shown in FIG. 189 or FIG. 190, the viewing angle of the effect image is narrowed by the thickness of the lattice member 3203, and thus visually confirmed. Becomes extremely difficult.

Further, as described above, the character decoration unit 3002 is arranged on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the character decoration unit 3002 has a lateral size larger than the width of the display screen 1400a, and moreover the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the same size. It is closer to the player side than the display screen 1400a. Therefore, the peeping player who tries to peek at the display screen 1400a obliquely from above, specifically the player standing behind the player or the player walking in the rear passage, can also pee It can be made difficult.

In addition, since the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is arranged farther back than the lower movable decoration unit 3008 (see FIG. 166), the viewing angle of the display screen 1400a is narrowed and the viewing from the left and right diagonal directions is further improved. Make it difficult.

Further, as shown in FIG. 185, a blue lens 3193, a yellow lens 3194, and a red lens 3195 that project light toward the player side are provided on the front frame portion of the liquid crystal cover 3190. Therefore, the periphery of the display screen 1400a becomes conspicuous, and it is possible to make it difficult for the display screen 1400a to gaze at the line of sight of the peeping player who is trying to peep.

[3. Main board/peripheral board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 is a block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral boards 4010, and these two groups share various controls. The group of main boards 4000 is configured to include a main control board 4100 for controlling a game operation (progress of a game) and a payout control board 1186 for controlling payout of game balls and the like. A group of peripheral boards 4010 controls the various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and effects on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on commands from the peripheral control board 4140. A liquid crystal control board 3281 for controlling display of an image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 191, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a as a microprocessor and a main control I/O port 4100b as an input/output device (I/O device), as described above. And a RAM clear switch 624a. The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and prevention of fraud. Functions for doing so are also built in.

The main control MPU 4100a includes a first starting port sensor 2012 that detects a game ball received in the first starting port 2001, a second starting port sensor 2349 that detects a game ball received in the second starting port 2002, and a part thereof. Detection signals from the general winning a prize sensor 2014 of each, are input via the main control I/O port 4100b, respectively, and the magnetic sensor 3406 attached to the gate sensor 2302, the general winning a prize sensor 2014, the count sensor 2013 and the back unit 3000. The detection signal from is input through the panel relay board 3247 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I/O port 4100b. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2109 and the special winning opening solenoid 2347 via the main control I/O port 4100b and the panel relay board 3247, and performs the main control. I/O port 4100b, panel relay board 3247, and, via the function display board 640a, the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol memory display 643, the second special symbol memory It outputs a drive signal to the display device 644, the normal symbol display device 645, the normal symbol memory display device 646, the game state display device 647, the round display device 648, and the hold state display portion 3152 of the center accessory 2400.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information regarding games (game information), various commands regarding payout, and the like to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107 described above, and a pachinko machine from the payout control board 1186. Various commands related to the state 1 are received via the main drawer relay board 1107. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to a peripheral control board 4140 of a peripheral board 4010 described later via the main control I/O port 4100b ( The main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 are electrically connected to each other by a harness (not shown). When the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 1186, the main control MPU 4100a shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control board 4140.

The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 1136, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 1136 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply that supplies power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 624a is also output to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107.

Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 1136, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I/O port 4100b and is also transmitted to the payout control board 1186 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Discharge control board]
As shown in FIG. 191, a payout control board 1186 for controlling the payout of gaming balls, etc., a payout control unit 4110 for performing various controls related to payout, a launch control unit 4120 for performing launch control of the above-described launch motor 695, and the above The error LED indicator 4130, the error canceling switch 4131, and the ball removing switch 4132 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 191, the payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls related to payouts on the payout control board 1186 includes a payout control MPU 4110a as a microprocessor, a payout control I/O port 4110b as an I/O device, and a payout control. An external watchdog timer 4110c (hereinafter, referred to as “external WDT 4110c”) that monitors whether or not the MPU 4110a is operating normally, and a payout motor drive circuit 4110d that outputs a drive signal to the above-described payout motor 815. Is configured. The payout control MPU 4110a includes a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and a function for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU 4110a receives various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board 4100 and various kinds of commands about the payout, and operates the RAM clear switch 624a from the main control board 4100. In addition to the input of the signal (detection signal), the detection signal from the full tank switch 916 is input, and the detection signals from the out-of-ball switch 778, the counting switch 812, and the rotation angle switch 855 are relay terminals in the prize ball unit. It may be input via the plate 830.

Further, when the payout control MPU 4110a receives various commands related to the payout from the main control board 4100, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 based on the received various commands related to the payout, and a ball removal switch. When 4132 is operated, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d for discharging (ball removing) the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 described above based on the operation signal (detection signal). When a driving signal is output from the pay-out motor 815 from the pay-out motor 815 or a ball-renting request signal from a CR unit (ball lender) (not shown) is input through the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, pay-out is performed based on the ball-renting request signal. When a drive signal is output from the motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815 or a detection signal from the full tank switch 916 is input, a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815 is output based on this detection signal. It stops and stops the payout motor 815.

Further, the payout control MPU 4110a displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display 4130, sends various commands indicating the status to the main control board 4100, or receives a detection signal from the counting switch 812. , The number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 1150a based on this detection signal. The external terminal board 1150a is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 191, the firing control unit 4120 that controls the firing of the firing motor 695 in the payout control board 1186 includes an input circuit 4120a to which various signals are input and a transmission circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals. 4120b, a firing control circuit 4120c that outputs a reference pulse that determines the rotation speed of the firing motor 695 based on this clock signal, and a drive signal that is output to the firing motor 695 based on the reference pulse from this firing control circuit 4120c. The firing motor drive circuit 4120d is provided. The launch control circuit 4120c controls the rotation speed of the launch motor 695 so that about 99.95 game balls are launched per minute toward the game area 605 based on the clock signal from the transmitting circuit 4120b. . That is, the movement of the hitting mallet 687 described above is controlled.

The above-described handle device 460 (operation handle portion 410) includes the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 as described above, and when the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 410 is touched, the touch sensor is touched. 420 is detected, and when the single shot button 421 is operated, it is detected by the firing stop switch 422. Although detailed description will be given later, these detection signals are input to the input circuit 4120a via the handle relay terminal plate 194 described above. When the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal board 1150b, a CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 4120a via the CR unit terminal board 1150b.

Various voltages are supplied to the payout control board 1186 from the power supply board 1136 in the same manner as the main control board 4100. The power supply board 1136 is provided with a capacitor that supplies power to the payout control board 1186 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4110a can store various payout information related to payout in the built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 191, the peripheral control board 4140 that performs effect control in the peripheral board 4010 performs peripheral sound control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. The sound source IC 4140c is provided with a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c is stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a has various input/output ports such as a parallel input/output port, a serial input/output port, and a watchdog timer (WDT). When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is based on these various commands. , A door frame side lighting blinking command that outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 5 is output to the lamp drive board 3167, or each light emitting decorative board 3606 provided in the game board 4 The game board side lighting blinking command that outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal to the LED of is output to the lamp drive board 3167, or the left rotation light motor 245 and the right rotation light of the top lamp illumination unit 200 provided on the door frame 5. A door frame side motor drive command that outputs a rotation drive signal to the motor 265 and the central rotation light motor 285 is output to the motor drive board 3013a, and a rotation drive signal is output to the drive motors 3037 and 3089 provided in the game board 4. A game board side motor drive command is output to the motor drive board 3013a, a control signal (sound command) indicating sound information extracted from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c, and a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is shown. A display command is output to the liquid crystal control board 3281.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control board 3281 is performed by the serial input/output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 kilo (k). BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs the initial data, the door frame side lighting blink command, the game board side lighting blink command, the door frame side motor drive command, the game board side motor drive command, which is output to the lamp drive board 3167 and the motor drive board 3013a. , A plurality of serial input/output ports different from the display command are used. In this embodiment, a bit rate of 250 kbps is set.

The lamp driving board 3167 outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting blink command to each of the decorative boards 126, 190, 206, 224 provided on the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108. , 225, 296, or the like, or outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received lighting and blinking command on the game board side, each light emitting decorative substrate 3606 provided on the game board 4, and the glass unit 450 of the door frame 5. It outputs to LED453a of the glass decoration board 453 in. On the other hand, the motor drive board 3013a sends a rotation drive signal based on the received door frame side motor drive command to the left rotation light motor 245 and the right rotation light motor 265 provided on the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108. , And the central rotation light motor 285, and outputs a rotation drive signal to various drive motors 3037, 3089 provided in the game board 4 based on the received game board side motor drive command.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a detects signals from the position detection sensors (photosensors 3042 and 3093) that detect the movable positions of the rotating light unit 3003, the lower left movable decoration unit 3006, and the lower right movable decoration unit 3007 of the game board 4, respectively. Are input via the motor drive board 3013a, and the original position is grasped based on these detection signals. The peripheral control MPU 4140a receives detection signals from the left rotation position detection sensor 250, the right rotation position detection sensor 270, and the center rotation position detection sensor 290 that detect the rotation positions of the rotary lights 244, 264, and 284 of the door frame 5, respectively. , The sub-drawer relay board 108 and the motor drive board 3013a, respectively, and grasps the rotational positions of the rotary lights 224, 264, 284 based on these detection signals. Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control board 3281 is normally operating is input from the liquid crystal control board 3281, or the operation button unit 370 provided in the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 is operated. An operation detection signal from the main button sensor 376 or the sub button sensor 378 that detects the operation of the main button 371 or the sub button 372 may be input via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp drive board 3167. The main button 371 is provided with a vibrating body 371c, and a driving signal is sent from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the vibrating body 371c via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 3167. There is.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the side speaker 121 of the door frame 5 and the lower speaker 391 via the lamp drive board 3167 and the sub drawer relay board 1108. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various performances flow.

The peripheral control board 4140 also includes an external watchdog timer (external WDT) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the built-in watchdog timer (internal WDT) and external WDT together to perform peripheral control. It is diagnosed whether the system of MPU4140a is out of control.

[3-4. LCD control board]
Next, the liquid crystal control board 3281 for controlling the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the peripheral board 4010, as shown in the figure, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the liquid crystal control for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data. The ROM 4150b, the VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the character ROM 4150d that stores various data of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the character ROM 4150d that is stored in the character ROM 4150d. And a character RAM 4150e to which various kinds of data stored therein are transferred and copied.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a has a built-in parallel input/output port, serial input/output port, and the like. When the display command described above is received from the peripheral control board 4140, a detailed description thereof will be given later, but based on the received display command. Then, the VDP 4150c is controlled to control the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1400. When operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control board 4140, as described above.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b stores, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a plurality of schedule data corresponding to display commands, non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to display commands, and the like. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to a later-described non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in time series. .. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e.

Upon receiving the display command from the peripheral control board 4140, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the schedule data corresponding to this display command, extracts the first screen data of the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. .. Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data following the first screen data and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. In this way, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data described below from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1400. The VDP4150c adopts a line buffer method. The "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the left-right direction is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is displayed in the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is a method of outputting.

The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state. Here, the “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the liquid crystal display device 1400. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1400, the data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 in a position where they are arranged on the screen and a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as “the order of sprite superposition”). It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". In the case of a small sprite, one character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of six characters arranged in a horizontal 2×vertical 3 manner can be used for expression. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The liquid crystal display device 1400 has 800 pixels in the horizontal direction and 600 pixels in the vertical direction (SVGA). The liquid crystal display device 1400 sequentially displays from the left to the right of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and displays each pixel in one direction along the pixel. It is driven by main scanning for setting a state and sub-scanning for repeatedly performing main scanning in a direction intersecting the one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control board 3281 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1400, the liquid crystal drive circuit 1315b uses the drawing data for one line as a main scan, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 performs the main scanning. Are sequentially output from the left to the right of the pixels of one line. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the sub-scan shifts to the line immediately below, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line, liquid crystal display is performed as the main scan. The pixels of one line are sequentially output from left to right of the device 1400.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 1400 has a built-in backlight (cold-cathode tube) that is turned on by the inverter board 3017a.

[4. Game contents]
The game contents in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be specifically described. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the operation handle portion 410 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5, so that the game balls stored in the storage tray 311 of the dish unit 300 are changed to the game panel. The game is started by being driven into the upper part of the game area 605 arranged on the front surface of the 600. The game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 605 will flow down in the game area 605 on the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2400 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 410, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. In addition, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 600 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the contact of the game balls with the obstacle nails causes the flow of the game balls. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed.

The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center character 2400 is guided to the area on the right side of the center character 2400, enters the gate 2300a arranged at the lower right of the center character 2400, and is detected by the gate sensor 2302. Then, on the basis of the detection signal, the main control board 4100 generates an ordinary random number as an ordinary lottery result. Then, based on the ordinary random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 645 in the function display unit 640 (state display unit 2202) is variably displayed (the normal symbol display 645 including one LED is red, green, and orange). Alternately emitted), a normal symbol based on a normal random number (ordinary lottery result) extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) has elapsed (normal symbol indicator 645 is either red or green) Is emitted). The variation display of this normal symbol is designed to be performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table.

Specifically, if the ordinary random number that is drawn is a “normal hit” random number, it is stopped and displayed with an ordinary symbol that suggests a hit (ordinary symbol indicator 645 emits green), and the ordinary random number that is drawn is an “ordinary lost” random number. In the case of, it is designed to be stopped and displayed with a normal symbol that suggests a loss (ordinary symbol indicator 645 emits red). Then, when the normal pattern that suggests a hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of blades 2106 that closes the second starting port 2002 expands for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and the second A game ball can be won in the starting opening 2002.

The variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the blade 2106 at the second starting opening 2002 may be changed according to a special random number (special lottery result) described later. For example, a special random number (special lottery). As a result, when the “time saving hit” is extracted, the variation time or the expansion time may be changed to a short time. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern is replaced with a different table, and then can be easily changed by selecting.

By the way, in this embodiment, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2302 while the normal symbol is being displayed in the normal symbol display 645 in a variable display, the changing normal symbol is stopped and generated and extracted first. Until the result of the ordinary random number is confirmed, the ordinary random number (including the ordinary pattern variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2302 is temporarily stored and its display is put on hold. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of reservations) is displayed on the ordinary symbol storage display 646. This normal symbol memory display 646 is made up of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs to be lit indicates the number of memories. In this example, up to four are stored and displayed. ing. It should be noted that when the number of stored data exceeds four, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2302 is discarded.

In addition, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 and has flowed down on the left side of the center character object 2400 is brought to the center side of the game area 605 below the center character object 2400 by the side winning hole unit 2200. .. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 2203 of the side winning opening unit 2200 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 2014, the main control board 4100 sets a predetermined value for the payout control board 1186 based on the detection signal. The payout control board 1186 controls the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 according to the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the storage tray 311. It is like this. Also, when the general winning opening 2102a of the electric winning opening unit 2100 is won, like the general winning opening 2203, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the storage tray 311. There is.

It should be noted that the game ball hit into the game area 605 does not win any of the general winning openings 2203, 2102a, the first starting opening 2001, the second starting opening 2002, the special winning opening 2010b, and the special winning opening 2003. In the case, the game area 605 is provided at the lower end in the center in the left-right direction, and is discharged from the outlet 606 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins the general winning opening 2003, 2102a, the first starting opening 2001, the second starting opening 2002, the special winning opening 2010b, or the special winning opening 2003, the winning gaming ball is the game. The game board 4 is discharged to the lower rear side without being returned to the area 605.

Then, when the game balls are received by the first starting port 2001 and detected by the first starting port sensor 2012, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball unit 800 via the main control board 4100 and the like. Are to be paid out to the storage tray 311.

By the way, when the game ball enters the gate 2300a and is detected by the gate sensor 2302 and "normal win" is selected as the normal lottery result, as described above, the pair of blades 2106 for closing the second starting opening 2002 are formed. When the game ball is received in the second starting port 2002 and detected by the second starting port sensor 2349 when the winning is possible after the game is expanded for a predetermined period of time, the main control board 4100 or the like is used. A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage tray 311.

In addition, in the main control board 4100, when the game balls enter the first starting opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2002 and are detected by the first starting opening sensor 2012 and the second starting opening sensor 2349, the first starting is performed. A predetermined first special random number is generated and extracted at the mouth 2001, and a predetermined second special random number is generated and extracted at the second starting port 2002. Then, based on the extracted special random number, after the variable display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 640 is started, it is extracted. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as the special lottery result. On the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode that suggests a "big hit", the winning door 2113 of the attacker unit 2104 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game) occurs, and more game balls can be obtained by winning game balls in the special winning opening 2003 during that time.

In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display device 641 and the second special symbol display device 642 in a mode that suggests a “small hit”, the bell-shaped infestation piece 2018 of the special winning portion 2015 is predetermined. A large number of game balls can be acquired by generating a second special game state that appears and disappears in a pattern, and during that period, the game balls are won in the special winning opening 2010b.

In the first starting opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2002 as well, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642, similarly to the variable display of the normal symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the gate 2300a. When the special symbol is variable, or when the special symbol such as during a big hit game as a special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball wins the starting opening 2001, 2002 and the first starting opening sensor 2012, When detected by the two starting port sensor 2349, the first special extracted based on the detection signals from the first starting port sensor 2012 and the second starting port sensor 2349 until the variable display of the special symbol becomes possible. A random number or a second special random number is stored and its display is suspended, and the number of the stored special random numbers is displayed on the first special symbol memory display 643 or the second special symbol memory display 644. It is supposed to do. Each of the first special symbol memory display 643 and the second special symbol memory display 644 is made up of two LEDs, and the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emitting states of the LEDs that are turned off, turned on, and blinked. In this example, up to four of each are stored and displayed. If the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded.

In the main control board 4100, the special random numbers of the first special random number and the second special random number extracted based on the detections of the first starting port sensor 2012 and the second starting port sensor 2349 are set to predetermined predetermined random numbers. By comparing with a determination table (also called a special symbol variation pattern table), it is determined whether the special random number is “miss”, “small hit”, or “big hit”, and the “big hit” is , "2R jackpot" or "15R jackpot" is also determined. In addition, the random number determination table is also used to determine "probability variation short and timeless hits", "probability variation short and timeless hits", and the like.

Then, the first special random number and the second special random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game ball to the first starter port 2001 and the second starter port sensor 2349 (the special lottery result), "small hit In the case of “,” the main control board 4100 causes the tongue-shaped protruding and retracting piece 2018 of the special winning portion 2015 to project for a predetermined short time (for example, for 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds) and then close the opening and closing pattern a plurality of times. It is possible to repeatedly win the game ball into the special winning opening 2010b (for example, twice).

On the other hand, when the extracted first special random number or second special random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 opens the winning door 2113 of the attacker unit 2104 for a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds). ) Elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have been won in the special winning opening 2003, the opening/closing pattern for closing the winning door 2113 (one opening/closing pattern for one round) Is repeated for a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds), 2 rounds for "2R big hit", 15 rounds for "15R big hit", and so on, respectively, and an advantageous game advantageous to the player. It is designed to generate a condition. After the predetermined number of rounds, for the “big hit”, the random number determination table is replaced with a high-probability time saving table or the like according to the extracted special random number.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, according to the first special random number and the second special random number extracted by the start winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2002 (special lottery) According to the result), in addition to the variable display of the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 640, also in the liquid crystal display device 1400, depending on the special random number (special lottery result) The effect image E is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, a variable display of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows (for example, three rows) consisting of a plurality of different symbols are displayed, and then sequentially stopped. When all the symbol strings are displayed and finally stopped and displayed, the player is informed of the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols. That is, in accordance with the special lottery result due to the start winning, the effect image E that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result is displayed after the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed. Since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are easier to see than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol display devices 641 and 642, the player is generally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. You will pay attention to the design.

As one of the effect images E in which the plurality of symbol strings are variably displayed, a combination of symbols stopped and displayed with one variable symbol string left is displayed so as to satisfy a specific condition (reach). There is an “image”, and the special lottery results for which this “reach effect image” is displayed include “per reach” and “reach loss”. There is also a "reach development effect image" that is displayed so as to be connected to the "reach effect image" and that after the reach display, the remaining variable strings that are variably displayed are highlighted. Further, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can display not only the effect display related to the start winning, but also the “big hit game effect image” displayed during the “big hit” game.

The variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 641 and the second special symbol display device 642 is adapted to be directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 191). The variable display of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the liquid crystal control board 3281 based on the command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. ing. As a result, the variable display of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1400, which the player particularly pays attention to, is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the like, and therefore, a certain one of the lottery results transmitted from the main control board 4100. It is possible to prepare a plurality of variation patterns of symbols for one command in advance and increase the variation patterns of symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Further, the "big hit game effect image" and the like displayed during the "big hit" game and the like are also controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. As a result, it is possible to increase the display pattern of the effect image to be displayed without increasing the load of the arithmetic processing in the main control board 4100, and to make the pachinko machine 1 more entertaining to the player and less likely to get tired of it. Is becoming

Further, in accordance with the effect image E displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a plurality of accessories, specifically, a rotating light unit 3003, an upper left movable decoration unit 3004, an upper right movable decoration unit 3005, a lower left movable decoration unit 3006, The lower right movable decoration unit 3007 and the lower movable decoration unit 3008 are movable (see FIG. 188). For example, in the upper left movable decoration unit 3004 and the upper right movable decoration unit 3005, the pistol units 3050 and 3051 are rotated in the vertical direction, and in the lower left movable decoration unit 3006 and the lower right movable decoration unit 3007, the pistol unit 3075 is rotated in the horizontal direction. It is supposed to be done. Further, in the lower movable decoration unit 3008, the handset portion 3101 is lifted up with respect to the telephone body portion 3100 and vibrates vertically.

In the lower decoration 2418 provided at the bottom of the center accessory 2400, the number of special random numbers displayed on the first special symbol memory display 643 and the second special symbol memory display 644 (that is, the first special random number and The number of lighting units 2418b (see FIG. 165) corresponding to the number of second special random numbers held) is adapted to emit light. In the first special symbol memory display 643 and the second special symbol memory display 644, the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emission states of the LEDs, while in the lower decoration 2418, the stored hold number and light emission display Since the number of the lit portions 2418b to be displayed coincides with the number of the lit portions 2418b to be displayed, in general, the player can easily grasp the number of holdings from the lit portion 2418b, and pay attention to the lit portion 2418b that is light-emitted and displayed on the lower decoration 2418. Will be done.

[5. Explanation about control of gaming machine]
The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of variable display pattern tables. Each variable display pattern table includes a plurality of variable display patterns. The pachinko machine 1 selects one variation display pattern table from the plurality of variation display pattern tables, and based on the detection of the game ball by the first starting mouth sensor 2012 and the second starting mouth sensor 2349, the selected variation display. From the pattern table, one variable display pattern can be determined. The pachinko machine 1 can execute the variation of the first special symbol, the second special symbol in the special symbol display devices 641 and 642, and the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the determined variation display pattern.

The display effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 1400 may include, in addition to a main effect that may include a reach effect, which will be described later, a pseudo continuous effect (described later) that is performed before the main effect. In other words, the main effect is an effect excluding the pseudo continuous effect in the display effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 1400. The variable display pattern may define the type of main effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect. The variable display pattern defines at least the variable time of the special symbol. The variation time of the special symbol is the time from when the special symbol starts changing until it stops. The variation time of this special symbol is almost equal to the time (also referred to as production time) in which the display effect is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the variable display pattern in the change. Therefore, it can be said that the variable display pattern defines the total time of the pseudo continuous effect time and the main effect time. Details of the control of the pachinko machine 1 including such control and the game state accompanying the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

[5-1. Explanation of game state]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, various game states can be entered. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 can shift to a gaming state of any one of a normal external disadvantage state, a probability changed external disadvantage state, and a probability changed external advantageous state. Normally, the external disadvantage state is a gaming state in which the probability varying function and the time saving function are not operating. The probability variation external disadvantage state is a gaming state in which the probability variation function is operating and the time saving function is not operating. The probability variation external advantageous state is a gaming state in which the probability variation function and the time saving function are operating.

Here, the probability variation function is a function for setting the above-described probability variation state, that is, a function in which the probability of pulling a jackpot in the jackpot lottery described later (big hit probability) is set higher than the probability at a normal time (predetermined probability). Is. With the time saving function, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that fluctuates on the normal symbol display 645 is shortened as compared with the normal time, and the probability of winning in a normal symbol lottery described later is higher than the probability (predetermined probability) of the normal time. By setting, the movable piece 2005 is frequently opened and closed, which is a function of increasing the ease of winning the prize in the second starting opening 2002 more than usual. Probability change external disadvantage state, and to the probability variation external advantage state, after the big hit game triggered by a big hit, to the normal external disadvantage state, the number of fluctuations in the probability variation external disadvantage state and the probability variation external advantage state to a default value If it arrives, it can move. Of these gaming states, the probabilistic external advantage state is the most advantageous to the player, followed by the probable variant external disadvantage state being the second most advantageous to the player, and the normal external disadvantage state being the most disadvantageous to the player. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the time saving function operates only when the probability varying function is operating, so the probability varying function is not operating and the time saving function is operating ( Although it is not controlled to the normal external advantageous state), the game state may be controlled to the normal external advantageous state.

In the present embodiment, the “number of fluctuations” is the number of times counted as 1 when the special symbol starts and stops changing, and corresponds to the number of jackpot lottery.

In addition, the normal external disadvantage state and the probability-changed external disadvantage state have different jackpot probabilities, but it is common that the time saving function is not activated. Therefore, the general term for the game state including the normal external disadvantage state and the probability-changing external disadvantage state is also called a time saving non-game state. On the other hand, the probability variation external advantageous state is a state in which the time saving function is operating, and is therefore also referred to as a time saving game state. Furthermore, the stochastic external advantageous state and the probability-variable external disadvantageous state are different in the presence or absence of the time saving function, but the probability varying function is operating in common. Therefore, the generic term of the game state including the probability external advantageous state and the probability variation external disadvantage state is also referred to as the probability variation operating game state. On the other hand, the normal external disadvantage state is a gaming state in which the probability variation function is not operating, and is therefore referred to as a probability variation operation non-gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit lottery is won, and after the big hit game is played, the game state shifts to the probability changing operation existence game state. In this case, after the big hit game, the number of fluctuations can be up to 100 times in the probability change operation existence game state, but when the number of fluctuations exceeds 100 times, it usually shifts to an external disadvantage state. Here, after the big hit game, the game state in which the number of fluctuations is up to 100 times is also called the ST game state. Further, after the big hit game, a period until the number of fluctuations reaches 100 times is also called an ST period.

[5-2. Control processing by main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 204. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt processing. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the starting opening winning process. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing process.

Further, FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game start processing. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start processing. 202 is a flowchart showing an example of a big hit game process. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game process. The timer interrupt processing is executed by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment). FIG. 204 is an explanatory diagram showing a table configuration in the special symbol random number storage means.

In the main processing, as shown in FIG. 192, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes power-on processing (step S1). In this power-on process, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the backup data stored in the RAM (built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a is normal (is the set value when a power failure occurs). If it is normal, the process to restore the state at the time of power failure (process at power recovery) is executed according to the backup data stored in the built-in RAM. If the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the CPU periphery Device settings (normal initial settings, interrupt timing settings, etc.).

If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the internal RAM as backup data. If the RAM clear switch 624a for instructing to clear the backup data stored in the built-in RAM in the power-on process is turned on, the built-in RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed. Further, in the power-on process, when backup data is not stored in the built-in RAM of the main control board 4100, the built-in RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

Further, in the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been activated to the peripheral control board 4140 to be transmittable is also executed on the peripheral control board 4140 when the normal initialization is executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 4140 that the main control board 4100 has started. Even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off), for example, when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, the backup data is stored in the built-in RAM and the pachinko machine 1 is returned to again. When the power supply is started, the power-on process is executed.

When this power-on process ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for game. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by a power supply board (not shown). That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate at different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted to a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board, Supply to the device. Then, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the power supply board stops supplying the power supply voltage to the main control board 4100. Sent. Then, when the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 detects the power failure advance notice signal in step S2, the power failure occurrence process is executed (step S4).

This processing at the time of power failure occurs, when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after the power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the gaming machine is in the state before the power failure. This is a process of storing the state at the time of a power failure in the built-in RAM as backup data in order to start from. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not an interrupt processing but a branch processing executed immediately after the start of the loop according to the presence/absence of detection of a power failure notice signal. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

By the way, when the power failure notice signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, a random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 193, the power failure occurrence process is a process executed when a power failure advance notice signal is detected in the main process. The main control MPU 4100a first makes an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the built-in RAM is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the built-in RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the built-in RAM before the power failure is retained when the power is restored.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the processing at the time of power failure occurs in the backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the built-in RAM (step S4c). Upon completion of the above processing, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the built-in RAM (step S4d), and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In addition, in this process, if the power supply interruption process starts due to the power supply voltage becoming unstable due to a power failure for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power failure”), Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, the above process may not be able to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset unless the watchdog timer is updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is regularly updated while the processing is normally performed, but the processing is started when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even if the power-off occurrence process is entered due to the momentary power failure and the infinite loop is entered, the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on, after a predetermined period has elapsed.

Next, in the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during the execution of the main process, and as shown in FIG. The control MPU 4100a executes the process of saving the registers (step S10), and then executes the processes of step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signals of the above-described switches (gate sensor, starting opening sensor, count switch, general winning opening sensor, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number updating process 2 may be updated in the random number updating process 1. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command for instructing the payout of gaming balls is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

Further, in the normal control process of step S14, based on the progress state of the game, while changing the normal symbol, control the ordinary electric auditors (ie the movable piece 2005 that opens and closes the second starting opening 2002 by the starting opening solenoid 2109). Then, the process of changing the open/closed state of the second starting port 2002 is executed. In the special control process of step S15, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed on the special symbol display devices 641 and 642 based on the progress state of the game, or the special electric auditors (that is, by the special winning opening solenoid 2347). The winning door 2113 which opens and closes the special winning opening 2003 is controlled, and a process of changing the open/closed state of the special winning opening 2003 is executed.

In the output data setting process of step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating the game state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer, etc.), and a drive signal output to a special figure starting memory display (not shown) Processing, and so on. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting an effect command to the peripheral control board 4140 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started to the peripheral control board 4140 is also performed. When the processes of steps S11 to S17 are executed, the register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process ends.

Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, the jackpot determination random number used in the determination of whether to generate the jackpot gaming state (also called jackpot determination, jackpot lottery), jackpot gaming state in jackpot determination Random number for the jackpot symbol used to determine by drawing which symbol the special symbol is stopped when it is determined to be generated (also called special symbol lottery), unless the jackpot gaming state is generated in the jackpot determination Reach judgment random number used for judgment (reach judgment) whether or not to lose with the reach mode when judged, and variable display pattern (variation time) of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display devices 641 and 642. Fluctuating display pattern random numbers (random number for fluctuating time) used for deciding whether to execute by pattern (also referred to as fluctuating display pattern lottery), and controlling the movable piece 2005 for opening and closing the second starting port 2002 to an open state There is a normal hit determination random number, which is used for determining whether or not to perform (also referred to as a normal symbol lottery).

In the present embodiment, a lottery (also referred to as a small hit lottery) for whether or not to generate a small hit game state using a big hit determination random number is also performed. In addition, in the present embodiment, all of the big hits are big hits in which the probability varying function operates after the big hit game (also referred to as probability variation big hits), but when it is judged as a big hit using the big hit determination random number, a big hit pattern By using the random number for use, it is also determined whether or not to make a big hit with a substantial payout (also referred to as a general big hit) and a big hit without a practical payout (also referred to as a special big hit). It should be noted that the reach display random number may be used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol, and the variable display pattern of the decorative symbol whose display is controlled by the liquid crystal display device 1400 may be determined. In addition, it is also referred to as a "hit lottery" to determine whether or not the player has won the "big hit lottery" or the "small hit lottery" based on the big hit determination random number. In addition, the entire determination performed by the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number is also called a special lottery. The decorative design of this embodiment is configured by a design that represents a numerical value.

The big hit lottery is performed by comparing the big hit judging random number with a big hit judging table in which a winning random number is predetermined. The special symbol lottery is performed by comparing the big hit symbol random number and the special symbol determination table in which the winning random number is determined in advance. The reach determination is performed by comparing the reach determination random number with a reach determination table in which a winning random number is determined in advance. The variation display pattern lottery is performed by comparing the variation display pattern random number with a variation display pattern table in which a winning random number is associated with each variation display pattern in advance. The normal symbol lottery is performed by comparing the normal hit determination random number with the normal symbol determination table in which the winning random number is determined in advance. The small hit lottery is performed by comparing the large hit determination random number with a small hit determination table in which a winning random number is predetermined. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of tables can be used as the big hit determination table and the variable display pattern table. Details of this will be described later.

Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, a big hit determination random number related to the occurrence of the big hit game state, a big hit symbol random number, and a normal symbol hit determination random number related to whether to control the movable piece 2005 to the open state. Update. That is, the random number used for the occurrence of the big hit game state and the determination regarding whether to control the movable piece 2005 to the open state is updated at a specific timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment). By doing so, the winning probabilities of the big hit lottery and the normal symbol lottery using random numbers can be made constant, and the player can be prevented from being in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the jackpot gaming state is generated, and the reach determination random number not related to the normal symbol lottery and the variable display pattern random number are updated.

Next, in the special control processing, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processing from step S20 to step S90 as shown in FIG. In the starting opening winning process of step S20, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won in the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2002, and when winning, the processing for updating the lottery hold state is executed. In the variation start process of step S30, the number of reservations is confirmed, and if the number of reservations (total number of storages) is not 0, necessary processing is performed before starting the variable display of the corresponding special symbols. Specifically, it is determined whether or not to generate a big hit game state (profit giving state). At this time, the main control MPU 4100a initializes and subtracts the ST remaining number counter KC as necessary. The ST remaining number counter KC is a variable indicating the remaining number of fluctuations (number of big hit lottery) until the ST gaming state ends. In the variation pattern setting process of step S40, settings relating to variable display of each special symbol and each decorative symbol are performed. Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a selects a variable display pattern table to be referred to (hereinafter, also referred to as a reference table), refers to the table, and determines a variable display pattern of a special symbol. Then, the main control MPU 4100a sets a variable time (a time from the start of the variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 641 and 642 until the stop) set in the timer, the variation time set corresponding to the variable display pattern. To do.

In the changing process of step S50, the timer in which the changing time is set in the changing display pattern setting process (step S40) is monitored, and the first special symbol display device 641 or the second special symbol display is performed based on the timer having timed out. The process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the container 642 is performed. At this time, if it is determined that the big hit lottery in the variation start process (step S30) is a big hit game state, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and it is determined that the small hit game state is made in the same lottery. If so, the process selection flag is updated to "4", and the process selection flag is updated to "0" unless it is determined that the game state is a big hit or a small hit. Further, the main control MPU 4100a performs a process of ending the probability varying function and the time saving function according to the value of the ST remaining number counter KC.

In the big hit game start processing of step S60, setting for starting the big hit game state is performed. As will be specifically described later, the number of times the prize door 2113 is opened, the opening time, and the like are set according to the type of jackpot. Further, in the small hit game start processing of step S70, setting for starting the small hit game state is performed. As will be described later in detail, the number of times the prize winning door 2113 is opened in the small hit, the opening time, and the like are set. In the big hit game processing of step S80, in order to open the special winning opening 2003 and to close the winning door 2113 when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special winning opening 2003 or when a predetermined period elapses. Process. If the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state has not reached the predetermined number, processing for opening the winning door 2113 again is performed, and when the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state reaches the predetermined number, the processing selection flag Is updated to "5". Also, after the number of rounds reaches a predetermined number, a process that can generate the probability varying function and the time saving function is executed.

In the small hitting game process of step S90, the special winning opening 2003 is opened, and the winning door 2113 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special winning opening 2003 or when a predetermined period elapses. Perform processing for. As will be described later in detail, the opening of the special winning opening 2003 in the small hitting game process is set so that the profit to the player is extremely low as compared with the big hitting game process (step S80) in the general big hit. There is. Next, the specific processing in steps S20 to S90 will be described.

First, in the starting opening winning process, as shown in FIG. 196, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor 2127, and when the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor 2349, , It is determined that the game ball has won the second starting port 2002 (YES in step S201), and if the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2349 is not output, the game ball has won the second starting port 2002. No (NO in step S201). When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has won in the second starting opening 2002, various random numbers for the second jackpot lottery (random numbers for jackpot determination, jackpot pattern random numbers, reach determination random numbers, fluctuation display pattern random numbers, etc.) Is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second holding number counter provided in the built-in RAM is less than 4, which is the upper limit value (step S202). Then, if the second hold number counter is less than 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process (step S203) of storing the acquired various random numbers in the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 described later, and The special history storage display 644 executes the pending history update process (step S204) that reflects the change in the pending state. In addition, when the value of the second hold number counter is 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

On the other hand, when the detection signal is not output from the second starting opening sensor 2349 in step S201 (NO in step S201), or when the value of the second holding number counter is 4 (NO in step S202). Determines whether or not a game ball has won the first starting opening 2001 (step S205). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 2012. When it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has won the first starting opening 2001 (YES), various random numbers for the first jackpot lottery are acquired, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the internal RAM is It is determined whether it is less than the upper limit value of 4 (step S206). If the first hold number counter is less than 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process (step S207) of storing the acquired various random numbers in the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 described later, and The holding history update process (step S208) that reflects the change in the holding state is executed on the one special symbol storage display 643. If the value of the first hold number counter is 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

Note that the main control MPU 4100a sends a winning notification command to the peripheral board 4010 (peripheral control board 4140) to notify the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2002 in steps S203 and S207 of FIG. 196. Send. The winning notification command represents how many random numbers are stored as a hold. Even when the game ball is accepted in the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2002, if the random number is not stored as a hold, the main control MPU 4100a does not have to send the winning notification command. Good. The peripheral board 4010 may display the number of holdings on the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the received winning notification command.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a may execute a leading determination process based on the obtained various random numbers, and may send a command indicating the result of the leading determination process to the peripheral board 4010 as a winning notification command. The preceding determination process is performed prior to the lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, the big win lottery, the small win lottery, and the determination of the variable display pattern), and the lottery result is previously determined. is there. The leading determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the leading determination table. The preceding determination table is the same table as the table used in the lottery using the random number (for example, the big hit determination table, the special symbol determination table, the variable display pattern table, and the small hit determination table). In the precedence determination process, by comparing the random number and the precedence determination table, a lottery result when a lottery using the random number is performed (a big hit or a small hit, and a type of a big hit (general big hit Whether or not it is a special hit), a fluctuation display pattern, etc.) are determined (the determination performed in advance of the lottery in this manner is also referred to as “prefetch determination”). The peripheral board 4010 may realize an effect that reflects the received prize notification command (advance determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect is referred to as “prefetch effect”). Also called). In the prefetch effect, for example, when the preceding determination result indicates that an effect with a specific character as a motif is realized, the specific character performs a predetermined action in the effect before the effect is realized. It may be an effect to be executed.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the advance determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the advance determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

Further, the main control MPU4100a transmits a winning notification command indicating the result of the preceding determination process only when the game state satisfies a specific condition, and when the game state does not satisfy the specific condition, You may transmit the winning notification command which does not show a result. For example, when the variable display due to the winning on the first starting opening 2001 is not started immediately after the winning and is suspended, the main control MPU 4100a sends a winning notification command indicating the result of the preceding determination process regarding the winning. You may send it. Here, in the big hit game state and the probability variation external advantageous state, the main control MPU4100a does not transmit the winning notification command representing the result of the leading determination processing, and sends the winning notification command which does not represent the result of the leading determination processing. You may send it. The specific conditions regarding the second starting port 2002 may be similar.

Subsequently, in the fluctuation start process, as shown in FIG. 197, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “0”, and if it is “0” (YES in step S301), the process in step S302 and subsequent steps is performed. If the processing is executed and the value is not “0” (NO in step S301), the fluctuation start processing ends. In step S302, it is determined whether or not the values (first starting memory number and second starting memory number) of the two reserved number counters corresponding to the respective special symbol display devices 641 and 642 are both "0". Since the sum of the values in the two reserved number counters indicates the number of random number values stored in the storage area of the starting memory (random number storage means 4515, 4532 for special symbols (see FIG. 204)), in step S302 If the value of any of the holding number counters is "0" (YES), it is determined that the starting conditions for the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery are not satisfied, and the fluctuation start process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value of any of the pending number counters is not "0" in step S302 (NO), the starting storage shift process is executed (steps S303 to S311). As shown in FIG. 204(a), the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 is provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [4] 4515d), and the first start. The values are associated with the numbers of memories (“1” to “4”). Further, as shown in FIG. 204(b), the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 is also provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [4] 4532d). The values are associated with the values of the two starting memory numbers ("1" to "4"). Each of the storage areas 4515a to 4515d and 4532a to 4532d has a big hit determination random number storage area 4580 in which big hit determination random numbers are stored and a big hit symbol random number storage area 4581 in which big hit symbol random numbers are stored. ..

Then, in the starting memory transition process, first, whether or not the value (second starting memory number) of the reserved number counter corresponding to the second special symbol display 642 is “0”, that is, the second special symbol random number memory It is determined whether or not a random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the means 4532 (step S303), and if the random number is stored (NO), each of the n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage area. A process of shifting various random numbers stored in (storage area [2] 4532b to storage area [4] 4532d) to the (n-1)th storage area (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [3] 4532c), respectively. (Step S304) and a process (step S305) of obtaining a random number related to the second special symbol stored in the storage area [1] 4532a are executed. In addition, the special symbol fluctuation flag is set to "1" (step S306), and a process (step S307) of subtracting "1" from the pending number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

On the other hand, when the random number is not stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532, that is, when the value of the reserved number counter corresponding to the second special symbol display 642 is “0”. Is stored in the n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage area (storage area [2] 4515b to storage area [4] 4515d) of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 (YES in step S303). The random number to be stored is stored in the storage area [1] 4515a and the process of shifting each random number to the (n-1)th storage area (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [3] 4515c) (step S308). A process (step S309) of obtaining a random number relating to the first special symbol is executed. Moreover, the process (step S311) of subtracting "1" from the number-of-holds counter corresponding to the first special symbol is executed.

That is, as for the first special symbol, when holding, similarly to the case of the second special symbol, the value of the holding number counter (first starting memory number) is increased by "1", and the extracted random number, It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the first starting memory number, but only when the second starting memory number is "0" when starting the variation of the first special symbol, that is, the process by the first special symbol. The first storage area of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 "only when the (first process) is on standby and the process by the second special symbol (called second process) is not on standby Each random number is read from "1" 4515a. This control enables the second processing to be performed with priority over the first processing.

After that, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is operating, that is, whether or not the probability variation state has a high probability (step S312), and if it is not the probability variation state (NO in step S312), the probability variation function is not activated. The jackpot determination table for use is selected (step S313). On the other hand, in the case of the probability variation state (YES in step S312), the ST remaining number counter KC is decremented by 1 (step S314), and the big hit determination table for the probability variation operation is selected (step S315). The probability fluctuation non-actuation big hit determination table is a table in which the number of predetermined winning random numbers is smaller than the probability variation actuation big hit determination table. In other words, the probability variation actuation big hit determination table is a table in which the number of predetermined winning random numbers is larger than the probability variation non-actuation big hit determination table. Therefore, as described above, when the probability variation function is activated (that is, when the probability variation external advantageous state and the probability variation external disadvantage state), the jackpot probability is higher than when the probability variation function is not activated (that is, the normal external disadvantage state). Get higher In the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is set to 6/499 when the probability variation is not activated, and the jackpot probability is set to 60/499 when the probability variation is activated. Here, it is assumed that a random number representing one value randomly selected from the 499 values is used to determine whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, but the total number of possible values of the random number is 499. It may be any other number different from the number (for example, a number larger than 499 or a number smaller than 499). The probability of a big hit is not limited to these, and may be set to another value. For example, the jackpot probability when the probability variation function is not activated may be 1/299, and the jackpot probability when the probability variation function is activated may be 10/299.

After either table is selected in step S313 or step S315, based on the table, the random number (random number for jackpot determination) related to any special symbol acquired in step S305 or step S309 is determined as a big hit. It is determined whether or not it is a corresponding random number (big hit value) (step S316 (big hit lottery)). If it is the big hit value (YES in step S316), the ST remaining number counter KC is initialized (step S317), the big hit flag is turned "ON" (step S318), and the process proceeds to step S321. Here, for the initial setting of the ST remaining number counter KC, for example, the value of the ST remaining number counter KC is set to an initial value (100 in the present embodiment), and a flag indicating that the ST remaining number counter KC is set is set. This is done by turning it on. In this "initial setting of ST remaining number counter KC", when the flag is newly changed from OFF to ON and the ST remaining number counter KC is set and an initial value is set (usually when the external disadvantageous state is a big hit) And the case where the value of the ST remaining number counter KC is reset to the initial value without changing the ON flag (when a big hit occurs in the probability variation operation gaming state). On the other hand, when the obtained random number is not the big hit value (NO in step S316), it is determined using the small hit determination table whether or not the random number is a random number (small hit value) corresponding to the small hit. (Step S319 (small hit lottery)). If it is a small hit (YES in step S319), the small hit flag is set to "ON" (step S320), and the process proceeds to step S321. If it is not a small hit (NO in step S319), the process proceeds to step S321 without passing through step S320. In step S321, the processing flag is updated to "1", and the fluctuation start processing ends. The ON/OFF states (set state, reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag are stored in the built-in RAM. The OFF state (reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag means that a value of "0" is set, and the ON state (set state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag has a value of "1". Is to be set.

Next, in the variation pattern setting process, as shown in FIG. 198, it is determined whether or not the process flag is "1", and if it is "1" in step S317 (YES in step S401), If the processing after step S402 is executed and it is not "1" (NO in step S401), the fluctuation pattern setting processing ends.

In step S402, it is determined whether or not the probability variation operation-equipped gaming state (state in which the probability variation function is activated). If it is not in the probability changing operation-equipped gaming state (step S402: NO), the table D is selected as the reference table (step S413).

In step S403, it is determined whether the value of the ST remaining number counter KC is "0 to 9" or "10 to 99". When the value of the ST remaining number counter KC is "0 to 9", the table C is selected as the reference table regardless of the result of the winning lottery (step S412).

When the value of the ST remaining number counter KC is "10 to 99", it is determined whether or not the value of the ST remaining number counter KC is a value of a predetermined type (step S407). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the ST remaining number counter KC is a multiple of 10.

When the value of the ST remaining number counter KC is a multiple of 10, it is determined that the value of the ST remaining number counter KC is a value of a predetermined type (step S407: YES), and as a reference table regardless of the result of the winning lottery. The table A is selected (step S409).

When the value of the ST remaining number counter KC is not a multiple of 10, it is determined that the value of the ST remaining number counter KC is not a value of a predetermined type (step S407: NO), and the table B is used as the reference table regardless of the result of the winning lottery. Is selected (step S411).

The details of the tables A to D will be described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the “predetermined type value” in the process of step S407 is a “value that is a multiple of 10.” This will be shown in “Display effect during ST period” described later.

In the present embodiment, the “predetermined type value” is defined as “a value that is a multiple of 10”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the “predetermined type value” is “20× N (N is a multiple of 1, 2, 3, or 4)”.

In step S415, the variable display pattern table selected in any of steps S409 to 413 described above, the result of the winning lottery (FIG. 197: steps S316 and S319) (the state of the big hit flag and the small hit flag), and step S305. Alternatively, the variable display pattern is determined based on the various random numbers (big hit symbol random number, reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number) acquired in any of step S309 (step S415). Next, a selection value is set as a variable display pattern command that specifies the variable display pattern determined in step S415 (step S416), and a variation time corresponding to the variable display pattern is set in a timer provided in the built-in RAM of the main control board 4100. (In this embodiment, the effective period timer) is set (step S417). In step S417, the variation time set in the variation display pattern determined in step S415 is set in the valid period timer. In the command transmission process of step S17, the variable display pattern command that represents the variable display pattern determined in step S415 described above is a lottery result command that indicates whether it is a miss, a small hit, or a big hit, and a big hit. In the case, it is a hit type command indicating whether it is a general big hit or a special hit, and indicates whether the game state in the fluctuation is a normal external disadvantage state, a probability variation external advantageous state, or a probability variation external disadvantage state. Performance commands including the game state command and the above-described winning notification command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a).

Further, when transmitting the variable display pattern command (production command) to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process, a drive signal is output to the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642, and the special symbol is output. The variable display of is started. After that, the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S418), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended.

Subsequently, in the changing process, as shown in FIG. 199, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is "2" (step S501), and if it is "2" in step S418 (step S501). If YES), the process from step S502 is executed, and if it is not "2" (NO in step S501), the changing process is ended. In step S502, the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 determines whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing, and if it is changing, the first special symbol It is determined whether or not the variation time of the symbol or the second special symbol is up (step S503). Then, when the variation time is up, that is, when the variation time ends (YES in step S503), the variation is stopped (step S504), and the process proceeds to step S505. At this time, the main control MPU 4100a sends to the peripheral control board 4140 a variation of the decorative symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 and a production stop command for stopping the operation of the production auxiliary production device (for example, the speaker 121) that assists the game production. To do.

If any of the special symbols has not changed (NO in step S502), or if the change time has not ended (NO in step S503), the special symbol is changing without being stopped. The process ends.

In step S505, it is determined whether or not the ST remaining number counter KC is 0. If the ST remaining number counter KC is 0 (YES in step S505), the probability varying function and the time saving function are stopped (step S506), the setting of the ST remaining number counter KC is canceled (step S507), and the step The process moves to S508. By the processing of step S506 and step S507, the gaming state is changed from the certainty-variable operation-present gaming state to the certainty-variation operation-non-gaming state (normal external disadvantage state). If the ST remaining number counter KC is not 0 (NO in step S505), the process proceeds to step S508 without executing the processes of steps S506 and S507.

In step S508, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is "ON". When the big hit flag is "ON" (YES in step S508), the processing flag is updated to "3" (step S509). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not "ON" (NO in step S508), it is determined whether the small hit flag is "ON" (step S510), and if "ON" (YES in step S510). Is updated to "4" (step S511), and if not "ON" (NO in step S510), the processing flag is updated to "0" (step S512). In this way, after the processing flag is updated in any of step S509, step S511, or step S512, the changing process is ended.

Next, in the big hit game start process, as shown in FIG. 200, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is "3", and if it is "3" in step S509 (YES in step S601). ), the processing after step S602 is executed, and when it is not “3” (NO in step S601), the jackpot game start processing is ended. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not it is in the probability variation state. If it is in the probability variation state (YES), the operation of the probability variation function is once stopped, and the process proceeds to step S604. To do. If the probability variation state is not present, that is, if it is the normal low probability state (NO in step S602), the process proceeds to step S604 without executing the process of step S603. In step S604, it is determined whether or not the time-saving function is operating, that is, whether or not it is in the time-saving game state. If it is in the time-saving game state (YES), the operation of the time-saving function is stopped (step S605), and step The process moves to S606. On the other hand, if it is not in the time saving game state (NO in step S604), the process proceeds to step S606 without executing the process of step S605.

In step S606, it is determined whether the type of the big hit is a general big hit or a special big hit. Conditions, that is, the number of times of opening for big hits, the opening time for each hit, and the number of winning restrictions on the special winning opening 2003 are set (step S607). On the other hand, when the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S606), the number of special winning openings at the special winning opening 2003, the winning limit number, and the opening time per one time are set (step S608). After that, the processing flag is updated to "5" (step S609), and the big hit game start processing is ended.

In step S607, the opening time for each of the prize doors 2113 that opens and closes the special winning opening 2003 is set to a time that allows a plurality of (eg, 8) game balls to be awarded with a margin. The number of times the prize door 2113 is opened and closed is set to a predetermined number (for example, 12 times). On the other hand, in step S608, the opening/closing operation of the winning door 2113 is set to the same number of times as set in step S607, but the opening time per winning door 2113 is several (for example, one piece). ) Is set to a time that can barely win the game ball. Therefore, in the big hit game processing described later, in the case of a general big hit (a big hit that is not a special hit), it is possible to give a larger number of game balls to the player than in the case of a special hit.

On the other hand, in the small hit game start process, as shown in FIG. 201, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is "4", and if it is "4" in step S508 (YES in step S701). ), the processing of step S702 and step S703 is executed, and when the processing flag is not "4" (NO in step S701), the small hit game start processing is ended without executing the processing of step S702 and step S703. To do. In step S702, the conditions for opening the special winning opening 2003 in the case of a small hit, that is, the number of times the special winning opening 2003 is opened for small hits by the winning door 2113 and the opening time for each hit are set. In addition, the number of times of opening in the small hit, the winning limit number, and the opening time are set to be the same as the conditions (step S608) set in the case of the special winning. That is, the special hit and the small hit are set such that they cannot be visually distinguished. After that, the processing flag is updated to "6" (step S703), and the small hit game start processing is ended.

Next, in the big hit game process, as shown in FIG. 202, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is "5", and if it is "5" in step S609 (YES in step S801). The processing after step S802 is executed, and when it is not "5" (NO in step S801), the big hit game processing is ended. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 2003 is open. If the special winning opening 2003 is open (YES), the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the special winning opening 2003 is a preset predetermined time. It is determined whether or not has reached (step S803), and when it has passed (YES in step S803), the winning door 2113 is operated to close the special winning opening 2003 (step S805).

Even when the set opening time has not elapsed (NO in step S803), the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening 2003 after the special winning opening 2003 is opened is set in step S607. When the number exceeds the limit number (for example, 10) (YES in step S804), the process proceeds to step S805 to close the special winning opening 2003. When the opening time of the special winning opening 2003 has not reached the set time (NO in step S803) and the winning number of gaming balls has not reached the limit number (NO in step S804), The big hit game process ends.

On the other hand, in step S802, when the special winning opening 2003 is not open (NO), the number of times the special winning opening 2003 is opened by the winning door 2113 is set in the big hit opening number set in step S607 or in step S608. It is determined whether or not the number of times of opening for special hit that has been reached has been reached (step S806). If it has not arrived (NO in step S806), the winning door 2113 is controlled to open the special winning opening 2003 (step S807), and the big hit game process is ended.

When the number of times of opening the special winning opening 2003 reaches the set number in step S806 (YES), that is, when the big hit game state ends, the processing of steps S808 to S813 can be executed, and thereafter. Set the game state for the lottery. Specifically, first, the big hit flag is set to "OFF" (step S808), the operation of the probability varying function is started, and the winning probability of the big hit is set higher than that in the normal time (step S809).

If the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S810), it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation (step S813). If it is not a special hit, that is, if it is a general big hit (NO in step S810), or if the special hit is won when the probability variation function is already operating (YES in step S813). Starts the operation of the time saving function (that is, the gaming state is changed to the positive variation external advantageous state) (step S811), and then the processing flag is updated to "0" (step S812). On the other hand, when the special hit is not the special hit during the operation of the probability variation function, that is, when the special hit is in the normal external disadvantage state (NO in step S813), the time saving function is activated. Without making it move to step S812 (that is, the gaming state is changed to the probability changing external disadvantage state). As can be understood from the above description, the special hit in the normal external disadvantageous state shifts to the probability changing external disadvantageous state. In addition, the special hit in the probability variation external disadvantage state shifts to the probability variation external advantage state. Even for special hits in the probabilistically variable external advantageous state, the transition is made to the probable variable externally advantageous state.

Next, in the small hitting game process, as shown in FIG. 203, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is "6", and if it is "6" in step S703 (YES in step S901). ), the process after step S902 is executed, and when it is not "6" (NO in step S901), the small hit game process is ended. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening 2003 has reached a preset maximum number of winnings (step S902). If the number of winnings has not yet reached the maximum number of winnings (NO). ), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 2003 is open (step S903). If it is determined in step S903 that the special winning opening 2003 is open (YES), the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the special winning opening 2003 reaches a preset predetermined time. It is determined whether or not (step S904), and when the time has passed (YES in step S904), the winning door 2113 is operated to close the special winning opening 2003 (step S905). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of times of opening the special winning opening 2003 has reached a predetermined number (for example, 15 times) set in advance (step S906). If the number has been reached (YES), the processing flag is set to " It is updated to "0" (step S907), and the small hit game process is ended.

If the opening time of the special winning opening 2003 has not reached the predetermined time in step S904 (NO), or if the number of opening times has not reached the predetermined number in step S906 (NO), the process of step S907 is executed. Without doing, the small hitting game processing ends. If the special winning opening 2003 is not open in step S903 (NO), the special winning opening 2003 is opened to allow the winning of the game ball (step S908). In step S902, if the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening 2003 reaches the preset maximum winning number (YES), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 2003 is open (step S902). S909), if it is open (YES), the special winning opening 2003 is closed (step S910), and the process proceeds to step S907. On the other hand, if the special winning opening 2003 is not open (NO in step S909), the process proceeds to step S907 without executing the process of step S910. In step S907, the processing flag is updated to "0".

The types of jackpots are not limited to the types described above, and various other types of jackpots may be mounted. For example, when the gaming state is a normal external disadvantage, it is a probability variation big hit, and the opening time for each big winning opening 2003 (winning door 2113) in the big hitting game is short as in the case of the "special winning" described above. Although it is set to the first predetermined time, it may be possible to mount a big hit so that a time-saving game state (probability variation external advantageous state) occurs. In this case, the predetermined round (for example, 2 rounds) in the big hit game sets the opening time per one time of the special winning opening 2003 (prize door 2113) to a time relatively longer than the first predetermined time, except for the predetermined round. The round may be set to a first predetermined time in which the opening time for each big winning opening 2003 (winning door 2113) is short. Also, omitting the above special hits, the types of big hits include normal big hits (for example, big hits in which the time reduction function operates but the probability variation function does not operate), and probability variation big hits other than special hits (eg, time reduction function and probability variation function And a big hit that works). Furthermore, it is a normal big hit, and does not shift to the probability variation state after the big hit game ends, but like the above-mentioned “special hit”, the opening time for each big winning opening 2003 (winning door 2113) in the big hit game. A big hit (so-called collision) that causes a time saving game state (usually an external advantage state) may be mounted while being set to a short first predetermined time. Further, in the big hit game, the opening time of the special winning opening 2003 is temporarily set to a short first predetermined time, but the opening time is changed to a second predetermined time which is long in the middle of opening a plurality of times ( So-called jump-up jackpot) may be implemented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the small hit is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit may be omitted.

[5-3. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 to 209. 205 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-main process, and FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing an example of the 16 ms steady process. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process (step S1100). FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S1200). FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210).

The peripheral control MPU 4140a determines the display effect based on the variable display pattern (variation time) determined by the main control MPU 4100a, and executes the determined display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400, the lamp drive board 3167, etc. within the variation time. Let The processing of the peripheral control MPU 4140a will be specifically described below.

In the sub-main process, as shown in FIG. 205, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting processing, processing for clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 and the like are performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, the process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, the 16 ms progress flag While T is set, a process of resetting (making 0) the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S1002 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S1003) and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S1004).

In this 16 ms steady process, the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 provided on the liquid crystal display device 1400, the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are based on the effect command received from the main control board 4100. , 430, 432, 3014, etc., and the processing for controlling the door frame 5, the speakers 130, 222, 262, 821, etc. of the main body frame 3 are executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S1002 again, and every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms, the above steps S1003 to S1004 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0") in step S1002, the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

Next, in the 16 ms steady process, the sub peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of steps S1100 to S1600 as shown in FIG. In the command analysis process of step S1100, the effect command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S1200, the control process related to the liquid crystal display device 1400 is executed based on the variable display pattern command included in the effect command. Here, in the peripheral control ROM 4140b of the peripheral control board 4140, effect patterns which are patterns of display effects performed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are stored in association with the respective variable display patterns. In the effect control process of step 1200, an effect pattern corresponding to the variable display pattern indicated by the variable display pattern command is determined, and display effect based on the effect pattern is executed.

Further, in the sound control processing of step S1300, control processing relating to the speakers 130, 222, 262, 821 for generating a sound effect (for example, BGM) that promotes the effect is executed. In the light emission decoration control processing of step S1400, control processing relating to light emission decoration by the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, 3014 provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is performed. Run. In the information output process of step S1500, an effect command is transmitted to each of the relay boards 3014, 3016, 3018, 3020 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. In the random number updating process of step S1600, a process of updating the random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed.

Note that the processing of steps S1100 to S1600 in the 16 ms steady processing ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is immediately started from the beginning when 16 ms has elapsed from the start of the 16 ms steady process (step S1100 which will be described later). Do not execute (from command parsing process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the 16 ms steady process is completed, the 16 ms steady process is executed. Start.

Further, in the present embodiment, the random number update process (step S1600) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating various random numbers is not limited to this. Not a thing. For example, various random numbers may be updated by either or both of the loop process and the 16 ms steady process in the sub-main process.

Next, in the command analysis process, as shown in FIG. 207, first, it is determined whether an effect command has been received from the main control board 4100 (step S1101). In this embodiment, when an effect command is received from the main control board 4100, other processing such as 16 ms steady processing is interrupted to generate a command reception interrupt processing, and the received command is used for peripheral control of the peripheral control board 4140. It is saved in the received command storage area in the RAM 4140e. It should be noted that the received command storage area is provided with a plurality of areas corresponding to the order of reception of effect commands, and in the command reception interrupt processing, the areas are saved in respective areas according to the order of reception of effect commands. In step S1102, the contents of the received command storage area are confirmed, and if the effect command is stored, the effect command in the reception command storage area is received first.

Then, it is determined whether the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (step S1103). If the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (YES in step S1103), the variable display pattern reception flag is set. , Is stored in the variable display pattern storage area in the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1104).

On the other hand, if the read effect command is not the variable display pattern command (NO in step S1103), the read effect command indicates a big hit in the lottery result command (in the present embodiment, all big hits are probability changes big hits. It is determined whether the command is a probability variation jackpot command) (step S1105), and if the read effect command is a probability variation jackpot command (YES in step S1105), a probability variation jackpot flag is set (step S1106). If the read effect command is not the probability variation big hit command (NO in step S1105), the flag corresponding to the received effect command is set (step S1107).

Subsequently, in the effect control process, as shown in FIG. 208, one of steps S1210 to S1230 is performed according to the progress state of the game. Specifically, the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) executes the process of step S1210 in response to receiving a command at the start of fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation display pattern command) from the main control board 4100. It The process of step S1220 is executed in response to the reception of the command for stopping the fluctuation. In response to receiving a command for advancing the jackpot game (for example, a jackpot start command), the process of step S1230 is executed.

In the decorative pattern variation start process (step S1210), if the variable display pattern command is received, the setting for starting the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Specifically, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined according to the variable display pattern command and the probability variation big hit command, and the notice effect is set.

In the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220), when a variation stop command is received, a display command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 3281 to stop the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the big hit display process (step S1230), a display indicating the start of the big hit game state or a display during the big hit game state (for example, round display) on the liquid crystal display device 1400 in response to the big hit start command transmitted from the main control board 4100. Control is performed.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a is not limited to steps S1210, S1220, and S1230 shown in FIG. 208, and can perform various controls according to the progress of the game state.

Next, in the decorative symbol variation start process, as shown in FIG. 209, first, it is determined whether or not the variation display pattern reception flag is set (step S1221). The variable display pattern reception flag is a flag that is set in step S1104 of the command analysis process (step S1100) described above and indicates that the variable display pattern command has been received from the main control board 4100. If the variable display pattern reception flag is not set in step S1221 (NO), it is determined that the variable display pattern command has not been received, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the variable display pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221), the variable display pattern reception flag is reset (step S1222), and the variable display pattern based on the received variable display pattern command causes a big hit. It is determined whether it is a variable display pattern (whether it is a hit pattern) (step S1223).

If the variable display pattern is not a hit pattern (NO in step S1223), a stop symbol that forms a deviation symbol array that suggests a deviation is determined (step S1225). If the variable display pattern is a hit pattern (YES in step S1223), a stop symbol forming a big hit symbol array that suggests a big hit is determined (step S1224).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the decorative pattern is displayed on the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in addition to the decorative pattern. This decorative symbol changes with the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the stop mode of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in a ratio of 1:1. This decorative pattern is composed of, for example, a combination of figures such as circle, cross, and sunkaku, and a combination that suggests a big hit, a combination that suggests a small hit, a combination that suggests a gap, and the like are preset. That is, if the variable display pattern is a hit pattern, one of the plurality of combinations set as the big hit mode of the present decorative design is determined as the stop design.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the notice selection process for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect based on the notice determination random number (step S1226), and then the effect pattern based on the variable display pattern and the step S1104. The display command is set according to the decided effect time (variation time), the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol sequence decided in steps S1224 and S1225, and the process is ended. (Step S1227). The display command set in step S1227 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 3281 in the information output process (step S1500). The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control board 3281 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the reception of the display command. When the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the effect stop command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a transmits the effect stop command to the liquid crystal control board 3281. When receiving the production stop command, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a ends the variable display of the decorative pattern.

When the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area is read in step S1227, the contents of the notice type storage area are cleared after the notice pattern is read. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the notice effect based on the notice pattern determined when the variable display of the previous decorative pattern is mistakenly started in the next variable display of the decorative pattern.

[5-4. Explanation of each variable display pattern table]
Next, each of the four types of variable display pattern tables (table A to table D) used in this embodiment will be described.

Tables A to C are used at the time of the probability change operation with gaming state, that is, used during the ST period. The table A is a table including variable display patterns that realize display effects including so-called reach effects. The table B is a table including variable display patterns that realize a display effect including no reach effect. In general, the variable display pattern that executes the display effect including the reach effect has a longer fluctuation time than the variable display pattern that executes the display effect that does not include the reach effect. Therefore, the weighted average of the fluctuation times of the variable display patterns in Table A is longer than the weighted average of the fluctuation times of the variable display patterns in Table B. Here, the “weighted average” is an average of the effect time (variation time) of each variable display pattern weighted by the selection rate in each table. In other words, the “weighted average” is the sum of the values obtained by multiplying the selection rate and the presentation time in each variable display pattern in each table. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation display pattern of table A has a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, 15 seconds, or 20 seconds, and the fluctuation display pattern of table B has a fluctuation time of 1 second (shorter than that of table A). It is either off) or 2 seconds (big hit).

The table C is a table including variable display patterns that realize display effects including reach effects. As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the table C is formed by adding the pseudo continuous effect to the variable display pattern of the table A. However, the table C may include a variable display pattern that realizes a display effect including the reach effect and a variable display pattern that realizes a display effect that does not include the reach effect.

Further, the table D is a table that is normally used in an external disadvantage and that includes a variable display pattern that realizes a display effect including the reach effect and a variable display pattern that realizes a display effect that does not include the reach effect.

The reach effect includes an effect that forms a reach state and an effect that suggests whether or not a big hit will occur thereafter (post-reach effect).

[5-5. Explanation of production pattern]
Next, an example of an effect pattern realized by the peripheral board 4010 will be described. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 determines the effect pattern based on the variable display pattern determined by the main control board 4100. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a advances the effect in accordance with the effect content indicated by the determined effect pattern. In this case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs sound from the speakers 121 and 391 by outputting a control signal (sound command) to the sound source IC 4140c, and outputs a drive command to the motor drive board 3013a to cause the pistol unit 3075 to operate. The liquid crystal control board 3281 is operated to output a display command to display an image on the liquid crystal display device 1400.

210 and 211 are tables showing a list of effect patterns (the table of FIG. 211 shows a continuation of the table of FIG. 210). In this table, numbers indicating types of effect patterns, reach types, effect names, winnings (hit lottery results), selection ratios of normal patterns (%), and selection ratios of pseudo two patterns (%) Correspondence between the selection ratio (%) of the pseudo three patterns, the selection ratio (%) of the pseudo four patterns (the total of the selection ratios of these four types is 100%), and the variation time (seconds) of the main effect. Relationships are shown. This list shows an example of the effect pattern determined by the peripheral control MPU 4140a based on the variable display pattern that can be determined according to each of the above-described tables A to D. For example, an effect pattern in which the reach type includes “ST” is a pattern that can be executed in the ST period described above, and shows an effect pattern that can be determined according to any of the tables A to C. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 210 and 211, the numbers 66 to 71 show the effect patterns of the table A, the numbers 72 and 73 show the effect patterns of the table B, and the numbers 74 to 79 are the effect patterns of the table C. Is shown. The other variable display patterns show the effect patterns of the table D.

The reach type indicates the type of reach effect included in the main effect. In the present embodiment, the pattern in which the reach type is “normal” or “ST_B” does not include the reach effect. The effect name indicates the name (content) of the main effect. The winning result indicates the result of the winning lottery (any one of big hit, out, and small hit). The effect pattern of “win” is “big hit” indicates a pattern that can be selected when the result of the winning lottery is “big hit”, and the effect pattern of “win” is “small hit” is the result of the win lottery is “small”. The effect patterns that can be selected in the case of "winning" are shown, and the effect patterns in which "winning" is "off" show patterns that can be selected when the result of the winning lottery is "out of range".

“Normal”, “pseudo 2”, “pseudo 3”, and “pseudo 4” indicate the number of so-called pseudo continuous effects (also referred to as pseudo variable effects). "Normal" indicates a pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is not performed, and "Pseudo 2" indicates a pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed once (that is, a pattern in which the variation of the decorative design appears to be performed twice). , "Pseudo 3" indicates a pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed twice (that is, a pattern in which the variation of the decorative pattern appears to be performed three times), and "pseudo 4" is performed in the pseudo continuous effect three times. The pattern (that is, the pattern in which the variation of the decorative pattern appears to be performed three times) is shown. In the table, selection ratios (%) of the respective patterns of “normal”, “pseudo 2”, “pseudo 3” and “pseudo 4” are shown. For example, when the pattern No. 8 is selected, more specifically, the ratio of the pattern "normal (the number of times of pseudo continuous effect=0)" is selected is 70%, and "pseudo 2 (pseudo continuous effect)" is selected. The ratio of selecting the pattern of "the number of effects=1)" is 25%, the ratio of selecting the pattern of "pseudo 3 (the number of times of pseudo continuous effect=2)" is 5%, and the ratio of "pseudo 4( The ratio of selecting the pattern of “number of times of pseudo continuous production=3)” is 0%. The peripheral control MPU 4140a selects one of the effect patterns and the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect based on the variable display pattern indicated by the variable display pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100, and determines one effect pattern.

It should be noted that the pseudo continuous effect (pseudo variable effect) is an effect in which after the variation of the decorative design, the player is shown to the variation of the decorative design as if the variation of the decorative design ends and the variation of the decorative design is performed again. The mode of the pseudo-reproduction may be various modes, for example, the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in at least one decorative design row of the plurality of decorative design rows, and then the decorative design in the decorative design row. May be varied. Further, the decorative design may be a design representing a number, an alphabet, a symbol, a character, or the like, and may be a design having a sufficient size that a player can easily recognize.

Further, in the tables of FIGS. 210 and 211, in a plurality of patterns in which the remaining portions are the same except for the portion indicating the lottery result in the effect name (departure, win, small hit), at least a part of the effect (effect The effect part within a predetermined period including the start timing) is common. For example, in each of the 22nd effect pattern (missing shooting) and the 23rd effect pattern (per shooting), almost the same effect using the shooting as a motif is realized. The same applies to effect patterns that realize other kinds of effects.

"Effect time of main effect" shown in the tables of FIGS. 210 and 211 indicates effect time when the above-described pseudo continuous effect is not performed. In the effect pattern (pseudo 2) in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed once, the effect time is a time obtained by adding a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) to the effect time of the main effect. In the effect pattern (pseudo 3) in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed twice, the effect time is a time obtained by adding a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) to the effect time of the main effect. In the effect pattern (pseudo 4) in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed three times, the effect time is a time obtained by adding a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to the effect time of the main effect.

[5-6. Explanation of command]
FIG. 212 is a table showing an example of commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a). The command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) in the command transmission processing (step S17) of FIG. 194 will be described below with reference to FIG. 212. In FIG. 212, “STTS” indicates the type of command (also referred to as command type), and “MODE” indicates a specific command pattern. The commands whose command types are “10H”, “11H”, “12H”, “13H”, “20H”, “21H”, “22H”, and “23H” are the above-mentioned variable display pattern commands. The commands whose command types are "30H" and "40H" are the lottery result commands described above. The commands whose command types are "50H" and "60H" are the above-mentioned production stop (variation stop) commands. The commands having the command types “70H”, “72H”, “73H”, “75H”, “76H”, and “77H” are the winning notification commands described above.

The command of the command type "10H" is transmitted at the start of fluctuation, and is a demonstration pattern that is synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the demonstration pattern in which the pseudo continuous production is "normal" is started to be demonstrated on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like. It is a command to instruct to do. “MODE” specifies one of the effect patterns 106 in FIGS. 210 and 211.

The command of command type "11H" is transmitted at the start of fluctuation, and is a demonstration pattern that is synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol. It is a command that instructs to start. “MODE” specifies one of the effect patterns 106 in FIGS. 210 and 211.

The command of command type "12H" is transmitted at the start of fluctuation, and is a demonstration pattern that is synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol. It is a command that instructs to start. “MODE” specifies one of the effect patterns 106 in FIGS. 210 and 211.

The command of command type “13H” is transmitted at the start of fluctuation, and is a demonstration pattern that is synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the demonstration pattern in which the pseudo continuous production is “pseudo 4” is demonstrated on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like. It is a command that instructs to start. “MODE” specifies one of the effect patterns 106 in FIGS. 210 and 211.

The command of command type “20H” is transmitted at the start of fluctuation, and is a demonstration pattern that is synchronized with the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and the demonstration pattern in which the pseudo continuous production is “normal” is started to be demonstrated on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like. It is a command to instruct to do. “MODE” specifies one of the effect patterns 106 in FIGS. 210 and 211.

The command of command type “21H” is transmitted at the start of fluctuation, and is a demonstration pattern that is synchronized with the fluctuation of the second special symbol. It is a command that instructs to start. “MODE” specifies one of the effect patterns 106 in FIGS. 210 and 211.

The command of the command type “22H” is transmitted at the start of fluctuation, and is a demonstration pattern that is synchronized with the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and the demonstration pattern in which the pseudo continuous production is “pseudo 3” is demonstrated on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like. It is a command that instructs to start. “MODE” specifies one of the effect patterns 106 in FIGS. 210 and 211.

The command of command type "23H" is transmitted at the start of fluctuation, and is a demonstration pattern that is synchronized with the fluctuation of the second special symbol. It is a command that instructs to start. “MODE” specifies one of the effect patterns 106 in FIGS. 210 and 211.

When transmitting the variable display pattern command, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has the command types of “10H”, “11H”, “12H”, “13H”, “20H”, “21H”, “22H”. , And “23H”, one command is selected according to the situation and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

The command with the command type “30H” is transmitted at the start of fluctuation, and is a command for instructing whether the lottery result associated with the detection of the game ball winning the first starting opening 2001 is a miss, a small hit, or a big hit. Is. Specifically, the command having the command type “30H” and the command pattern “01H” is a command for instructing that the lottery result is out of order. The command having the command type “30H” and the command pattern “02H” is a command for instructing that the lottery result is a small hit. The command having the command type “30H” and the command pattern “03H” is a command (probable variation big hit command) that indicates that the lottery result is a big hit.

The command of the command type “40H” is transmitted at the start of fluctuation, and is a command for instructing whether the lottery result associated with the detection of the game ball winning the second starting opening 2002 is a miss, a small hit, or a big hit. Is. Specifically, the command having the command type “40H” and the command pattern “01H” is a command for instructing that the lottery result is out of order. The command having the command type “40H” and the command pattern “02H” is a command for instructing that the lottery result is a small hit. The command having the command type “40H” and the command pattern “03H” is a command for instructing that the lottery result is a big hit.

When transmitting the lottery result command, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 selects one command from the commands with the command type “30H” and the command type “40H” according to the situation. Then, the information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

The command having the command type "50H" is an effect pattern that is transmitted when the variable time set in the timer in the process of step S417 in FIG. 198 is up and is synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol. This is a command for instructing the display device 1400 or the like to end the effect pattern being demonstrated.

The command having the command type "60H" is an effect pattern that is transmitted when the variable time set in the timer in the process of step S417 in FIG. 198 is up and is synchronized with the fluctuation of the second special symbol. This is a command for instructing the display device 1400 or the like to end the effect pattern being demonstrated.

When transmitting the production stop command, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 selects one command from the commands having the command type “50H” and the command type “60H” according to the situation. , To the peripheral control board 4140.

The command of the command type “70H” is transmitted when a game ball that has won the starting opening is detected, and an effect (starting opening winning effect) that informs the player that the game ball has won the starting opening is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is a command to instruct to start the demonstration. Specifically, the command having the command type of “70H” and the command pattern of “01H” is displayed on the liquid crystal display of the starting mouth winning effect that informs the player that the game ball has won in the first starting opening 2001. This is a command for instructing the device 1400 or the like to start a demonstration. A command having a command type of "70H" and a command pattern of "02H" starts a demonstration of a start mouth winning effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like, which informs the player that a game ball has won in the second start opening 2002. It is a command to instruct to do.

The command of the command type "72H", when shifting the hold history related to the first special symbol (FIG. 197: step S308), and the value of the number-of-holds counter corresponding to the first special symbol display 641 is 3 or less. This is a command that is transmitted when a game ball wins the first starting opening 2001 in the state and instructs the liquid crystal display device 1400 to display the number of reserved balls (0 to 4) of the first special symbol.

The command of the command type “73H” is when shifting the hold history relating to the second special symbol (FIG. 197: step S304), and the value of the hold number counter corresponding to the second special symbol display 642 is 3 or less. It is a command that is transmitted when a game ball wins the second starting opening 2002 in the state, and is an instruction to display the number of reserved balls (0 to 4) of the second special symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1400.

The command with the command type “75H” is transmitted when a game ball that has won a prize in the starting openings 2001 and 2002 is detected, and the preceding determination result associated with the detection of a game ball that has won a prize in the starting openings 2001 and 2002 is missed, and a small hit. , And a big hit. Specifically, a command having a command type of "75H" and a command pattern of "01H" is a command notifying that the lottery result is out of order. The command having the command type “75H” and the command pattern “02H” is a command notifying that the lottery result is a small hit. The command having the command type “75H” and the command pattern “03H” is a command notifying that the lottery result is a big hit.

The commands with command types “76H” and “77H” are commands that are transmitted when a game ball that has won a prize in the starting openings 2001 and 2002 is detected and that notifies the preceding determination result (variable display pattern). Specifically, the command having the command type “76H” is a command for notifying a variable display pattern corresponding to the main effect of the display effect demonstrated on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The command having the command type of “77H” and the command pattern of “01H” is a command for notifying the variable display pattern of which the pseudo continuous effect is “normal”. The command having the command type “77H” and the command pattern “02H” is a command for notifying the variable display pattern having the pseudo-simulation effect “pseudo 2”. The command having the command type of “77H” and the command pattern of “03H” is a command for notifying the variable display pattern of the pseudo continuous effect of “pseudo 3”. The command having the command type “77H” and the command pattern “04H” is a command for notifying the variable display pattern having the pseudo-simulation effect “pseudo 4”.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 can transmit a command with a command type of “70H” as a winning notification command, and when transmitting a command for notifying a variable display pattern in the winning notification command, the above command type Determines the command of "76H" and the command of which the command type is "77H", and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 4140.

[5-7. Display effect during ST period]
Next, the display effect during the ST period (during the ST game state) will be described. In the present embodiment, the ST period is continued until the number of fluctuations reaches 100 times. As described with reference to FIG. 198, three types of tables A, B, and C for specifying the variable display pattern are used properly during this ST period. First, an outline of display effects in the liquid crystal display device 1400 will be described, and subsequently, display effects realized according to each table will be described.

FIG. 213 is a diagram showing an example of display effects on the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400. The display screen 1400a is provided with three symbol stop areas 1400L, 1400M, 1400R. The peripheral control MPU 4140a performs a variable display and a stop display of the decorative symbol in each symbol stop area 1400L, 1400M, 1400R. In the present embodiment, a decorative design representing a numerical value is displayed. The combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in each of the symbol stop areas 1400L, 1400M, 1400R after the variation of the decorative symbols starts suggests the result of the winning lottery. When the result of the hit lottery is "big hit", the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the three symbol stop areas 1400L, 1400M, 1400R (so-called doublet). When the result of the hit lottery is not “big hit”, the decorative symbol different from the other symbol stop regions is stopped and displayed in at least one symbol stop region. Hereinafter, the process of stopping and displaying the decorative symbol is also referred to as “symbol stop process”.

<Display effect until the number of remaining fluctuations (lottery) in the ST period reaches 10>
When the value of the fluctuation (ST remaining number counter KC (see FIG. 197: S317)) between the start of the ST period after the jackpot game and the number of remaining fluctuations (lottery) of the ST period is 10 is 10 to 99 198: Step 403: "10-99") will be described.

Pattern without reach production:
As shown in FIG. 198, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 does not determine that the value of the ST remaining number counter KC is a value of a predetermined type (“a value that is a multiple of 10” as described above) (step 407: No. In this case, also referred to as the first case), the table B is selected as the reference table (step 411), and the variable display pattern is determined based on the table B (step 415). In the first case (i.e., the number of remaining fluctuations in the ST period is 11 to 19, 21 to 29, 31 to 39, 41 to 49, 51 to 59, 61 to 69, 71 to 79, 81 to 89, 91 to 99). In either case), the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the display effect that does not include the reach effect in accordance with the variable display pattern determined with reference to the table B. Further, in the first case, the combination mode of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the display screen 1400a is definitely or tentatively stopped so as to be the same as the value of the ST remaining number counter KC. In other words, the player is informed of the remaining number of lottery (also referred to as the actual number) in which the ST period (ST game state) can be continued, depending on the combination mode of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the display screen 1400a in the first case. Get (that is, the countdown of the remaining lottery number progresses as the game (lottery) progresses).

For example, when the remaining lottery number that the ST period can continue is 99 times (that is, when the ST remaining number counter KC is 99), as shown in FIG. 213(a), without performing reach production, Decorative design "0" in the left design stop area 1400L, decorative design "9" in the middle design stop area 1400M, decorative design "9" in the right design stop area 1400R, and the combination mode of the decorative design is "099". Become. Further, when the remaining lottery number that the ST period can continue is 98 times (that is, when the ST remaining number counter KC is 98), as shown in FIG. 213(b), without performing reach production, The left design stop area 1400L has a decorative design "0", the middle design stop area 1400M has a decorative design "9", and the right design stop area 1400R has a decorative design "8" displayed in a stopped manner, and the decorative design combination mode is "098". Become.

When the result of the hit lottery is not a big hit, the symbol stop processing is performed in all the symbol stop areas 1400L, 1400M, 1400R in a mode showing the remaining lottery number that the ST period can continue, and the display effect is finished. Yes (stop changing).

When the winning lottery is a big hit, as in the case where the winning lottery is out of order, in all the symbol stop areas 1400L, 1400M, 1400R, the decorative symbol is a pattern showing the remaining number of times the ST period can be continued. It is temporarily displayed. Subsequently, the decorative symbol representing a numerical value different from “zero” starts changing, and the decorative symbol indicating “zero” is stopped and displayed in the symbol stop area where the decorative symbol starts changing. As a result, in all the symbol stop areas 1400L, 1400M, 1400R, the decorative symbol representing "zero" is stopped and displayed. This notifies the player of the big hit. Then, the display effect ends (variation stop).

Pattern with reach production:
As shown in FIG. 198, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a value of the ST remaining number counter KC of a predetermined type value (“a value that is a multiple of 10”) (step 407: YES. In this case, the table A is selected as a reference table (step 409), and the variable display pattern is determined based on the table A (step 415). Therefore, in this second case (that is, when the number of remaining fluctuations in the ST period is any of 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90), the peripheral control MPU 4140a A display effect including a reach effect is executed according to the variable display pattern determined with reference to A. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect is performed every 10 changes in the display effect until the number of remaining fluctuations in the ST period reaches 10.

FIG. 214 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern of a display effect including a reach effect. In the figure, three patterns PT1 to PT3 are shown. The first pattern PT1 shows the 66th and 69th patterns shown in FIG. 211, the second pattern PT2 shows the 67th and 70th patterns shown in FIG. 211, and the third pattern PT3 shows the FIG. 211. The 68th and 71st patterns are shown.

First, the first pattern PT1 will be described. Peripheral control MPU4140a, first, in the three symbol stop areas 1400L, 1400M, 1400R, start changing the decorative symbol (step KAs). Next, the decorative symbols are provisionally stopped and displayed in each of the symbol stop regions 1400L, 1400M, 1400R so as to represent the number of remaining fluctuations in the ST period (step KAp1). For example, when the number of remaining fluctuations in the ST period is "90", the decorative symbol combination of "090" is displayed. At this time, it is preferable that the decorative pattern does not completely stop but slowly rocks. In this way, the player can easily understand that the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed has not been finalized. Next, as shown in FIG. 213(c), the peripheral control MPU 4140a changes the decorative symbol in the middle symbol stop region 1400M to form a reach state, and subsequently performs post-reach effect (step KAr1). In the post-reach effect, for example, in the middle symbol stop area 1400M, a decorative symbol of "0" and a decorative symbol indicating the number of remaining fluctuations in the ST period (for example, when the remaining number of fluctuations in the ST period is "90", The decorative pattern "9") is displayed. The decorative pattern of "0" suggests a big hit, and the decorative pattern showing the number of remaining fluctuations in the ST period suggests a loss. Then, the effect of competing such that the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol stop region 1400M is realized. Then, when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit, the combination mode of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the display screen 1400a is stopped and displayed so as to be the same as the value of the ST remaining number counter KC, and the display effect is finished. (Step KAe). In other words, also in the second case, the number of remaining lottery (which can be the actual number of times) in which the ST period (ST gaming state) can be continued by the combination mode of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the display screen 1400a as in the first case. The player can be informed. When the result of the hit lottery is a big hit, the decorative symbol "0" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol stop area 1400M, and the display effect is finished (step KAe). Thereby, the big hit is notified. In step KAe, the decorative pattern is not completely stopped, and after the state of slowly swinging for a predetermined time, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can enjoy the excitement of "whether the decorative design to be stopped and displayed has been fixed or not yet?" while the decorative design swings.

For example, when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit and the actual number is 90 (that is, when the ST remaining number counter KC is 90), after performing the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 213(d). The decorative pattern "0" is displayed on the left symbol stop area 1400L, the decorative symbol "9" is displayed on the middle symbol stop area 1400M, and the decorative symbol "0" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol stop area 1400R, and the combination of decorative symbols is "090". The symbol stop processing is performed so that.

Next, the second pattern PT2 will be described. In the second pattern PT2, steps KAs, KAp1 and KAr1 are performed similarly to the first pattern PT1. In step KAp2 next to step KAr1, similarly to step KAp1, the peripheral control MPU 4140a temporarily displays the decorative symbols in the respective symbol stop regions 1400L, 1400M, 1400R so as to represent the number of remaining fluctuations in the ST period. At this time, similarly to the above-mentioned steps KAp1 and KAe, the decorative pattern does not completely stop but slowly rocks. As a result, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the first pattern PT1 in which the decorative pattern is stopped as it is and the second pattern PT2 in which the effect continues.

In the next step KAr2, similarly to step KAr1, the peripheral control MPU 4140a forms a reach state and subsequently performs post-reach effects. The next step KAe is the same as step KAe of the first pattern PT1 (the result of the winning lottery is notified by a combination of decorative symbols). As described above, in the second pattern PT2, the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern as if “off” is confirmed is performed once more than in the first pattern PT1. The difference (5 seconds) between the fluctuation time of the second pattern PT2 (15 seconds; 67th and 70th in FIG. 211) and the fluctuation time of the first pattern PT1 (10 seconds; 66th and 69th in FIG. 211). ) Is the time required for the effect of step KAp2 to step KAe.

Next, the third pattern PT3 will be described. In the third pattern PT3, steps KAs, KAp1, KAr1, KAp2 and KAr2 are performed as in the second pattern PT2. In step KAp3 next to step KAr2, similarly to steps KAp1 and KAp2, the peripheral control MPU 4140a tentatively displays the decorative symbol in each symbol stop region 1400L, 1400M, 1400R so as to represent the number of remaining fluctuations in the ST period. Let At this time, similarly to the above-mentioned steps KAp1, KAp2, and KAe, the decorative pattern does not completely stop but slowly rocks. As a result, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the second pattern PT2 in which the decorative pattern is still stopped and the third pattern PT3 in which the effect is further continued.

In the next step KAr3, similarly to steps KAr1 and KAr2, the peripheral control MPU 4140a forms a reach state and subsequently performs post-reach effects. The next step KAe is the same as step KAe of the second pattern PT2. As described above, in the third pattern PT3, the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern as if the “off” is confirmed is performed once more than in the second pattern PT2. The difference (5 seconds) between the fluctuation time of the third pattern PT3 (20 seconds; 68th and 71th in FIG. 211) and the fluctuation time of the second pattern PT2 (15 seconds; 67th and 70th in FIG. 211). ) Is the time required for the effect of step KAp3 to step KAe.

In the present embodiment, when the table A is referred to, the probability of a big hit when the third pattern PT3 (Nos. 68 and 71 in FIG. 211) is realized is the second pattern PT2 (67 in FIG. 211). No. 70 is higher than that achieved, and the probability of jackpot when the second pattern PT2 (Nos. 67 and 70 in FIG. 211) is realized is the first pattern PT1 (66 in FIG. 211). The selection ratios of Nos. 66 to 71 (FIG. 211) are determined such that the selection ratios of Nos. 69 and 69) are higher than those when they are realized. That is, the longer the display effect lasts, the higher the probability of a big hit. For example, when the result of the winning lottery is not "big hit", any of the numbers 66 to 68 is selected. Here, the selection probability of the 66th may be 50%, the selection probability of the 67th may be 30%, and the selection probability of the 68th may be 20%. If the result of the winning lottery is "big hit", any of the 69th to 71st is selected. Here, the selection probability of No. 69 may be 20%, the selection probability of No. 70 may be 30%, and the selection probability of No. 71 may be 50%. Here, it is assumed that the jackpot probability when the probability varying function is activated is 1/30. In this case, the jackpot probability when the first pattern PT1 is realized is about 1.4% ((1/30×0.2)/((1/30×0.2)+(29/30) X 0.5)) = 0.014). Further, the jackpot probability when the second pattern PT2 is realized is about 3.3% ((1/30×0.3)/((1/30×0.3)+(29/30× 0.3))=0.033). In addition, the jackpot probability when the third pattern PT3 is realized is approximately 7.9% ((1/30×0.5)/((1/30×0.5)+(29/30× 0.2))=0.079). In this way, the selection ratio of each variable display pattern is set so that the more the number of temporary stop displays of the decorative pattern is increased (that is, the longer the display effect time is), the higher the possibility of a big hit is. For example, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the decorative design will start changing again and the display effect will continue for a long time when the decorative design is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display).

Particularly, in the present embodiment, step KAe of the first pattern PT1, step KAp2 of the second pattern PT2, and step KAp2 of the third pattern PT3 are executed at the same first timing T1 (elapsed time from step KAs). the same). Then, at the first timing T1, in any of the patterns PT1, PT2, and PT3, the decorative design shakes slowly, and an effect that makes it vague whether or not the decorative design to be stopped and displayed is determined is performed. Furthermore, the step KAe of the second pattern PT2 and the step KAp3 of the third pattern PT3 are executed at the same second timing T2 (the elapsed time from step KAs is the same). At the second timing T2, in both the patterns PT2 and PT3, the decorative design shakes slowly, and an effect of making it vague whether or not the decorative design to be stopped and displayed is fixed is performed. Therefore, at the first timing T1 and the second timing T2, when the effect that the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed is performed, the player "will want to start the fluctuation again without fixing the symbol as it is". With a strong expectation, you can enjoy the performance.

<Display effect when the number of remaining variations (lottery) in the ST period is 0 to 9>
As shown in FIG. 198, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 selects the table C as the reference table when the ST remaining number counter KC is “0 to 9” (referred to as a third case) ( In step S412), the variable display pattern is determined based on the table C (step 415). As shown in the pattern types No. 74 to No. 79 of FIG. 211, in the variable display pattern of the table C, the pseudo continuous effect can be performed. In the embodiment of FIG. 211, regarding the pattern “off”, the ratio of “normal (without pseudo-repeating)” is 70%, and the total ratio of “pseudo 2, pseudo 3, pseudo 4” is 30%. .. Therefore, the pseudo continuous effect is performed approximately three times every ten times. Regarding the “big hit” pattern, the overall proportion of “pseudo 2, pseudo 3, pseudo 4” is set to 70%, but the probability of “big hit” (eg, 1/30) is sufficiently smaller than the probability of “off” (eg, 29/30). Therefore, the overall proportion of the pseudo-representative effect is approximately the same as the proportion (70%) of the pseudo-representative effect with respect to the “out” pattern, even if the “big hit” pattern is taken into consideration.

Patterns that do not include pseudo-representation:
When the pseudo continuous effect is not included, the display effects of patterns 74 to 79 of table C are the same as the display effects of patterns 66 to 71 of table A, respectively. That is, as described with reference to FIG. 214, the display effect in which the formation of the reach state and the temporary stop display are repeated is realized.

Patterns including pseudo-directed production:
In the present embodiment, the one-time pseudo continuous effect realized by the display effect of the table C is the same as the display effect realized according to the first pattern PT1 of FIG. 214 (that is, one pseudo continuous effect is performed). , And the reach effect. In addition, the variation time for one pseudo-relation effect is 10 seconds). At the final stop display of the one-time pseudo continuous effect, the decorative symbol representing the value of the ST remaining number counter KC is stopped and displayed, as in the case of "disappearance". The peripheral control MPU 4140a repeats the pseudo continuous effect the number of times instructed by the main control MPU 4100a. Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4140a notifies the result of the lottery by realizing the same effect as "normal (number of times of pseudo continuous effect=0)".

FIG. 215 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pattern of an effect including a pseudo effect. FIG. 215 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pattern of “pseudo 3 (number of times of pseudo continuous effect=2)” of No. 75 or No. 78 in FIG. 211. In this case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a realizes the pseudo continuous effect (first pattern PT1) twice, and subsequently, the same effect as the “normal (number of times of pseudo continuous effect=0)” (here, the second pattern). Realize PT2). The steps KAsa, KAp1a, KAr1a, and KAea of the first pseudo-sequential production are the same as the steps KAs, KAp1, KAr1, and KAe of the first pattern PT1 of FIG. 214, respectively. The peripheral control MPU 4140a realizes the second pseudo continuous effect in response to the end of step KAea. Steps KAsb, KAp1b, KAr1b, and KAeb of the second pseudo continuous effect are the same as steps KAs, KAp1, KAr1, and KAe of the first pattern PT1 of FIG. 214, respectively. The peripheral control MPU 4140a realizes the same effect as "normal (number of times of pseudo continuous effect=0)" in response to the end of step KAeb. The steps KAsc, KAp1c, KAr1c, KAp2c, KAr2c, and KAec of this effect are the same as the steps KAs, KAp1, KAr1, KAp2, KAr2, and KAe of the second pattern PT2 of FIG. 214, respectively.

In FIG. 215, the example of the pattern of “pseudo 3” has been described, but the effects similarly proceed for the patterns of “pseudo 2” and “pseudo 4”. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a starts changing the first decorative symbol in response to receiving the command at the time of starting the change (for example, step KAsa in FIG. 215). Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a stops and displays the decorative symbol as if the variation stop command is received, although the variation stop (production stop) command is not received (for example, step KAea in FIG. 215). .. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a repeats the pseudo continuous effect the number of times determined by the main control MPU 4100a until the fluctuation stop command is received. Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4140a realizes the same effect as "normal (the number of times of pseudo continuous effect=0)", and finally displays the decorative symbol in a stop display in response to receiving the variation stop command, and hits. Notify the result of the lottery.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a also advances the countdown in the pseudo continuous effect. That is, each time the pseudo continuous effect is performed, the remaining lottery number represented by the decorative symbol displayed in a stopped state is decreased by one. Each time the pseudo continuous production is performed, the number of times (numerical value) indicated by the symbol combination mode in the symbol stop process deviates from the actual number. The number of times deviated from this actual number is also called a virtual number.

For example, it is assumed that the effect of “pseudo 3” shown in FIG. 215 progresses in a state where the actual number is 8 (the ST remaining number counter KC is 8). In this case, "008" is notified in the first stop display of the pseudo continuous effect (step KAea), "007" is notified in the second stop display of the pseudo continuous effect (step KAeb), and the last stop. On the display (step KAec), "006" is notified (when the result of the winning lottery is not "big hit"). In the display effect associated with the next lottery, the countdown proceeds from the value (for example, 005) obtained by subtracting one from the virtual number notified last. Then, after the virtual number becomes 1, the virtual number “1” is repeatedly notified until the actual number becomes 1.

Even when the table C is referred to, similarly to the case where the table A is referred to, the probability of the big hit when the third pattern PT3 (Nos. 76 and 79 in FIG. 211) is realized is the second. The probability of a big hit is higher than when the pattern PT2 (Nos. 75 and 78 in FIG. 211) is realized, and when the second pattern PT2 (Nos. 75 and 78 in FIG. 211) is realized, The selection ratios of Nos. 74 to 79 (FIG. 211) are determined so as to be higher than that when the pattern PT1 (Nos. 74 and 77 in FIG. 211) is realized. That is, the selection ratio of each variable display pattern is set so that the more the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is, the higher the possibility of the big hit is.

By setting the selection ratio of the variable display pattern as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the larger the number of temporary stop display of the decorative pattern in one display effect, the higher the possibility of a big hit. Therefore, when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), the player strongly requests that the decorative pattern is changed again without confirming the stopped and displayed decorative pattern. You can enjoy

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability variation function operates while the lottery is won a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) after the big hit. Then, when the remaining lottery number for which the probability variation function continues is a multiple of 10, the first type display effect including the reach effect is realized, and when the remaining lottery number is another value, the reach value is reached. A second type display effect that does not include an effect is realized (except when the remaining number of lottery is 0 to 9). In this way, the remaining lottery number for realizing the first-type display effect including the reach effect is set to a value in a plurality of ranges apart from each other in the entire range from the predetermined number (100) to zero. Including (specifically, 90, 80, 70... 10) In this embodiment, one range is composed of one value. However, one range is composed of a plurality of continuous values. May be). Further, a value (a value other than a multiple of 10) at which the second type display effect including no reach effect is realized is sandwiched between the two ranges. Therefore, according to the progress of the predetermined number of times of lottery, the first type display effect including the reach effect is realized a plurality of times with the second type display effect not including the reach effect interposed therebetween. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game state (the predetermined number of times of lottery) in which the probability varying function operates without being realized as the first type display effect including the reach effect, and the game state (the predetermined number of times of lottery). It is also suppressed that only the first type display effect including the reach effect continues until the end of (). In this way, in the gaming state in which the probability varying function operates until the predetermined number of times of lottery is performed, both the first type display effect and the second type display effect are realized, so the first type display effect and the first type display effect Compared with the case where only one of the two kinds of display effects is realized, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player gets tired of the effects and improve the player's interest in the effects.

Furthermore, until the game state (lottery of a predetermined number of times) in which the probability variation function operates is completed, after the first type display effect including the reach effect is realized, the second type display effect including the reach effect is realized. After that, the first-type display effect including the reach effect is realized again. In this way, the first type display effect including the reach effect is realized not only once but not continuously for a plurality of times. Therefore, even when the reach effect is not realized, the player can proceed with the game with the expectation that "there may be the chance to see the reach effect". As a result, the player's interest in the effect can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the ST gaming state, a combination of a plurality of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed informs the player of the number of times (actual number) of the remaining lottery in which the ST gaming state can continue. (That is, the countdown proceeds according to the progress of the game (lottery)). In this way, since the actual number of times (remaining number of fluctuations, remaining number of lottery) can be notified for each lottery, the player strongly desires to obtain a jackpot lottery result by the end of the ST gaming state, and the countdown Observe the ongoing display production with high interest. In addition, the countdown is performed using a decorative pattern that represents a numerical value used to notify the lottery result. Therefore, the player's interest in the display effect (particularly the design) is higher than ever. When the player observes the display effect with such high interest (that is, when the countdown progresses), the pachinko machine 1 uses the display effect according to the table A as the reference table and the reference table. While switching between the display effects according to Table B, it is possible to notify that the actual number is decreased by one for each change (every lottery) depending on the stop display mode of the decorative symbol. Here, since the table A is composed of the variable display pattern including the reach effect and the table B is composed of the variable display pattern not including the reach effect, the switching of the type of the display effect is realized. Therefore, when the player has a high interest in observing the display effect (when the countdown progresses), a change in the actual number of times can be realized by different kinds of display effects, and thus the display effect may be monotonous. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player is less interested in the display effect.

If the reach state is formed according to the probability, the ST gaming state may end without the reach state being formed. In this case, the player may be disappointed and lose interest in the display effect. However, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the actual number is a value of a predetermined type (a multiple of 10) during a period in which the player observes the display effect with high interest (a period during which the countdown proceeds). Value), a display effect including a reach effect (formation of reach state) can be realized. In this way, display effects including a reach effect (formation of a reach state) can be realized according to the actual number of times (remaining number of fluctuations, remaining number of lottery) instead of probability, so that the player is highly interested in the display effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the display effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pseudo continuous production is performed as the display production in which the remaining variation number in the ST period is 0 to 9 times, so that the final stop display is performed corresponding to one lottery. The symbol combination mode is notified in a display mode that represents the virtual number of times different from the actual number. In this way, the symbol combination mode that is finally stopped and displayed corresponding to one lottery can be a display mode that represents a numerical value smaller than the actual number, so that the symbol combination mode has no remaining number of lottery. Even if it suggests, the actual remaining lottery number is 1 or more, and the ST gaming state can be continued. Therefore, the player can proceed with the game in a state in which the ST game state is not known when the symbol combination mode suggests that there is no remaining lottery count. As a result, the player can enjoy the game and eventually the display effect while having the expectation that the ST game state should continue. In this way, it is possible to give a new sense of expectation to the player and improve interest in the display effect in the period when the ST game state is almost finished.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-described display effect during the ST period is performed in the gaming state in which the probability varying function is operating, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display effect during the ST period is performed only during a special gaming state (also called a special period) in which the probability variation function and the time saving function are operated by a predetermined variation number (for example, 100 variations) after the big hit game. Good. That is, the display effect during the ST period may not be performed after the special big hit game. By the way, in this special game state, a lot of lottery can be performed in a short time with a high probability, and thus display effects (for example, display effects including a reach effect (formation of reach status)) with high expectation are frequently made. What is realized tends to be sparse. However, this special game state may end without being able to win the lottery. Here, if the display effect including the reach effect (formation of reach state) is never realized and the special game state ends without winning the lottery, the player also enjoys the display effect. There is a possibility of being overly disappointed because the special game state will end without the enjoyment of winning the lottery. Therefore, in the special game state, the display effect including the reach effect (reach state formation) is realized according to the actual number (remaining number of fluctuations, remaining number of lottery) instead of the probability, and thus the display including the reach effect is realized. It is possible to realize the effect as appropriate without being too much or too little. As a result, a display effect that is closer to the player's feelings is possible, and the player's interest in the display effect can be improved.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 does not operate the probability variation function, but the gaming state in which the time saving function operates (also referred to as a normal external advantageous state) is a predetermined period after the big hit game (also referred to as a time saving period. For example, 100 variations). May be realized. In this case, the display effect (countdown or effect in which the countup proceeds) during the ST period may be performed in a short time period.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the display effect during the ST period, the countdown of the remaining lottery number proceeds according to the progress of the game (lottery), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the display effect during the ST period, the count-up of the number of lottery after the end of the big hit game may be advanced according to the progress of the game (lottery). Specifically, the combination mode of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the display screen 1400a may be stopped and displayed so as to be the same as the lottery number after the big hit game ends.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the predetermined type value (see step S407 in FIG. 198) is “a value that is a multiple of 10”, but the value is not limited to this. In the above-described embodiment, during the ST period, the display effect including the reach effect is realized multiple times with the display effect not including the reach effect interposed (Table B) (Table A). In other words, in the display effect during the ST period, the display effect according to the table A is switched to the display effect according to the table B, and the display effect according to the table B is switched to the display effect according to the table A. And are repeatedly realized (see FIG. 198: steps S403 to 415). The predetermined type of value may be set so that such repetition can be realized. For example, the value of the predetermined type is a value (for example, 077, 066, 055, etc.) of which the actual number is informed by stopping and displaying the symbols having the same numerical values in the other symbol display areas excluding one symbol display area. Etc.).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the result of the winning lottery is a special winning in the probability-changing external advantageous state, the ST remaining number counter KC is initialized (step FIG. 197: S317), The display effect (countdown or effect of counting up) during the ST period is newly started. When the special win is won, the big hit game with a large amount of balls is not played, and thus the player is highly likely not to know that the special win has been won. However, as described above, when the special winning is won in the probability varying external advantageous state, the ST remaining number counter KC is initialized. That is, the remaining lottery number in the ST period indicated by the display effect is significantly increased. As a result, the player cannot easily obtain a large amount of balls, but can easily recognize that he or she has won the special win (that is, the number of draws remaining in the ST period has significantly increased). While expecting, you can enjoy playing the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the result of the winning lottery is a special win in the normal external disadvantage state, the display effect (countdown or effect in which the countup proceeds) during the ST period is performed, and When the result of the winning lottery is a small hit in the external disadvantage state, the display effect based on the reference table Table D (the same display effect as when the result of the winning lottery is lost) is performed. It is not limited to this. For example, even when the lottery result is a small hit, the ST remaining number counter KC may be initialized as in step S317 of the variation start process shown in FIG. Even when the result of the winning lottery is a small hit in the normal external disadvantage state, the display effect (countdown or effect in which the countup progresses) during the ST period is performed after the big hit. Good. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to understand from the display effect whether the result of the winning lottery is a small hit or a special hit that is more valuable to the player than a small hit in the normal external disadvantage state. In addition, even if the result of the winning lottery is a small hit, expectation can be given. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 210 and 211, the result of the winning lottery in the probability-changing external advantageous state (during the ST period) is either “big hit” or “out” (that is, “ There is no "small hit"), but "small hit" may be included in the candidates. If the result of the winning lottery is a small hit in the probability-variable external advantageous state, and the ST remaining number counter KC is initialized as described above, the actual number (the number of times the time-saving function can be continued) and the virtual number in the display effect are different (Eg, the virtual count can be 99, even though the actual count is 50). Therefore, in this case, the display effect of causing the countdown (count up) to proceed is performed by using the pseudo continuous effect described in the display effect during the ST period, and the actual number and the virtual number are increased until the ST period ends. And may be brought closer. By doing this, when the game state changes (for example, when the ST period ends), the virtual number is made to match the actual number, so that there is no inconsistent display effect and there is no discomfort in the display effect. It can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed due to the contradiction in the display effect. As a result, in a gaming machine equipped with various types of hits, such as a small hit and a special hit, in addition to a big hit, the possibility that the player feels irritated is reduced, and the player can enjoy the game in a fun manner. Become.

FIG. 216 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the number of holdings on the display screen 1400a. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 216(a), on the display screen 1400a, the number-of-holds display area hry1 showing the number of holdings corresponding to the first number of starting memories and the number of second starting memories are displayed. The hold number display area hry2 indicating the hold number to be displayed is displayed (in the present embodiment, the hold number display areas hry1 and hry2 are arranged at the bottom of the display screen 1400a). In the example of FIG. 216(a), the number of holdings is displayed by the number of black-painted circles in both the number-of-holding display area hry1 and the number-of-holding display area hry2. The number of holdings displayed in the number-of-holding display areas hry1 and hry2 is reduced by one each time the display effect corresponding to one lottery is started.

By the way, in the display effect during the above-mentioned ST period, when a pseudo continuous effect (for example, the display effect described in FIG. 215) occurs, as a display effect associated with one lottery, a lot of lottery is performed at first glance. A display effect that looks as if it was broken is performed. However, if the display of the number-of-holds display areas hry1 and hry2 does not change, the player does not actually perform the lottery even if the pseudo continuous effect is performed, and the pseudo continuous effect is performed. You can easily notice that you have been broken. In order to prevent the user from easily perceiving that it is a pseudo continuous effect, when performing a pseudo continuous effect (for example, the effect described with reference to FIG. 215) with the above-described display effect that advances the countdown or the count up. Is reduced by one as in the case of starting the display effect corresponding to one lottery each time one pseudo-linked effect is performed, by one. You may make it display it. This makes it difficult to identify whether or not the effect is the pseudo continuous effect even if the pseudo continuous effect is realized. Therefore, when the display effect accompanied by the pseudo continuous effect is realized. In, it is possible to give the player a feeling of tension and expectation. This makes it possible to provide a pachinko machine with high interest.

When subtracting the display of the number of holdings one by one according to the pseudo continuous production, as shown in FIG. 216(b), the number of holdings and the number of second starting storages corresponding to the actual first starting storage number are set. The corresponding number of holdings may be displayed in the number-of-holding display areas hry1A, hry2A provided at different positions in the display screen 1400a smaller than the number-of-holding display areas hry1, hry2 (FIG. 216(b). In the example of ), the reserved number display areas hry1A and hry2A are arranged in the upper left corner of the display screen 1400a). In this way, the actual number of reservations can be confirmed by carefully observing the display screen 1400a, which makes the player uncomfortable because the actual number of reservations cannot be confirmed from the display of the display screen 1400a. You can reduce the possibility of feeling uncomfortable. It should be noted that the double-holding number display as shown in FIG. 216(b) may be performed in accordance with a predetermined probability even when the pseudo continuous production is not proceeding. In this way, the holding number display areas hry1A and hry2A are not necessarily displayed in the pseudo continuous production, so that the player may ask "whether or not the pseudo continuous production is performed. While having the question "?", you can enjoy the display production with interest. In addition, when the pseudo continuous production is being performed, a difference may occur in the number of holdings displayed between the large number-of-holding display areas hry1, hry2 and the small number-of-holding display areas hry1A, hry2A (FIG. 216). (B)) When the pseudo continuous production is not performed, there is no difference in the number of holdings indicated between the large number-of-holding display areas hry1 and hry2 and the small number-of-holding display areas hry1A and hry2A. Therefore, by carefully observing the display screen 1400a, it is possible to identify whether or not the pseudo-relational effect is being performed. As a result, interest in display effects can be improved.

In addition, in the case where the number of holdings is reduced by one and displayed each time the pseudo continuous production is performed, if the number of holdings is displayed in the holding number display area hry2, the holding number display area hry2 is given priority. The number of holdings may be reduced by one.

As described above, when the countdown (or the countup) progresses along with the pseudo continuous effect as in the ST period, the pseudo continuous effect is performed as described in FIG. 216(b). It is possible to improve the player's interest in the effect by performing the display effect that suppresses the fact that the user is easily understood. That is, the player is surprised by proceeding with the countdown (or the countup) while hiding that the pseudo-relational effect is being performed (for example, although the displayed virtual number is 001, the ST period is plural). Since it is possible to provide a surprise that the game continues for a number of times), the player can further enjoy the performance and can enjoy the game.

On the other hand, even if the pseudo continuous effect is performed, if the display effect in which the countdown (or the count up) proceeds is not performed, the player realizes that the pseudo continuous effect is being performed, and thereby the player The display effect may be performed so that the enjoyment of the game is improved. For example, when the pseudo-relational production is performed, the number of the pseudo-relational production may be determined such that the ratio of the winning lottery result is a big hit is higher than when the pseudo-relational production is not performed. .. Further, the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect may be determined such that the larger the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect is, the higher the ratio of the result of the winning lottery is a big hit.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 210 and 211, the pseudo continuous effect can be performed even during a period other than the ST period (normal external disadvantage state). Then, in the pseudo continuous production in the normal external disadvantage state, the display production for proceeding the countdown (or count up) as in the ST period is not performed, but at least one decorative symbol row (for example, the pattern stop in FIG. 213 is stopped. At least one of the areas 1400L, 1400M, and 1400R), a temporary stop display of a decorative symbol, and a change of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol row after that, a pseudo continuous production is performed. Therefore, in the normal external disadvantage state, the selection ratios of “normal”, “pseudo 2”, “pseudo 3”, and “pseudo 4” shown in the tables of FIGS. 210 and 211 are as follows. Even if it is set so that the possibility of a big hit appears higher (that is, the expectation degree of a big hit becomes higher) when the pseudo continuous effect is performed, compared with the case where the pseudo continuous effect is not performed. Good. For example, in the embodiment of FIGS. 210 and 211, the total value of the selection ratios (that is, the total value of the selection ratios of the pseudo 2, the pseudo 3, and the pseudo 4) when the pseudo continuous effect is performed excluding the ST period. Is 2355, and the total value of the selection ratios of the jackpots is 1500. Therefore, the ratio of the big hit when the pseudo-relational effect is performed is 1500/2355=0.6369. On the other hand, the total value of the selection ratios (that is, the total value of the normal selection ratios) when the pseudo continuous effect is not performed is 6845, and the total value of the selection ratios of the big hits is 3400. Therefore, the ratio of the big hit when the pseudo-relational effect is not performed is 3400/6845=0.4967. That is, the jackpot rate (0.6369) when the pseudo-relational effect is performed is higher than the jackpot rate (0.4967) when the pseudo-representation is not performed. As described above, in the normal external disadvantage state, in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is performed, the percentage of the result of the winning lottery may be high compared to the case where the pseudo continuous effect is not performed. By doing this, the player who realizes that the pseudo-relational production is being performed can enjoy the production and eventually the game while expecting "I want more pseudo-reproductions to be repeated".

Here, in the normal external disadvantage state, an effect as shown in FIG. 216(b) that hides the pseudo continuous effect may be omitted. For example, as shown in FIG. 216(a), the pseudo continuous production may proceed while displaying the actual number of reservations in the number-of-holds display areas hry1 and hry2. In this way, although it is not actively notified that the pseudo-relational effect is being performed, if the display effect is carefully observed, it is possible to easily notice that the pseudo-rearranging effect is being performed, so the player , You can enjoy the production and eventually the game with the expectation that "I want the simulated production to be repeated more and more". Here, in the normal external disadvantage state, the peripheral control MPU 4140a may move the pistol units 3050 and 3051 at the time of starting the pseudo continuous effect. During the ST period, in order to prevent the player from recognizing that the pseudo continuous effect is being performed, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the pistol units 3050 and 3051 even when the pseudo continuous effect is realized. It is preferable not to operate.

In this way, when the pseudo continuous production without the countdown (or the countup) is performed, the actual hold number is displayed in the relatively large hold number display areas hry1, hry2, and the countdown (or the count up) is performed. When a pseudo continuous production accompanied by is performed, a comparatively small pending number display area hry1A is displayed in a relatively large pending number display area hry1, hry2 while displaying a virtual pending number that decreases for each pseudo continuous effect. , Hry2A may display the actual number of reservations. By doing this, when the pseudo continuous effect without the countdown (or the count up) is performed, the relatively large holding number display areas hry1 and hry2 are observed and it is confirmed that the pseudo continuous effect is performed. Even if a pseudo continuous effect accompanied by a countdown (or a count up) is then performed, the person observes the large hold number display areas hry1 and hry2 to confirm whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is performed. And In this way, it becomes possible to divert attention from the actual reserved numbers displayed in the relatively small reserved number display areas hry1A and hry2A. As a result, the surprise of the player (for example, the ST period continues for a plurality of times even though the displayed virtual number is 001) can be further increased, and the player's interest in the effect is reduced. Can be suppressed.

When the countdown (or the countup) progresses along with the pseudo-relational effect as in the ST period, the selection ratio of the pseudo-relational effect may be set to various values.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the starting openings 2001 and 2002 are examples of passing means configured to allow the game medium to pass therethrough, and a main control that realizes a function of acquiring various random numbers as lottery information. The MPU 4100a is an example of lottery information acquisition means, and the main control MPU 4100a that performs various lottery using various random numbers as lottery information is an example of lottery means, and controls the gaming state in accordance with the progress of the game. The control MPU 4100a is an example of a game state realizing means. The liquid crystal display device 1400 is an example of a display unit, and the main control MPU 4100a and the peripheral control MPU 4140a that determine the display effect are examples of the effect determination unit. The peripheral control MPU 4140a that realizes the determined display effect by using the display unit is also an example of the effect control unit. The normal external disadvantage state is an example of the first type gaming state, and the ST gaming state is an example of the second type gaming state which is advantageous to the player as compared with the first type gaming state. The three symbol stop areas 1400L, 1400M, 1400R are examples of symbol display areas.

The main control MPU 4100a is an example of a lottery information acquisition unit, a lottery unit, a game state realizing unit, a variation display pattern determining unit, a candidate information selecting unit, and a passing rate changing unit in various modes described below. The peripheral control MPU 4140a is an example of an effect control unit. The liquid crystal display device 1400 is an example of a display unit. Table A is an example of the first candidate information. Table B is an example of second candidate information. The normal external disadvantage state is an example of the first type game state. The ST gaming state is an example of a second type gaming state.

[7. Aspects (Technical Ideas) Extracted from this Embodiment]
Hereinafter, various technical ideas extracted by viewing the present embodiment from various viewpoints will be described.

[Technical ideas extracted by focusing on determination of production based on the number of times of lottery]
The following aspects (technical ideas) can be extracted by looking at the present embodiment from the viewpoint of "deciding the effect based on the number of times of lottery".

[Aspect 1]
A gaming machine,
Passing means configured to allow the game medium to pass,
Lottery information acquisition means capable of acquiring information used in a lottery in response to the game medium having passed through the passage means,
By using the lottery information, a lottery means for performing a lottery on whether or not it is a time to give a privilege to the player,
Means that can be realized by selecting one game state from a plurality of types of game states including a first type game state and a second type game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first type game state And, in response to the lottery in the first type game state winning a specific hit, a game state realizing means capable of realizing the second type game state until a predetermined number of times the lottery is performed,
Display means capable of realizing a display effect informing the result of the lottery,
Production determination means for determining the display production to be realized by using the display means for each of the lottery,
Production control means for realizing the display production determined by the production determination means using the display means,
Equipped with
In the second type game state until the predetermined number of times of the lottery is performed, the effect determination means has a first specific number of times of the remaining lottery in which the second type game state can be continued. In this case, the first type display effect, which is a display effect including a specific effect, is determined as a display effect to be realized, and the remaining number of the lottery is different from the first specific number. In the case of a specific number of times, it has a function of determining a second type display effect, which is a display effect not including the specific effect, as a display effect to be realized,
The first specific number is a plurality of ranges apart from each other that are not continuous in the entire range from the predetermined number to zero, and the second specific number is sandwiched between two ranges. Including multiple range values set to
Amusement machine.

According to this configuration, in the second type gaming state until the predetermined number of times of lottery is performed, the first specific number of times (the remaining number of times of lottery) in which the first type display effect including the specific effect is realized, Of the entire range from the predetermined number of times to zero, a plurality of ranges that are not continuous and are separated from each other, and include values of a plurality of ranges set so as to sandwich the second specific number of times between the two ranges. . Therefore, in accordance with the progress of the lottery a predetermined number of times, the first type display effect including the specific effect is realized a plurality of times with the second type display effect not including the specific effect interposed therebetween.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second type game state (predetermined number of times of lottery) from ending without realizing the first type display effect including the specific effect, and the second type of game state (predetermined number of times of lottery). It is also suppressed that only the first type display effect including the specific effect continues until the end of. In this way, in the second type game state until the predetermined number of times of lottery is performed, both the first type display effect and the second type display effect are realized, so the first type display effect and the second type display Compared with the case where only one of the effects is realized, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player gets tired of the effects and improve the player's interest in the effects.

Furthermore, until the second type game state (predetermined number of times of lottery) is over, after the first type display effect including the specific effect is realized, the second type display effect that does not include the specific effect is realized. After that, the first type display effect including the specific effect is realized again. As described above, the first-type display effect including the specific effect is realized not only once but not continuously for a plurality of times. Therefore, even in the state where the specific effect is not realized, the player can proceed with the game with the expectation that "the specific effect may be seen again". As a result, the player's interest in the effect can be improved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the specific effect is a reach effect (an effect including the formation of a reach state), but the specific effect is not limited to the reach effect, but various other effects. Good. For example, it may be an effect in which a specific character appears. In any case, it is preferable that the first-type display effect including the specific effect be configured to have a longer effect time than the second-type display effect that does not include the specific effect. In this way, it is possible to suppress that only a long effect (first type display effect) continues in the second type game state until a predetermined number of lottery is performed, and only a short effect (second type display effect). It can be suppressed to continue. Then, it is possible to realize a long effect (first type display effect) a plurality of times with a short effect (second type display effect) interposed therebetween. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the effects.

[Aspect 2]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
The effect control means uses a plurality of symbols representing numerical values in each of a plurality of symbol display areas arranged on the display means as respective display effects of the first type display effect and the second type display effect. By performing a stop display of the plurality of symbols after performing the variable display, by the combination of the plurality of symbols that are stopped and displayed, the number of remaining lottery and the second type in which the second type gaming state can be continued To realize a display effect that informs the player of the actual number of times that is one of the number of times of the lottery performed in the gaming state,
Amusement machine.

According to this configuration, while the second type game state (the predetermined number of times of lottery) is performed, the countdown (or countup) is performed by using each of the plurality of symbol display areas arranged on the display means. proceed. In this way, since the actual number of times (the remaining number of times of lottery or the number of times of lottery performed in the second type game state) is notified for each lottery, the player wins the lottery by the end of the second type game state. I strongly want to get the result and observe the display effect of the countdown (or countup) with high interest. Then, in the state where the player observes the display effect with such a high interest, the effect control means performs the first-type display effect including the specific effect and the second-type display effect that does not include the specific effect. Both can be achieved. Therefore, the player's interest in the effect can be improved by using the first type display effect and the second type display effect while reducing the possibility that the player may miss the display effect.

[Aspect 3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 2,
The first specific number of times is notified of the actual number of times by stopping and displaying symbols representing the same numerical value in the other symbol display areas except one of the plurality of symbol display areas. Such a number of times,
The specific effect is the formation of a reach state by stopping and displaying a symbol showing the same numerical value in the other symbol display area, and the symbols are stopped in all of the plurality of symbol display areas following the formation of the reach state. Including a post-reach effect that is an effect until it is displayed,
Amusement machine.

According to this configuration, the specific effect including the formation of the reach state in which the expectation of winning is improved is not limited to one time but a plurality of times until the completion of the second type game state (the predetermined number of times of lottery). It is realized without continuity over times. Therefore, even when the display effect (second type display effect) that does not include the formation of the reach state is realized, the player can realize the display effect including the formation of the reach state in the subsequent lottery. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation of winning a prize. As a result, the player's interest in the effect can be improved.

The mode extracted from the viewpoint of “decision of effect based on the number of times of lottery” has been described above, but from this viewpoint, not only these modes but also various other modes can be extracted. Also, the configurations of the various aspects or some of the aspects described above may be combined with other aspects described herein. Further, the extracted aspect or a part of the configuration of the aspect may be applied to other various aspects and effect examples (or aspects extracted from the viewpoint of realizing various effect examples).

[Technical ideas extracted by focusing on the variable display pattern table]
By viewing the present embodiment from the viewpoint of "selection of variable display pattern table", the following aspects (technical ideas) can be extracted.

[Mode 4]
A gaming machine,
Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information in response to the game medium having passed a predetermined area,
A lottery means capable of performing a lottery on whether or not it is a time to give a privilege to the player, according to the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means,
Means that can be realized by selecting one game state from a plurality of types of game states including a first type game state and a second type game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first type game state And, in response to the lottery in the first type game state winning a specific hit, a game state realizing means capable of realizing the second type game state until a predetermined number of times the lottery is performed,
Along with being able to display an image, a plurality of symbol display areas capable of informing the result of the lottery by a combination of symbols which are variable display and stop display of symbols showing numerical values and which are stopped and displayed A display unit having a display unit capable of displaying,
A variable display pattern that specifies a display effect performed by using the display unit for each of the lottery, and a variable display pattern determination unit that determines with reference to candidate information that determines candidates for the variable display pattern,
According to the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means, effect control means for realizing the display effect,
Candidate information referred to by the variable display pattern determining means, a candidate information selecting means for selecting from a plurality of candidate information,
Equipped with
The plurality of candidate information uses a plurality of symbols representing the numerical values in each of the plurality of symbol display areas as candidate information that can be referred to in the second type game state until the predetermined number of times of the lottery is performed. By performing a stop display of the plurality of symbols after performing the variable display, by the combination of the plurality of symbols that are stopped and displayed, the number of remaining lottery and the second type in which the second type gaming state can be continued Including first and second candidate information capable of realizing a display effect that informs the player of the actual number of times that is one of the number of times the lottery has been performed in the gaming state,
The second candidate information includes a variable display pattern that is not included in the first candidate information,
The candidate information selection means selects the first candidate information when the actual number of times is a predetermined first type number of times, and the actual number of times is a predetermined second type number of times different from the first type number of times. In case, select the second candidate information,
In the display effect in the period in which the second type game state is realized until the predetermined number of times of the lottery is performed, the effect control means displays the display effect according to the first candidate information and the second candidate. While switching between the display effect according to the information, it is possible to inform the actual number of times to be decreased or increased by one for each lottery by a combination of the symbols stopped and displayed after the variable display,
Amusement machine.

According to this configuration, the second type that is advantageous to the player as compared with the first type gaming state until the predetermined number of times of lottery is performed in response to winning the specific hit by the lottery in the first type gaming state. A gaming state can be realized. Then, in the second type game state, the number of remaining lottery that can continue the second type game state and the number of lottery performed in the second type game state, depending on the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed. A player can be notified of the actual number of times (that is, countdown or countup proceeds according to the progress of the game (lottery)). In this way, since the actual number of times can be notified for each lottery, the player strongly desires to obtain a lottery result by the end of the second type gaming state, and a display effect in which a countdown (or countup) proceeds Observe with high interest. In addition, the countdown (or countup) is performed using a symbol that represents a numerical value used to notify the lottery result. Therefore, the player's interest in the display effect (particularly the design) is higher than ever. Then, when the player observes the display effect with such a high interest (that is, when the countdown or the countup progresses), the candidate information selecting means displays the display effect according to the first candidate information. While switching between the display effect according to the second candidate information, the actual number of times can be reduced or increased by one for each lottery by the stop display of the symbols. Here, since the second candidate information includes a variable display pattern that is not included in the first candidate information, switching of the type of display effect is realized. Therefore, when the player observes the display effect with high interest (when the countdown or the countup progresses), a change in the actual number of times can be realized by different kinds of display effects, so that the display effect is monotonous. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will become less interested in the display effect.

[Aspect 5]
A gaming machine according to aspect 4,
The first type number is a number such that the actual number is notified by stopping and displaying a symbol having the same numerical value in the other symbol display regions except one of the plurality of symbol display regions. Yes,
The first candidate information selected when the actual number of times is the first type number of times, the reach state is formed by the symbols representing the same numerical value being stopped and displayed in the other symbol display area, and the reach It is composed of a variable display pattern that can realize a display effect that executes a specific effect following the formation of a state,
The second candidate information selected when the actual number is the second type number is composed of a variable display pattern that can realize a display effect that does not form the reach state,
The effect control means performs both the display effect including the formation of the reach state according to the first candidate information and the display effect in which the reach state is not formed according to the second candidate information, the predetermined number of times. It is feasible in the period in which the second type game state is realized until the lottery is performed,
Amusement machine.

If the reach state is formed according to the probability, the second type game state may end without the reach state being formed. In this case, the player may be disappointed and lose interest in the display effect. However, according to the above configuration, the reach state is formed when the actual number is the first type number during the period in which the player observes the display effect with high interest (the period in which the countdown or the countup proceeds). Display effects including can be realized. In this way, since the display effect including the formation of the reach state can be realized according to the actual number of times instead of the probability, it is possible to respond to the player's high interest in the display effect and improve the player's interest in the display effect. be able to.

[Aspect 6]
A gaming machine according to aspect 5,
Means for changing the ease of passage of the game medium through the predetermined area by the operation of the movable member, wherein the movable member operates in the first mode and the movable member operates in the first mode. Comparing with the above, the passing rate changing means capable of selecting and executing either one of the promoting operation state in which the game medium easily operates in the second mode and operating in the second mode,
The first type gaming state is a gaming state in which the winning probability in the lottery is a low probability that is a predetermined probability, and the operation state executed by the passing rate changing means is the normal operation state,
The second type game state has a high probability that the winning probability in the lottery is a predetermined probability higher than the low probability, and the operation state executed by the passage rate changing means is the promotion operation state. It is in a game state,
Amusement machine.

In the second type game state in which the winning probability is high and the operation state of the passing rate changing means is the promoting operation state, a lot of lottery can be performed in a short time with a high probability, so that the expectation is high. Frequent realization of an increased display effect (for example, a display effect in which a reach state is formed) tends to be sparse. However, there is a case where the second-class game state is ended without being able to win the lottery. Here, if the second-class game state ends without being able to win the lottery, the display production including the formation of the reach state is never realized, and the enjoyment of the display production is also a lottery for the player. Since the second-class gaming state will end without the enjoyment of winning, there is a possibility of being disappointed. According to the above configuration, in the second type game state, since the display effect including the formation of the reach state is realized according to the actual number of times rather than the probability, the display effect including the formation of the reach state is not too many and is small. It is possible to realize it appropriately without being too much. As a result, a display effect that is closer to the player's feelings is possible, and the player's interest in the display effect can be improved.

[Aspect 7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 4 to 6,
The effect control means, as a pattern of the display effect performed corresponding to one lottery during the period in which the second type game state is realized until the lottery is performed the predetermined number of times, the temporary of the symbol By performing the stop and the variable display again after the temporary stop, the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed in correspondence with the one lottery is the virtual number different from the actual number. It is possible to realize a pattern to be notified in the display mode shown.
Amusement machine.

According to this configuration, the display mode (also referred to as a pattern combination mode) represented by the combination of symbols finally stopped and displayed in correspondence with one lottery is a display mode in which the actual number is smaller (or larger). Therefore, even if the symbol combination mode suggests that there is no remaining lottery number, the actual remaining lottery number is 1 or more, and the second type game state can be continued. Therefore, even if the symbol combination mode suggests that there is no remaining lottery number, the player can proceed with the game without knowing when the second type game state will end. As a result, the player can enjoy the game and eventually the display effect while having the expectation that the second type game state will continue. In this way, it is possible to give the player a new sense of expectation and improve interest in the display effect in the period when the second type game state is almost completed.

Although the modes extracted from the viewpoint of “selection of variable display pattern table” have been described above, from this viewpoint, various modes other than these modes can be extracted. Also, the configurations of the various aspects or some of the aspects described above may be combined with other aspects described herein. Further, the extracted aspect or a part of the configuration of the aspect may be applied to other various aspects and effect examples (or aspects extracted from the viewpoint of realizing various effect examples).

Although various aspects extracted from the present embodiment have been described above, the aspects or a part of the configurations of the aspects may be combined with other aspects described in the present specification. Further, the extracted aspect or a part of the configuration of the aspect may be applied to other various aspects and effect examples (or aspects extracted from the viewpoint of realizing various effect examples).

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the movable decorative body (handgun unit 3075) is provided as the decorative body on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1400, but the decorative body supported in a fixed state may be provided. May be.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the left handgun unit 3075 is arranged such that it is always pushed out of the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400. However, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, reach effect and special effect are provided. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the player can move so as to approach the player side of the display screen 1400a only when appears (that is, only when it is easy to peep).

In the above embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is arranged in the lower effect space S2 and the character decoration unit 3002 is arranged in the upper effect space S1, but the liquid crystal display device 1400 is arranged in the upper effect space S1. The character decoration unit 3002 and the like may be arranged in the lower effect space S2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. Alternatively, in this case as well, the same operational effect as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 605 Gaming area 600 Gaming panel (gaming board)
2400 Center accessory (center frame)
2400a Opening window 1400 Liquid crystal display device (effect display means)
1400a Display screen 2420 Stage 2423 Warp passage member (warp passage)
3002 Character decoration unit (second decoration)
3008 Lower movable decorative unit (lower movable decorative body)
3075 Handgun unit (decorative body)
3076 Drive mechanism (decorative body drive means)
3084 Light emitting substrate (light emitting means)
3151 Lower space forming unit (space forming member)
3152 Support box 3180a Side wall part 3180b Rear wall part 3182 Left lens (light projection part, character lens)
3183 Left light emitting substrate (light emitting unit, light emitting source)
3184a Side Enclosure 3184b Rear Enclosure 3186 Right Lens (Light Emitting Unit, Character Lens)
3187 Right light emitting substrate (light emitting unit, light emitting source)
3190a Opening window (opening)
3193 Blue lens (light emitting decoration)
3194 Yellow lens (light emitting decoration)
3195 Red lens (light emitting decoration)
3203 Lattice member (decorative plate)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine,
A game board having a game area and an opening,
An inlet provided in the game area and capable of receiving a game medium,
A game medium detecting means capable of detecting the reception of the game medium by the receiving port;
Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information in accordance with the detection of the game medium by the game medium detection means,
A lottery means capable of performing a lottery as to whether or not a bonus is awarded to the player, based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means,
Display means having a display area arranged in the opening,
When viewed from the front , a movable decorative body having a lens portion provided with a light emitting portion arranged at a position around the display area in the rear ,
Decorative body moving means for operating the movable decorative body,
Sound output means for outputting sound,
Performance control means capable of controlling the display means, the ornament moving means, and the sound output means, respectively.
Equipped with
The display means can display a display effect including a variation effect in the display area according to a result of the lottery based on the lottery information,
The effect control means,
While allowing the display means to output a specific sound while advancing the display effect in the display area, the movable decorative body can be operated by the decorative body moving means when the display area is viewed from the front. As a visible area of the display area is smaller than that in a state where it is not performed, it is configured to be able to perform a movable decorative body effect that operates the movable decorative body,
The movable decorative body that is operated by the decorative body moving unit is such that the visible movable area of the display area becomes small when the display area is viewed from the front when the movable decorative body is executed. The display area of the display means so that the line of sight is blocked by the movable decorative body when the display area is viewed obliquely from the direction in which the movable decorative body is arranged in the standby state in which the operation by the means is not performed. The lens portion , which is provided so as to project from the side to the player side and is visible through the opening in the standby state before being operated by the ornament moving means, is operated by the ornament moving means. It is the movable decorative element is arranged so it becomes visible through the opening Oite the operation state after being,
When the display area is viewed obliquely from the direction in which the movable decoration is arranged, the movable decoration is such that the visible area of the display area is smaller than when the display area is viewed from the front. When the movable decoration is operated by the movable decoration, the movable decoration controlled by the effect control means when performing the movable decorative effect when viewed from a direction opposite to the direction in which the movable decorative element is arranged. gaming machine, characterized in that emission of the light emitting portion provided in the body may be visually recognized.

Images